TZPC10_EN_Col96_FV_Show.pdf

SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0, Version for SAP NetWeaver

Introduction - Delta Changes Summary

Material Number : 50106030

Introduction - Delta Changes Summary Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain all the new SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0, version for SAP NetWeaver Delta changes

© 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

RKT

2

Topics Page 1. Architecture Backend and Frontend changes Connectivity

2. Platform Support and Authentication ABAP Application Server Support Client Support Security

3. Administration and EPM Clients Administration Console Harmonized Web User Interface and EPM add-in

4. Functional Enhancements 5. Technical Enhancements 6. Integration Enhancements





Architecture Backend and Frontend Changes

The SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0, version for SAP NetWeaver installation consists of an ABAP Application server and Client installation.

.NET Server is no longer required Enhanced native SAP ERP and NetWeaver BW Integration as well as SAP EPM integration Via Financial Information Management New harmonized UI and common EPM add-in


RKT

5

Architectural Changes between BPC NW 7.5 and BPC NW 10.0 BPC NW 7.5

BPC NW 10.0

BPC Clients Admin (Thick)

MS Office Clients

Web (Thin)

Others

BPC Clients Admin (Thin)

HTTP/SOAP

MS Office Clients

Web (Thin)

Others

Web Server (IIS) & .NET Application Server Web Services

HTTP/REST

Conversion and Application Services

NetWeaver BW (Application Server) RFC Calls

Rest Web Services

NetWeaver BW (Application Server) Application Logic

MDX

NetWeaver BW OLAP Engine

Application Logic

SQL

Database Relational Database (any NW supports)


MDX

NetWeaver BW OLAP Engine

SQL

In memory (optional) BWA

Database Relational Database (any NW supports)

In memory (optional) BWA

RKT

6

Architecture Connectivity

REST (Representational State Transfer) Web Service enables communication between SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation Clients and SAP NetWeaver BW (Application Server). Also known as RESTFul Web Service, it relies on a stateless, Client / Server, cacheable communications protocol and in virtually all cases, the HTTP communication protocol is used. All services will be exposed as RESTful Web services for internal communication between BPC 10 NW clients and server. SOAP (Simple Object Access Protocol) Web services will be used to communicate with external applications such as EPM Applications (that is FIM).


RKT

7





Platform Support and Authentication ABAP Application Server Support

Requires SAP NetWeaver 7.3 Any operating system supported by SAP NetWeaver 7.3 ABAP Web Application Server VMware for productive usage Any database supported by SAP NetWeaver 7.3 Web Server: ABAP Web Application server Language support: Install SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation on nonEnglish OS servers in French, German, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Russian, Spanish, Italian, Portuguese.


RKT

9

Platform Support and Authentication Client Support

Windows Vista Client (32 and 64-bit), Windows XP (32-bit) and Windows 7 (32-bit and 64-bit) Internet Explorer 7 and 8 Microsoft Office 2003, 2007 and 2010 (32-bit and 64-bit)


RKT

10

Platform Support and Authentication Security

Key Points about Security: SAP NetWeaver Authentication Granular security BPC service user role and BPC User role Integration into Single Sign-On (SSO) environment Limited access to NW security Support for NW Users and Matrix Security CMS (Central Management System) Authentication is NOT supported


RKT

11





Administration and EPM Clients Administration Console

The Administration web client provides a new and revolutionized user experience Business User interface is now Flex-based Developed in Adobe Flex, the Web Client is based on SBC (Shared Business Component) BUI* Framework Dimension and Dimension members can now be created, edited without Microsoft Excel requirement


RKT

13

Administration and EPM Clients Harmonized Web User Interface and EPM Add-in

.NET add-on for Office will be implemented and shared by Excel, Word, and PowerPoint. EPM Office Add-in Excel replaces all existing classic EPM Excel Clients Both Microsoft Office Clients and Web Client can be used for planning activities Administration Landing page is a Flex-based thin Client and displays all administration objects


RKT

14





Functional Enhancements NW Authorization Integration Books Work Status Improvements Journal Reporting Enhancement Business Rules Consolidation Central Incremental Consolidation Consolidation Monitor Controls

NW Authorization Integration Benefits in moving to NW based Authorization instead 7.x’s BPC owned security implementation: Better Performance as Security is implemented at the core OLAP engine. Meet the Customer demand for identity management Solution Manager Integration Move closer to supporting GRC Access Controls in the future Tighter integration with NW Native support of Matrix Security One less thing to worry about for Engine Unification for one planning platform within SAP.


RKT

17

Books BPC will provide a business user-friendly approach to distributing performance results by publishing static set of reports to the server called Books. A book represents single or multiple predefined reports where the data varies by dimension members. The data is a snapshot at the time of publication and serves to provide accessible secured historical data. Books are secured by the end user “member access” security profile to ensure authorized access via the Content Library. Books can be sent to a printer or saved in PDF format Books can be published to the web client’s Library A new online Books Viewer is also included in this release Books can be created in real time or scheduled


RKT

18

Work Status (WS) When changing Work State, drop down will now show only valid target statuses (instead of all configured). More user friendly Error messages when user violates the configured WS rules. Work Status will now be configured on Account dimension (MS version does not allow Account Dimension for WS and will continue to retain the restriction due to the validation framework of MS version).


RKT

19

Journals Faster and easier creation of templates New interface for easier template creation Maintain dates as additional header items (effective date requirement)

New web interface for journals Enhanced interface delivering increased flexibility and usability New home page displaying list of journals filtered according to the current view with access to all relevant actions Automatic calculation of totals and live syntax check on members saves time & reduces errors New options per journal : Balanced by Entity, balanced by Entity Currency (NW only) New BADI calculations automatically generating new items, displayed in a separate grids Easier creation and usability for posting multiple journal entries Advanced Query allows end-users to define criteria making it faster and easier to display specific journals All dimensions and journal options can be used as filters Filter on text fields “Beginning with…”, “Containing…”, “In List” as well as on Dates : “From… To…” © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

RKT

20

Business Rules Faster and easier creation and maintenance of business rules New Home Page provides overview of all existing business rules per model in a given environment Access methods and method-based multipliers (former rules and rules header) in the same interface for easier navigation Simplified interface for business rules creation and maintenance New advanced grids for easier maintenance (copy/paste/delete functionalities) New member picker screens for relevant fields


RKT

21

Consolidation Central New interface for performing consolidation tasks on the web New Consolidation Central folder allows consolidators and authorized users to perform their day to day tasks on the web including: Scope creation and maintenance Journals data entry Controls monitoring Consolidation monitoring


RKT

22

Ownership Manager Faster and easier creation and maintenance of scopes The former Dynamic Hierarchy Editor has been renamed “Ownership Manager” New web interface for greater usability Automatic calculation of Methods and Percentages based upon ownership data entry New contextual menu available when editing a scope (to add an entity in a group, pin/unpin a selected entity) Use advanced options to copy/cut/paste data using Excel-like functions or using the right click of the mouse


RKT

23

Consolidation Monitor New consolidation monitoring interface New Consolidation Monitor interface enables users to track information for a given group, sub-group or entity: Control set status Work status Currency conversion status Consolidation status (process to be executed or not)

Run select tasks directly from the Consolidation Monitor interface for selected entities: Run translation Run consolidation View running processes

Incremental currency conversion and consolidation will be available for greater performances


RKT

24

Incremental Consolidation Faster than ever Consolidation processing time Only entities with updated figures are consolidated (and/or converted) Response time is drastically reduced Instrumental in order to support massive concurrent Consolidation processes How this works? Internal timestamps will compare last Consolidation and Translation processing versus last data update One or both of the 2 processes will be triggered according to this

What Incremental Consolidation does not consider Changes in currency rates and/or Ownership data Changes in Business Rules Changes in Master data Changes in another category’s data (when using Simulation categories)


RKT

25

Controls New administration interface for controls – Home Page “Controls” replace the former “Validation business rules” New home page allowing an easy maintenance, thanks to : Enable / disable controls per model See overview of existing controls, sets and assignments per model Gain direct access to controls, sets and assignments per model

New administration interface for controls – Controls definitions New screen provides list of controls that exist for a given model Filter list of displayed controls by control set Create, edit, delete or print one or multiple controls New properties improve usability and increase flexibility “Type” property to identify blocking and non-blocking controls, for easier control maintenance “Threshold” property allows for setting a tolerance level for a control(value or percentage), increasing flexibility “Level” property, linked to the same property in the entity dimension, allows dynamic calculation of the relevant controls for a given entity


RKT

26

Controls Monitor New web-based control monitoring interface Have complete visibility of control statuses for entities you are responsible for Launch control calculations for selected entities View details of controls for a selected entity For a selected member: View detailed expression of a selected control Run controls, Dismiss or reset controls (requires specific access rights to the corresponding task)


RKT

27




4. Functional Enhancements 5. Technical Enhancements

6. Integration Enhancements

Technical Enhancements Shared Query Engine Improvements Script Logic Improvements Content Delivery Granular Transport

Shared Query Engine (SQE) Improvements SQE will use native BW Query (Bex Query) to calculate Periodic, QTD and YTD measures for Periodic Applications instead of MDX. Engineering testing shows that 50% performance improvement in some cases. Similar implementation on YTD Storage Application might be implemented. Custom measures for both Storage Application will NOT be supported.


RKT

30

Script Logic Improvements Script Logic will now support parallelization by packaging scoped data based on customer mentioned dimension (through new keyword XDIM_PACKAGEBY and no of parallel process provided from DM prompt.


RKT

31

Content Delivery Contains templates, examples, blueprints, best practice templates, demo packages, regulations, rules. It is an example how a customer uses an Application Add-on. Benefits of Content: Every customer demands a solution for content— current answer is that content has to be developed as part of implementation (what customers hear: slow and expensive) Binds partners to SAP Enables Best Practice and “Application” delivering through content Enables scaling, fast and more flexible go to market Customers can reduce the implementation effort Customers have access to dramatically more expertise from the partner ecosystem (as partners can create, package and ship content) Customers can reduce costs and speed deployment by upgrading content -- fix only the “delta”


RKT

32

Granular Transport BPC NW 10.0 will support Granular transport to move any given BPC object from customer development system to QA & Production systems. In 7.x, customers need to transport whole AppSet every time. Customers & Consultants will still need to manually make sure logical sequence manually if they are transporting one AppSet’s objects in multiple transports. Objects can be collected to a transport from BW Administrative Bench (Transaction RSA1) which existing BW customers are very much familiar with.


RKT

33




4. Functional Enhancements 5. Technical Enhancements 6. Integration Enhancements ERP BW

ERP Integration BPC Data Manager will now support loading directly from SAP ERP system both in FULL & DELTA mode through SAP Delivered ERP Extractors. Business user will now have ability to load data directly from SAP ECC through already replicated & configured data sources (like 0EC_PCA_1, 3FI_SL_xx_TT, 0FI_GL_1, 0FI_GL_10, etc.) of underlying BW system to BPC Application Users can provide specific selection (For example, specific Company Code) for the data load and they can load data both in full & delta (only changes from prior loading) mode. Customers can load both master & transactional data from SAP ECC.


RKT

35

BW Integration BPC Data Manager will now support loading directly from BW’s Data Store Objects (DSO) both in FULL & DELTA mode. BPC 7.x supported only loading from Cubes. Now, customers can load from DSO (Typically, EDW layer within BW). Users can provide specific selection (For example, specific Company Code) for the data load and they can load data both in full & delta (only changes from prior loading) mode. Customers can NOT load master data from DSO to BPC dimension. They can only load to BPC Application.

Delta loading & Selections from BW Cubes will be supported. In Summary: Full load is supported for Standard Cube, Virtual Cube, Multi-provider, Standard DSO, Write-optimized DSO. Delta load is supported for Standard Cube, Standard DSO, Write-optimized DSO. Selection will be supported for Standard Cube, Virtual Cube, Multi-provider, Standard DSO, Write-optimized DSO during both Fully & Delta loads.


RKT

36

Introduction - Delta Changes Summary Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Explain all the new SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0, version for SAP NetWeaver Delta changes


RKT

37

© 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG. The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice. Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors. Microsoft, Windows, Excel, Outlook, and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. IBM, DB2, DB2 Universal Database, System i, System i5, System p, System p5, System x, System z, System z10, System z9, z10, z9, iSeries, pSeries, xSeries, zSeries, eServer, z/VM, z/OS, i5/OS, S/390, OS/390, OS/400, AS/400, S/390 Parallel Enterprise Server, PowerVM, Power Architecture, POWER6+, POWER6, POWER5+, POWER5, POWER, OpenPower, PowerPC, BatchPipes, BladeCenter, System Storage, GPFS, HACMP, RETAIN, DB2 Connect, RACF, Redbooks, OS/2, Parallel Sysplex, MVS/ESA, AIX, Intelligent Miner, WebSphere, Netfinity, Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM Corporation. Linux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the U.S. and other countries. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, PostScript, and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation. UNIX, X/Open, OSF/1, and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open Group. Citrix, ICA, Program Neighborhood, MetaFrame, WinFrame, VideoFrame, and MultiWin are trademarks or registered trademarks of Citrix Systems, Inc. HTML, XML, XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3C®, World Wide Web Consortium, Massachusetts Institute of Technology. Java is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. JavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc., used under license for technology invented and implemented by Netscape.

Business Objects and the Business Objects logo, BusinessObjects, Crystal Reports, Crystal Decisions, Web Intelligence, Xcelsius, and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd. Business Objects is an SAP company. Sybase and Adaptive Server, iAnywhere, Sybase 365, SQL Anywhere, and other Sybase products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sybase, Inc. Sybase is an SAP company. All other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies. Data contained in this document serves informational purposes only. National product specifications may vary. The information in this document is proprietary to SAP. No part of this document may be reproduced, copied, or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express prior written permission of SAP AG. This document is a preliminary version and not subject to your license agreement or any other agreement with SAP. This document contains only intended strategies, developments, and functionalities of the SAP® product and is not intended to be binding upon SAP to any particular course of business, product strategy, and/or development. Please note that this document is subject to change and may be changed by SAP at any time without notice. SAP assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions in this document. SAP does not warrant the accuracy or completeness of the information, text, graphics, links, or other items contained within this material. This document is provided without a warranty of any kind, either express or implied, including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, or non-infringement. SAP shall have no liability for damages of any kind including without limitation direct, special, indirect, or consequential damages that may result from the use of these materials. This limitation shall not apply in cases of intent or gross negligence. The statutory liability for personal injury and defective products is not affected. SAP has no control over the information that you may access through the use of hot links contained in these materials and does not endorse your use of third-party Web pages nor provide any warranty whatsoever relating to third-party Web pages.

SAP, R/3, SAP NetWeaver, Duet, PartnerEdge, ByDesign, SAP BusinessObjects Explorer, StreamWork, and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other countries.


RKT

38

SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0, Version for Microsoft

Introduction - Delta Changes Summary

Introduction - Delta Changes Summary Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain all the new SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0, version for Microsoft Delta changes


RKT

2

1. Architecture and Platform Support Server Client and Browser

2. EPM Clients Web User Interface EPM Office Add-in

3. Functional Enhancements Automated Variance Analysis (AVA) Journal reporting enhancement


2. Administration and EPM Clients Administration Console Web User Interface


Architecture and Platform Support: Server Side 64-bit support for all Microsoft Operating systems and components Windows server 2008 & R2 series (64 bit only) Standard/Enterprise/DataCenter IIS 7.0/7.5 .NET 3.5 framework

SQL server 2008 ( including R2 ) Enterprise edition only Support Globalization/Multiple language server Operating System Microsoft SQL Server Reporting Services no more required Faster data input and retrieval with optimized Shared Query Engine Use of global cache to improve performance and scalability


RKT

5




Architecture and Platform Support: Client and Browser BPC Client supports the following clients: Windows XP (32-bit) Windows Vista (32-bit & 64-bit) Windows 7 (32-bit & 64-bit) BPC Web supports the following web browsers: Internet Explorer 8.0 Internet Explorer 7.0 BPC Office supports the following versions of Microsoft Office: Microsoft Office 2003 (32 bit and 64 bit) Microsoft Office 2007 (32 bit and 64 bit) Microsoft Office 2010 (32 bit and 64 bit)

Common EPM Client for SAP BusinessObjects Analyzer, SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10 (Version Microsoft and SAP NetWeaver ).


RKT

7




EPM Clients: Web User Interface The Web Client is the Web User Interface used for Live and web based reporting.

• Two types of Web report: Reports and Input Forms • Use Report designer to create either a Report or Input Form • Ability to add , manage and review comments history • Possibility to build and format Charts within Web reports


RKT

9




EPM Clients: EPM Office Add-in The EPM Add-in is an add-in to Microsoft Excel, Microsoft Word and Microsoft PowerPoint. Designed to give access to SAP Business Objects EPM Solutions' product data, the EPM Add-in helps analyze data from EPM solutions. It is also used to submit data into SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation Models using appropriate connection.

EPM Context bar displays dimensions and members Create, modify reports using EPM Pane Flash object insertion Asymmetric reports are not supported in Microsoft Office Word and Microsoft Office PowerPoint


RKT

11




Functional Enhancements: Automated Variance Analysis (AVA) Automated Variance Analysis will facilitate business users to view variances (For example, Plan Vs. Actual) AVA navigates Application data automatically, determining key contributors of performance, without manual investigation. AVA results are calculated on the fly. Flow of operations within AVA:

AVA can be accessed from the Web to run Live Reports


RKT

13




Functional Enhancements: Journal Reporting Enhancement

Ability to post multiple Journal entries The new web and enhanced interface delivers more flexibility and displays a list of Journals that can filtered based on the Context View. Advanced Query allows end-users to define criteria making it faster and easier to display specific journals All dimensions and journal options can be used as filters Filter on text fields “Beginning with…”, “Containing…”, “In List” as well as on Dates : “From… To…”


RKT

15

Introduction - Delta Changes Summary Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Explain all the new SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0, version for Microsoft Delta changes


RKT

16






RKT

17


New BPC NW Administration UI Overview

New BPC NW Administration UI Overview Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Describe the new BPC NW Administration UI Describe the new Web Client and features Explain the new terminology Explain Environment features Explain Model Features Explain Security new Features Explain Rules Explain Features Explain IMG screen on BW side


RKT

2

New BPC NW Administration UI Overview New Terminology and Differences Between BPC 7.x Version BPC 10

BPC 7.5

Environment

Appset

Dimensions

Dimensions

Models

Applications

Business Rules

Business Rules

Control settings

Validation Rules

Logic Script

Script logic

Work Status settings

Work Status settings

Journal Templates

Journal Templates

Audit report settings

System report settings


RKT

3

New BPC NW Web Client New Web Client

Business Objects Planning and Consolidation 10 version for NetWeaver Web Client: When you open the web client, you are presented with the Home Workspace. The home workspace is always available, and contains a menu with all the components that you are authorized to access. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

RKT

4

New BPC NW Web Client New Web Client

The New Web Client has the following Components: Start Page: Describes the initial Planning and Consolidation web client page. From this page, you can select from your objects, create reports and launch client applications. Activities: Provides information about using Business Process Flows (Processes). Library: Provides information about how to access the objects that are saved in the Library view. Documents: Provides information about using the Documents view to post, and retrieve files, and to manage content display Audit: Provides information about reporting on system information and activity. Consolidation Central: Helps to generate and manage consolidated data. – Consolidation Monitor: Generate and monitor consolidated data from data reported by Group and Entity members – Control Monitor: Execute and monitor controls used to validate the reported data – Journals: Create and manage journal entries containing adjustments and eliminations used for correcting reported data – Ownership Manager: Create and Manage ownership-based hierarchies used for performing statutory consolidations


RKT

5

New BPC NW Web Client Consolidation Monitor


RKT

6

New BPC NW Web Client Control Monitor

The Controls Monitor is a workspace for executing and monitoring controls. Control monitor displays control status with entity breakdown Control monitor displays control status for one entity Control monitor displays detailed control status for one entity Control monitor runs controls for the selected entity or entities © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

RKT

7

New BPC NW Web Client Journals

Journals - Following tasks may be performed: Create a journal entry Modify a journal entry Copy one or more journal entries Post one or more journal entries, and so on © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

RKT

8

New BPC NW Web Client Ownership Manager

Ownership Manager: Ownership Manager is used to define an ownership-based hierarchy entity structure. It allows you to create periodic-specific hierarchies of corporate entities to use in statutory consolidation, or in cases where hierarchy changes for an application need to be tracked by Category and Time.


RKT

9

New BPC NW Administration UI Overview New Admin Web Client

On the Web Client page you have to click the Planning and Consolidation Administration hyperlink in order to open the Administration web client in a separate workspace The Administration console is now a full Web Administration client. All the administration tasks are now available through a Web Client. The Administration console has a brand new User Experience and has a dedicated workspace which you can access by using a link from the Start Page in the Home tab. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

RKT

10

New BPC NW Administration UI Overview New Admin Web Client

Navigational Panel on the left side of UI enables to access all the administration views that are grouped by consistent domains. For each view, the first level of navigation is a main list of all the objects of the current view (For example, the list of dimensions, Models, Users, and so on.


RKT

11

New BPC NW Administration UI Overview Environment

On the Administration web client page, you can see two hyperlinks to manage and change the environments. Appsets are renamed as the “Environments” in BusinessObejcts Planning and Consolidation 10.0, version for NetWeaver. If you click the “Change Environment” hyperlink then you can change to a different environment based on your access. In order to manage the environment, use the “Manage All Environment” hyperlink. This will take you to a page where you can Copy, Delete, or Create Environments. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

RKT

12

New BPC NW Administration UI Overview Environments

Manage Environment: In this page you can Copy a Environment, Create a New Environment, and Delete an Environment. Even though the UI has changed, the functionality is still the same as 7.X versions. Also on this page, you can see if the Environment status is set to Online or Offline. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

RKT

13

New BPC NW Administration UI Overview Dimension

Enhanced Dimension maintenance capabilities: The new user interface of the Dimensions enables to manage a Dimension through three distinct pages: – The structure of Dimension – Members maintenance page – Hierarchical view of the members © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

RKT

14


All the properties and settings of a Dimension are managed in the Structure view. This page allows you to add a dimension property or add the required properties for Consolidation or for Ownership model You can also add the hierarchies to the dimensions


RKT

15


The members are managed in an “Excel like” grid and you can copy and paste (within the list and from Excel), sorting, filtering, and ordering column, and so on. The maximum length of a Member ID can be 32 characters and can accept dash and underscores but cannot accept any other special characters. Member status is displayed in the row headers of the list of all members that have been edited or changed or added. A icon enables to identify the status of the edited members and a tooltip provides the details of the errors. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

RKT

16


Excel has been dropped in this release and dimension members are maintained in the Excel like new interface. Delete and Revert buttons are used to undo the changes done to the dimension members but only if the changes are not confirmed. In order to use the dimension formulas, you need to check the “Allow Member Formulas” in the “Structure of Dimension” page.


RKT

17

New BPC NW Administration UI Overview Dimension Member Formula

In order to create dimension formulas, you need to use the new Formula editor under the “Rules” option. But first activate the “Allow Dimension formulas” option for the dimension on which you want to create the formulas. In this release, a new Formula editor has been introduced to create and manage the formulas.


RKT

18

New BPC NW Administration UI Overview Model

The term “Application” in Business Planning and Consolidation for 7.X NetWeaver versions has been renamed as “Model” in Business Objects Planning and Consolidation 10.0 for NetWeaver . You can access the “Models” view by selecting “Model” under the “Dimensions and Models” domain in the left side panel.


RKT

19

New BPC NW Administration UI Overview Model Model Type There are 2 types: Reporting – Standard – (called as “Generic” in 7.X version) – Financial – Consolidation

Drivers and Rates (called as “Non-Reporting” in 7.X versions) – Exchange Rates (called as “Rate” in 7.X versions) – Ownership – Generic

YTDINPUT parameter has a new label “Data Entry Mode” in the Administration console and the value can be set now directly when creating a Model using the creation wizard. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

RKT

20

New BPC NW Administration UI Overview Model In step 4 while creating Model In this step, the dimensions will be added to the model. A status panel at the bottom of the wizard gives the information about the missing dimension types. If the source is a blank model then all the required dimensions need to be added to the Model. You cannot select multiple dimensions of the same type except for the user-defined dimensions. Among the selected dimensions you can also set the secured dimensions (for example, the dimensions that will be used to define the data access profiles for this model).


RKT

21


COMMENT parameter has a new label “Enabled Comments” in the Administration console and the value can be set and changed now directly in the structure page and settings of a Model. In the previous 7.X versions, comments were enabled for an Application using the Web Application parameters but this has been changed in the current release.


RKT

22


APPROVALORG parameter has a new label “Hierarchy” in the Administration console and the value can be set and changed now directly in the Data Locking Settings dialog of a Model (Work Status feature). In the previous 7.X releases this parameter was part of the Web application parameter but has been changed in the current versions.


RKT

23

New BPC NW Administration UI Overview Security Security: On the front end side there is no change in the BPC 10 security except that the BPC users are NetWeaver users instead of Active Directory users. SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0 NW version, uses the NetWeaver users to login into BPC. It doesn’t support AD users, CMS users anymore. From a functional perspective, the main changes in the security configuration are related to the new user experience which enables to improve the way to manage users, teams, and profiles and also allows mass maintenance.


RKT

24

New BPC NW Administration UI Overview Security It lists all the users assigned to the environment We can add, remove, or edit a user. Mass maintenance of users and teams are also allowed. Multiple edition of users is allowed to enable to modify several users simultaneously. You can see in this list the ID’s of the users, their last and first names and also their email address. These properties are those from the NW users and cannot be changed on the frontend .


RKT

25

New BPC NW Administration UI Overview Business Rules Business Rules: Like BPC 7.x version, you no longer need to select the business rules to activate when creating a Model or modifying a Model. Activation of Business rules activation is done directly within the Business Rules view which you can access under the “Rules” domain.


RKT

26

New BPC NW Administration UI Overview Logic Script In SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0, for NetWeaver, enhancements are made to the Logic script editor. Basically Logic Scripts are defined in a brand new script editor. You can access the “Logic Scripts” view under the “Rules” domain. A list of Planning and Consolidation keywords (K2 functions) and also MDX keywords are available for selection and insertion. You can use the “Pretty Print” function to make the whole script more readable by adding indentations and using upper case for keywords.


RKT

27

New BPC NW Administration UI Overview Logic Script

A tooltip describing the valid syntax is displayed for each of them You can insert a keyword from the list into the text editor by drag and drop, double click or by using the “Insert Keyword” button. Categories of keywords and wrong syntax are highlighted with specific color coding – Keywords are highlighted with a Blue color – Constant values are highlighted with a Green color – Comments are highlighted with a Grey color – Everything else is highlighted with a Black color – Wrong syntax is highlighted with a Red color


RKT

28

New BPC NW Administration UI Overview Work Status

Work Status: There are no functional changes done to work status in this release other than the new user experience to configure the work status. Work status can be accessed from the “Features” domain An overview of the Work Statuses defined for the Environment and the Data locking settings by Model is available as the main page of this view. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

RKT

29

New BPC NW Administration UI Overview Work Status

Work Status: You can activate the locking process for a Model directly within this view. Also you can configure the email notification settings directly within this view. Activating both above through the administration parameter is no longer needed unlike BPC 7.x versions. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

RKT

30

New BPC NW Administration UI Overview Context Defaults

Context Defaults: This is the new feature introduced in the BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0, NetWeaver . “Context Defaults” is available under the “Features” domain. This enables you to specify what the defaults are used for the scope context.


RKT

31

New BPC NW Administration UI Overview Context Defaults

Context Defaults: In the Context Defaults main page, you can specify the default model that will be used when initializing the scope context. In the bottom panel of the main page of this view, you can edit and then specify the defaults per Dimension of the selected Model. The scope context will be initialized with the defaults of the relevant dimensions: – The default Member in a Report – The default Member in Data Input document – Whether the Dimension is displayed in the scope context or not – The Description of the Dimension is displayed instead of the ID – Only the ID of the Members is displayed or only the Description or both


RKT

32

New BPC NW Administration UI Overview Audit Capabilities

Audit Capabilities: Changes in the Dimension members are audited if the audit of the Administration activity is enabled on this page.


RKT

33

New BPC NW Administration UI Overview Drill Through

Drill-through: There are no functional changes but only a new user experience to configure the Drillthroughs. The overall list of Drill-throughs of the Environment is available in a dedicated view which you can access under “Features” © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

RKT

34

New BPC NW Administration UI Overview Multi-user Object Locking

Multi-users accessing the same object: Multiple users when accessing the same Administration objects like the Dimensions, Models, Security, BPF’s and so on, would result in locking the objects. For example, when the Category dimension is being edited by user “A”, at the same time if user “B” tries to access the Category dimension then user “B” would get an error message saying that the object is being edited by another user. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

RKT

35

New BPC NW Administration UI Overview Technical Parameter

Some of the Application and Appset specific parameters which were part of the BPC for Web in 7.X versions have been moved to backend BW side. All the other parameters (mainly technical parameters) are now managed in IMG (SIMGH transaction), following the SAP Product Standards requirements. In IMG, some parameters are set at the Environment level or Model level but also in both levels for few parameters. In addition, some parameters are called “global parameters”. They are set at an upper level than the Environment. For example, they are applied to all the Environments.


RKT

36

New BPC NW Administration UI Overview Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Describe the new BPC NW Administration UI Describe the new Web Client and features Explain the new terminology Explain Environment features Explain Model Features Explain Security new Features Explain Rules Explain Features Explain IMG screen on BW side


RKT

37






RKT

38


Dimensions

Dimensions Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Manage Dimensions Explain how to enter members Manage Dimension members Manage Dimension Structure Manage Dimension Formulas Define properties and hierarchies


RKT

2

Dimensions Dimensions Overview

The main overview page contains the list of all the dimensions in the environment In the new Admin Web Client, you can access the “Dimensions” view by selecting the “Dimensions” under the Dimensions and Models domain in the left side panel.


RKT

3

Dimensions Dimensions Overview

On the right side you can see the Dimension ID, its description, Type and Status. – Dimension ID: The name of the Dimension – Dimension Description: Description of Dimension – Dimension Type: Specifies the type of Dimension – Status: Indicates the status of dimension like whether the dimensions needs to be processed (yellow icon) or not (green icon)

When you select the Dimension, the toolbar with actions gets activated. – “New”: This action enables to create a dimension – “Edit Members”: This action enables to edit the list of members – “Edit Structure”: This action enables to edit the structure of the dimension to manage its properties – “Delete”: This action enables to delete a dimension by copying a selected dimension – “Process”: This action enables to process a dimension or a multiple selection of dimensions


RKT

4

Dimensions Create a New Dimension

Create a New Dimension: In order to create a Dimension, you need to access and select the “Dimensions” view under the “Dimensions and Models” domain in the navigational panel. Click on the “New” button in the toolbar to create a new dimension. Upon clicking new button a dialogs box opens in which you can specify – ID (Mandatory) – Name of the Dimension – Description (Optional) – Dimension Description – Type (Mandatory) – Dimension Type


RKT

5

Dimension Dimension Types

Below are the different dimension types: Account – (A) Category – (C) Audit – (D) - (“Data Source” in 7.5 version) Entity – (E) Group – (G) Intercompany – (I) Currency – (R) Subtables – (S) Time – (T) User defined – (U)


RKT

6

Dimension Structure of Dimension

The new dimension is created and directly opens up the structure of the Dimension where some specific system properties are automatically generated. System generated properties will be highlighted with a blue background which means that they cannot be modified nor deleted. You can add some properties, some hierarchies and set some other settings like “Allow dimension formulas” © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

RKT

7

Dimension Structure of Dimension

There are 2 ways to open up the structure of the Dimension: – You can edit the structure of a dimension from the list of dimensions – Edit Structure command in the toolbar – Or from the dimension members list page – Edit Structure hyperlink


RKT

8

Dimension Add Dimension Properties

In all types of dimensions, you can manually add a new user-defined property by using the “Add New Property” menu option. A user-defined property can be deleted. You have to select the property and then use the “Remove” command to delete the property. You can also change the name and the number of characters directly in the cells of the list of properties. The same for the ID but only if the new property has not been saved yet. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

RKT

9

Dimension Add a Dimension Property

Required Properties for Consolidation, Ownership and Rate: Depending on the type of the Dimension, you can automatically add a set of required properties for Consolidation and / or Ownership and / or Rate Model. You can use the “Add Required Properties for Consolidation (or Ownership or Rate model) menu in the toolbar to add the required properties. These properties are user-defined and can be changed or removed.


RKT

10

Dimension Add Hierarchies

In the Structure page of a dimension, hierarchies can be defined by clicking on the “Add” Button which opens a dialog box in which you must specify the name of the hierarchy. The name of the hierarchy is just a caption (display name) and not the ID. In Business Objects Planning and Consolidation 7.5 NW version, the ID of the type “PARENTH#” is automatically generated by the system. In 10.0 version, you can have breaks in the sequence of hierarchy ID’s ( PARENTH1, PARENTH3, PARENTH4 , and so on) You can change the Name by editing the field directly and can also remove the Hierarchy by selecting it in the list and use the ‘Remove” command. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

RKT

11

Dimension Dimension Settings

Referential integrity setting: Depending on the type of the dimension, you can specify a dimension which will be used as a referential for validating the values for a specific property. Referential integrity is same as the “Reference Dimension” in the 7.5 version.

Allow Member Formulas setting: This option must be checked in order to be able to specify some member formulas for the dimension in the “Member Formulas” view. If this option is not checked, the dimension is not available in this “Member Formulas” view


RKT

12

Dimension Manage Dimension Members

You can edit the list of members directly from the list of dimensions (Edit members command in the toolbar) or from the Structure page of the dimension (hyperlink)


RKT

13

Dimensions Manage Dimension Members

The members are managed in an “Excel like” grid in which you can use the main features that are expected for the tasks like manually entering the dimension member, copy and paste (within the list and from Excel), sorting, filtering and ordering columns.


RKT

14

Dimensions Create Dimension Member

You can create a dimension member by entering a valid ID. Once saved the ID cannot be changed anymore. The max length of an ID is now up to 32 characters. Also dimension member ID can accept Dash and Underscores but it cannot accept the special characters. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

RKT

15

Dimension Create a Dimension Member

A member status is displayed in the row headers of the list for all the Members that have been edited (new or modified members) A specific icon enables to identify the status of these members: – Member has been inserted – Member to be saved – Errors – A tooltip provides a description of the status and details for errors

You can identify cells which have been edited The cells which have been edited will have the background color as yellow which helps in easily identifying the edited properties/cells


RKT

16

Dimension Manage Dimension Member

Revert: You can revert the changes made to the members as long as these changes are not confirmed when saving. Select the rows for which you want to abort the changes and click on the “Revert” command from the toolbar. The members will be restored as they were at the last saving.


RKT

17

Dimension Manage Dimension Member

Restore deleted members: You can use the Restore deleted members command button from the toolbar in order to restore all or some of the deleted members unless these deletions are not confirmed when saving.


RKT

18


Sorting Order / Apply Hierarchy order: By default the list of members is sorted by ascending ID and you can the apply a new sorting order to the column or columns In 7.5 version, the order of members that a user can specify in the list is not persisted when saving. However, the user can manually define the order of members under each node of a hierarchy and then apply this specific sorting order to the list of members when he/she wants by using the “Apply Hierarchy Order” command. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

RKT

19


You can export the list of members into a CSV file by using the “Export to CSV” command.


RKT

20

Dimension Manage Dimension Members

View and manage hierarchies in a graphical editor: If hierarchies have been defined for dimensions, you can open a graphical editor to edit these hierarchies. Click on the “View” drop down list to select the “Hierarchy” to edit the hierarchies. Here you can reorder leaves and nodes of a hierarchy directly directly in this editor by using the “Move Up” and “Move Down” button or use drag and drop method to change the parent/child relationships.


RKT

21

Dimension Manage Dimension Members If there are several hierarchies in the dimension, then you can switch from one to another by using the “Show” drop down list. You can also choose to display by “Member ID only” or “Member ID and Description” or just “Member Description” by using the “Display” command drop down list.


RKT

22

Dimension Dimension Save and Process

Save: After making modifications to the dimension members you can simply Save the Dimension and Process it later. If there are any errors while saving the dimension members then a detailed error message will be shown. While closing a dimension if dome changes have not been saved due to some errors, then these changes will be lost. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

RKT

23

Dimension Dimension Save and Process

Save and Process: You can directly process a dimension from the list of members (list or hierarchy view) by using the “Save and Process” command from the toolbar You can also process the dimension from the main list of dimensions Any errors encountered while processing the dimension will be detailed in the message displayed in the status panel.


RKT

24

Dimension Manage Dimension Formulas

Member Formulas: You can access the “Member Formulas” view by selecting the “Member Formulas” under the “Rules” domain in the left side panel. Upon selecting the Member Formulas, it would show the list of all the dimensions for which member formulas are allowed. You can see the ID and description of the dimensions , the number of formulas it has and the status of the dimension whether it needs to be processed or not. Toolbar options “Open” enables to open the list of formulas of the dimension and “Process” option will enable to process a dimension or multiple selection of dimensions. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

RKT

25

Dimension Create a Member Formula

To create a new formula, open the list of formulas of the dimension and then use the “New” button which opens the Formula editor. You can select the member that must be calculated and then type the syntax of the formula.


RKT

26

Dimension Creating Dimension Formulas

Dimension Formulas toolbar contains the following actions: “New” button enables to create a member formula “Edit” button enables to open a formula “Delete” button enables to delete a formula (multiple selection allowed) “Processing the dimension” button enables to process the dimension


RKT

27

Dimension Dimension Formulas

The formula is validated when processing the dimension. The formula editor only checks if the selected member does not already have a formula and that the syntax doesn’t have more than 255 characters. When a formula is added or changed, the dimension needs to be processed. This enables to identify which formulas in a dimension that needs to be processed after creation or modification.


RKT

28

Dimensions Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Manage the dimensions Manage the dimension members Manage the dimension structure Manage the Hierarchies Manage the Member formulas


RKT

29






RKT

30


Models

Model Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain Model Page Overview Create a Model Describe Different Types of Models Manage Model settings Explain Features used with Models Copy Model, Delete Model, and Optimize Model


RKT

2

Model Model Page Overview

The term “Application” in Business Planning and Consolidation for 7.X NetWeaver versions has been renamed as “Model” in Business Objects Planning and Consolidation 10.0 for NetWeaver . You can access the “Models” view by selecting “Model” under the “Dimensions and Models” domain in the left side panel.


RKT

3

Model Model Page Overview

On the Models overview page, you can see the ID, the Description and the type of Model. For each Model, the following actions can be performed. – “New”: Enables to create a Model – “Delete”: Enables to delete a model or a multiple selection of model – “Copy”: Enables to create a model by copying a selected model – “Optimize”: Enables to run a optimization process (full or light mode) on the selected model.


RKT

4

Model Create a new Model Step 1: Name and Description Upon clicking the “New” button from the toolbar, a 6 steps wizard open in order to create a Model. First step asks for the ID (mandatory) and Description (optional) of the model.


RKT

5

Model Create a new Model Step 2: Model Type There are 2 types: Reporting – Standard – (called as “Generic” in 7.X version) – Financial – Consolidation

Drivers and Rates (called as “Non-Reporting” in 7.X versions) – Exchange Rates (called as “Rate” in 7.X versions) – Ownership – Generic


RKT

6

Model Create a new Model There are 2 data entry modes: Periodic and Year to Date. By default Periodic is selected Depending on the type selected, you can specify a model that contains the exchange rates (for Financial and Consolidation types) and also Ownership model (Consolidation type) If there are only one model of type “Exchange Rates” and one of type “Ownership” in the environment, they are selected by default.


RKT

7

Model Create a new Model Step 3: Source Model In BPC NW 10.0, you can create a new model from scratch. Use a model as a source to create a new one is no longer mandatory. You can also create a model using an existing model. For this select the “An existing model” radio button and then select the model to use as a source.


RKT

8

Model Create a New Model Step 4: Dimensions In this step the dimensions will be added to the model. A status panel at the bottom of the wizard gives the information about the missing dimension types. If the source is a blank model then all the required dimensions needs to be added to the Model. You cannot select multiple dimensions of the same type except for the user-defined dimensions. Among the selected dimensions you can also set the secured dimensions (i.e. the dimensions that will be used to define the data access profiles for this model).


RKT

9

Model Create a new Model

The list of the required dimensions depend on the type of the model: All model types must have the 4 following dimensions types: – C – Category – T – Time – E – Entity – A – Account

In addition to the 4 common dimensions, the “Financial” type model should have the following dimension types: – R - Currency

Along with 4 common dimensions, the “Consolidation” model type should have the following dimension types: – R – Currency – I – Intercompany – D – Audit ( called as Datasource in 7.5 version) – G – Group – S – Subtables


RKT

10


In addition to the 4 common dimensions, the “Ownership” type model should have the following dimension types: – I – Intercompany – G – Group

For the “Rate” model, along with 4 common dimensions, it should also have the – R – Currency


RKT

11

Model Create a new Model Step 5: Copy from Source Depending on the type of source model you selected and the content of the source model, you can specify in this step if you want to copy some of the specific objects types: – Data Manager Packages (all model types) – Journal Templates (all Reporting types) – Control definitions (Financial and Consolidation types) new option in 10.0

Each of the two last options is only enabled if some corresponding objects exist in source model In this version, you do not activate the business rules when creating a new model but directly in the Business rules view.


RKT

12


Step 6: Review and Create This step enables to review what will be the configuration of the model being created.


RKT

13

Model Edit and Modify a Model

You can edit and modify the model by selecting it from the list of models either by clicking on Edit button from toolbar or by clicking on the model hyperlink. This would open a page to view and manage the structure of the models dimensions, its type and other general settings and properties.


RKT

14

Model Edit and Modify a Model Change Type : In the model edit page, you have the option to change the model type by clicking on the “Change Type” button in the toolbar. This command opens a 3 steps wizard that enables to change the type and change some of the dimensions assigned to the model. – Step 1: Model Type: Gives an option to change the model type. In this step the type of the model you select depends on the type currently assigned to the model. If the model is of type “Reporting”, then you can only select one of the 3 Reporting types and if the model is of type “Drivers and Rates”, you can only select one of the 3 Drivers and Rates types. – Step 2: Gives the option to add or remove the dimensions to the model – Step 3: Review and Create

Add/Remove dimensions: Using this option you ca change the set of dimensions assigned to the model. This command opens a dialog that enables to remove and /or add some dimensions. In this dialog you cannot set the secured dimensions but you can modify the secured dimensions of the model directly in the list of the dimensions assigned to the model but not in the dialog which opens after clicking the Add/Remove dimensions button.


RKT

15

Model Model General Settings In the Edit model page, under the General Settings: Description filed enables to enter a description for the model In most of the model types, all other settings in this section are information and thus cannot be changed directly in this page. The list of settings depends on the type of the model. In all models, the “Data Entry Mode” setting (“YTDINPUT” web admin parameter in 7.5) can no longer be changed in any way once the model is saved. You can set a value to the “Non-interco member in Ownership” setting by selecting a member of the dimension of type “Intercompany”. “ORG_INTCO” web admin parameter in 7.5 You can set a value to the “Parent/child property used for hierarchy of Groups” setting by selecting a property (For example: PARENT_GROUP) of the dimension of type “Group”. “ORG_PARENTPROPERTY” web admin parameter in 7.5 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

RKT

16

Model Features Used With the Model Features used with the Model: Work Status: Is set to “On” if the Work Status and data locking settings are enabled for the model. Data Audit: Is set to “On” if the Data audit features is enabled for the model. Journal Templates: This one is only revelent for Reporting models. This is set to “On” if there is a journal template specified for the model. Enable Comments: Upon checking this option would enable to use the comments in the input reports. This is equivalent to “Comment” web admin parameter in 7.5 version. Use as Source of Data: Upon checking this option, would allow external applications to use this model as the source of data. This would generate a virtual provider on top of the cube (model) which enables the ODBO clients to retrieve the data of the model.


RKT

17

Model Deleting a Model

Delete a Model: From the models overview page , you can delete the one or multiple models by using the “Delete” command from the toolbar. Except for the UI, there are no changes compared to the 7.5 versions.


RKT

18

Model Copy a Model

Copy a Model: In the Models overview page you can select and then copy a model using the “Copy” command in the toolbar. Except for the UI, there are no changes compared to the 7.5 versions.


RKT

19

Model Optimization

Optimize: In the models overview page you can select and then optimize a model using the “Optimize” command in the toolbar. Like previous versions, there are 2 types of optimization: Lite Optimization and Full Optimization; except for the UI, there are no changes compared to the 7.5 versions.


RKT

20

Dimensions Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Explain Model Page Overview Create a Model Describe Different Types of Models Manage Model settings Explain Features used with Models Copy Model, Delete Model, and Optimize Model


RKT

21






RKT

22


Security

Security Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain User Management Explain Team Management Explain Task Profile Management Explain Data Access Profiles Management


RKT

2

Security Security Page Overview

Security: On the front end side there is no change in the BPC 10 security except that the users are NetWeaver users instead of Active Directory users The new web UI has a different look and feel but the concept of adding the users, teams, task profiles and data access profiles is still the same


RKT

3

Security User Management It lists all the users assigned to the environment We can add, remove, or edit users. Mass maintenance of users is also allowed. Multiple edition of users is allowed to enable to modify several users simultaneously. You can see in this list, the ID’s of the users, their last and first names and also their email address. These properties are those from the NW users and cannot be changed in the frontend .


RKT

4

Security User Management

In the next step, you can assign all the users you have selected in the previous step to one or more teams. This is not mandatory and thus you can leave the new users not assigned to any teams. The added users are now inserted in the main list of users assigned to the environment.


RKT

5


You can use the search function to filter this list of available users. You can then select some users and use the “Add” button to assign these users to the environment. You can also remove some users from the list of selected users by using the “Remove” button. “Add all” and “Remove all” enable to manage the full lists.


RKT

6

Security User Management BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0 version for SAP NetWeaver will be directly using NetWeaver users to logon into the BPC application from the Web client or Excel client. Windows Active Directory users or CMS users are no longer supported. There are two role parts to be assigned to a BPC business user in BW end and are transparent to Business users: – Static Roles: /POA/BUI_FLEX_CLIENT and /POA/BUI_UM_USER – Dynamic Roles: When a user is added to any environment or a user is assigned with any BPC security task from Admin console.

Task profile is the only security object that uses the NetWeaver authorization objects while the rest of the objects info are stored in BPC specific ABAP tables. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

RKT

7


Modify User: You can either edit one user or multiple users simultaneously In the “Teams” tab, you can see which team(s) the user(s) is/are assigned to If only one user is edited, you can manage the “team lead” setting


RKT

8


Modify User: If Multiple users are being edited, then you cannot manage the Team Lead setting As for the teams, you can distinguish, in this tab, the teams to which all the edited users are assigned (‘All Users’ value) You can also use the “Assign to all” function to assign all the edited users to a team


RKT

9


Modify User: In the “Task Profiles” tab, if it’s a single user, then task profiles will be assigned to the user directly and also will inherit through the teams he\she is assigned to.


RKT

10


For Multiple users, task profiles do not get inherited. You can add task profiles to assign them to all the selected users. You can see the list of all the task profiles assigned to one user in the selection and distinguish those that are assigned to all the edited users. “Assign to all” in this tab enables one to assign a task profile to all the edited users.


RKT

11


In the “Data Access Profiles” tab, in case of single or multiple users; these are exactly the same principles/behaviors as in the “Task Profiles” tab.


RKT

12

Security Team Management

Here you can see the list of all teams of the environment From this list, you can create or delete a team You can also edit multiple teams simultaneously. For example, mass maintenance is possible In addition to the ID and the description of the teams, you can see how many users are assigned to each of them as well as the number of task profiles and data access profiles. You can create a team without any users assigned to it


RKT

13


Modify Teams: You can edit or change multiple teams simultaneously. Only the common changes which are made while editing will be applied to the set of teams and all other things which are not changed will remain the same


RKT

14


If you edit multiple teams at a time, then under the “Users” tab you can see the list of all users assigned to the selection of teams. If a user is assigned to all the edited teams, the value in the “Assigned to” field is “All teams” If a user is not assigned to the edited teams, the value in the “Assigned to” field is “Some teams only” You can use the “Assign to all” functions to assign a user to all the edited teams You can also add the new user to the edited teams by clicking the “Add\Remove” option © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

RKT

15


Same rules as in “Users” tab apply for the “Assigned to” column in Task profiles If a task profile is assigned to all the edited teams, then “All teams” value is shown under “Assigned to” column If a task profile is not assigned to all the edited teams, then “Some teams only” value will be shown In the above screenshot, “Assign to all” function enables one to assign the task profile to all the edited teams.


RKT

16


You can assign a set of task profiles to the selection of teams.


RKT

17

Security Task Profile Management Here is the list of all the task profiles created in the environment. From this list, you can create a task profile from scratch or copy an existing one. You can also edit and delete a task profile (multiple deletion is allowed) In addition to the ID and the description of a task profile, you can see how many teams and users have this task profile.


RKT

18


The same behavior as in the “Users” and “Task Profiles” tab is applied for the “Data Access Profiles” tab


RKT

19

Security Task Profile Management There are 3 system-generated task profiles (System Admin, Primary Admin, Secondary Admin) These default task profiles cannot be changed but you can copy them.


RKT

20

Security Task Profile Management Click the “Add” button to create a new task profile. This command opens a wizard that enables to create a team through 3 distinct steps. In the first step, you must specify an ID and you can also add a description.


RKT

21

Security Task Profile Management In the second step, you have to select the task you want to assign to this new task profile. The list in the left pane contains all the available security tasks that are grouped by domain (nodes). You can select a task or a node to add all its tasks simultaneously and use the “Add” button to add it to the selection. Multiple selection is also allowed. In the list of the selected tasks, the tasks are also grouped by domain (nodes).


RKT

22

Security Task Profile Management In this last step you can check the number of tasks that will be assigned to the profile. Click “Finish” to create the task profile.


RKT

23

Security Task Profile Management After adding the Task profile, you can also edit the task profile by clicking the task profile. We can, for instance, enrich the profile by adding some security tasks to the initial list.


RKT

24

Security Data Access Profile Management Here is the list of all the data access profiles created in the environment. From this list, you can create a data access profile from scratch or copy an existing one. You can also edit and delete a data access profile (multiple deletion is allowed). In addition to the ID and the description of a data access profile, you can see how many teams and users have this data access profile.


RKT

25

Security Data Access Profile Management Click “New” to add a new data access profile.


RKT

26

Security Data Access Profile Management For each secured dimension of a model, you have to specify one or several access rights to the members. You must define an access right to some members to all the secured dimensions of a model, otherwise the access is denied to the entire model. To specify the same access right to all the members of a dimension, you can use the “All members” value.


RKT

27

Security Data Access Profile Management To assign an access right to a specific of members of the dimension use the “Select members” value. This enables one to open the member selector dialog in which you can select the set of members you need. When selecting a node, all the children are automatically selected. There is a search function in this dialog. If there is at least one hierarchy in the dimension, this hierarchical view is displayed in this dialog. In case of multiple hierarchies, you can select the hierarchy you want to use for selecting the members. This is Alla rights flatreserved. list if no hierarchy. © 2011 SAP AG.

RKT

28

Security Data Access Profile Management The access rights you can assign to a set of members are: “Write” “ Read Only” “Denied” Assign the access rights to the members of the Application and click Save to save the data access profiles


RKT

29

Security Data Access Profile Management


RKT

30

Security Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Explain User Management Explain Team Management Explain Task Profile Management Explain Data Access Profiles Management


RKT

31






RKT

32


Rules: Member Formulas

Rules: Member Formulas Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Describe the new formula editor Create a member formula


RKT

2

New Member Formula Editor

A new member formula editor has been introduced with EPM 10 NW Member formulas allow you to create and execute formulas and calculations on dimension members It guides you through the creation of new member formulas A more intuitive interface has been provided You can save formulas and then process them at a later time


RKT

3

Business Example

Suppose you want to calculate the account E1521 – Income tax on actuarial GL as a percentage of the E1520 – Actuarial GL, before tax. Let’s assume that the percentage is 13%. The formula would be: E1521 = E1520 * 0.13 Now we will see the prerequisites and where to setup this formula.


RKT

4

New Member Formula Editor Benefits

There are several benefits by using the new member formula editor: You will be guided to correctly compose your formula; No need to remember dimension members: drop down combo and a list box will help you choose the right members. You can choose to see members in a list or hierarchical view.


RKT

5

New Member Formula Editor Prerequisites

In order to use member formulas on a dimension, you need to enable this feature for that dimension. A flag can be found inside the dimension definition: It allows you to define if you want to enable or disable member formulas on a particular dimension.


RKT

6

Process Overview

This is the list of steps that will allow you to correctly define a dimension formula: 1. Open the Planning and Consolidation Administration 2. On the left pane, expand the Rules branch and click the Member formulas item 3. Click the dimension on which you want to set up the formula 4. Click the New button 5. Pick up the name of the member on which you want to apply the formula 6. Write the formula by typing it or by using the editor 7. Save the formula 8. Process the dimension


RKT

7

Create a new Member Formula: Step 1 of 8

Open Planning and Consolidation Administration


RKT

8


On the left pane, expand the Rules branch and click Member formulas


RKT

9


Click the dimension on which you want to set up the formula


RKT

10


Click New


RKT

11


Pick up the name of the member on which you want to apply the formula


RKT

12


Write the formula by typing it or by using the editor


RKT

13


Save the formula


RKT

14


Process the dimension


RKT

15

Topic Summary: New Member Formula Editor

Member formulas allow you to create and execute formulas and calculations on dimension members The Member formula editor will help and guide you through the creation of new member formulas You no longer need to remember and type the name of the dimension members: they can be easily chosen within a list box.


RKT

16

Rules: Member Formulas Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Describe the new formula editor Create a member formula


RKT

17






RKT

18


Rules: Logic Scripts

Rules: Logic Scripts Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Describe Logic Scripts Explain the Logic Script Editor Create a new Logic Script


RKT

2

Logic Scripts

This function allows you to create files called logic scripts that contain instructions for performing calculations with special requirements on Planning and Consolidation data. You can perform logic calculations on base level members only. In addition, logic is specific to each model. Planning and Consolidation provides a library of MDX formulas and the Shell sample environment contains a number of logic functions.


RKT

3

Business Example

Suppose that you want to copy base members values of all the TBS accounts from the category ACTUAL to the category BUDGET. A typical example of this kind of logic would be: *XDIM_MEMBERSET ACCOUNT = BAS(TBS) *WHEN CATEGORY *IS ACTUAL *WHEN ACCOUNT *IS BAS(TBS) *REC(FACTOR = 1.20, CATEGORY = BUDGET) *ENDWHEN *ENDWHEN *COMMIT


RKT

4

Logic Script Editor Benefits

The benefits of logic script editor can be summarized as below: Predictive entry while typing logic keywords Ease of selection from right panel: – Planning and Consolidation Keywords – MDX Keywords – Dimensions of current model – Dimension members with the member selector

Errors raised by the logic are more intuitive Ability to format the script by using the Pretty Print feature Ability to easy Comment and Uncomment code lines


RKT

5

Logic Script Editor Prerequisites

No particular prerequisites are needed for using logic script editor.


RKT

6

Process Overview

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

Open Planning and Consolidation Administration On the left pane, expand the Rules branch and click the Logic scripts item Click the model where you want to create the new logic Click the New button Enter name (this will also be a Logic Script File Name) and click Create Write the logic by typing it and/or using the keyword sidebar Validate the logic Check for possible errors Save the logic


RKT

7

Create a New Logic Script

Let us now examine how to create a new logic script inside the Consolidation model. We will use the example provided in the slide named Business Example .


RKT

8

Create a New Logic Script Step 1 of 9

Open the Planning and Consolidation Administration.


RKT

9


On the left pane, expand the Rules branch and click the Logic Scripts item.


RKT

10


Click the model where you want to create the new logic.


RKT

11


Click the + New button.


RKT

12


Provide the Logic Script File Name and click Create.


RKT

13


Write the logic by typing it and/or using the keyword sidebar. Member selector MDX LogicKeywords script keywords Dimensions of the model


RKT

14


Validate the logic.


RKT

15


Check for possible errors, correct them and validate again.


RKT

16


Save the logic.


RKT

17

Create a New Logic Script Final Result

This is just an example of the execution of the logic we have created: the values are copied on the destination increased by 20%.

+ 20%


RKT

18

Topic Summary: Logic Script Editor

The logic script editor allows you to easily create new logic script. It has a new interface that can assist you with the following features: – Predictive feature – A keyword sidebar – A Pretty Print button – A window to display the error raised by the logic validation.

This new logic script editor highly facilitates the logic script editing.


RKT

19

Rules: Logic Scripts Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Describe Logic Scripts Explain the Logic Script Editor Create a new Logic Script


RKT

20






RKT

21


Rules: Business Rules

Rules: Business Rules Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain global definitions Explain how to enable a set of Business Rules Define all the different types of rules


RKT

2

Business Rules Business Rules

Business Rules (Table-based logic) provides the flexibility for a customer to customize delivered functions (logic), to meet specific business needs, without having to understand either scripting or programming. The business rules can be accessed via the web interface and is located in the Administration interface within the Rules section.


RKT

3

Business Rules Accessing the Business Rules

The business rules can be accessed via the web interface and is located in the Administration interface within the Rules section.


RKT

4


The business rules has Global Definitions as well as a complete overview of all existing rules in the selected environment grouped by model.


RKT

5


To open the existing rules, select the rule type and click Open.


RKT

6


To add/remove rule types, select the model and click Add/Remove Rule Types.


RKT

7

Business Rules Global Definitions

Global Definitions are part of the entire list of rules, that is, Methods and Method based Multipliers will be independently listed, as they refer to the environment.


RKT

8


Method-based Multipliers have a header and detail table. To open the rules, select the Method-based Multiplier and click Open. The header page opens as shown.


RKT

9


Options available in the Method-based Multipliers header page are: To create a new method based multiplier To edit or delete an existing method based multiplier


RKT

10


Options available in the Method-based Multipliers header page are: To create a new method-based multiplier; To edit or delete an existing method based multiplier

The status shows whether the rule is valid or invalid.


RKT

11


Method-based Multipliers detail page can be accessed by clicking the header rule. To validate the rules, click Validate. The system automatically validates when the rule is saved.

Appears if the rule is validated successfully. Appears if the rule is saved. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

RKT

12

Business Rules Model-specific Business Rules

The business rules for the model can be accessed via the web interface and is located in the Administration interface within the Rules section.

Model


RKT

13

Business Rules Model-specific Business Rules

The different business rules that can be enabled for a model: Intercompany Bookings Currency Translation

Eliminations and adjustments

US Eliminations

Carry-Forward Account-based Calculations


Match intercompany transactions Convert local currency data into the desired reporting currencies Generate all the consolidation entries for the desired groups of entities (such as eliminations, adjustments, reclassifications, and minority calculations) Specifically designed to address the posting of intercompany eliminations in simpler scenarios where a full legal consolidation model is not required. Initialize the opening balances when a new fiscal cycle starts Calculate and store amounts, which are required for purposes of account-based calculations

RKT

14

Rules: Business Rules Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Explain global definitions Explain how to enable a set of Business Rules Define all the different types of rules


RKT

15






RKT

16


Rules: Controls

Rules: Controls Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Define controls, control sets and assignments


RKT

2

Controls “Controls” replace the former “Validation business rules”. A Control is the individual check of data accuracy and consistency. Controls are enabled or disabled at model level.


RKT

3

Business Example

Controls are an essential part of every consolidation application and they might also be useful in planning application. They are mainly used to control the consistency of financial data (for example that a Balance Sheet is balanced or that flow movements are matching the with the closing balance) Controls can be enforced (blocking controls) or just displayed as warnings, to inform users of potential problems.


RKT

4

Controls Benefits

Benefits of this feature include: Consistency of data Flexibility – Different level of controls can be defined by entity – Control sets are assigned by Category and Time


RKT

5

Process Overview

The following steps are required to define controls 1. Assign Security Tasks related to Controls 2. Enable Controls 3. Create individual controls (and definition of the level for each control) 4. Create Sets of controls (group of controls) 5. Assign a set of controls by category and time On top of that, two more attributes need to be set in the Entity type dimension 1. Define for each entity the level of control that should be applied 2. Possibility to bypass controls in Local Currency (if data are loaded in reporting currency directly)


RKT

6

Pre-Requisites

The following two attributes are required in the Entity type dimension: – CONTROL_LEVEL (1) – CTRL_CURRENCY_NOT_LC (1)

CONTROL_LEVEL • This property controls which level of control is applied for each entity. The following four values are available: • • • •

1 : Basic 2 : Standard 3 : Advanced 4 : Comprehensive

• The default value (blank) is equivalent to “4”

CTRL_CURRENCY_NOT_LC – This property controls whether controls should be executed in the reporting currency instead of LC. The following two values are available: o N : Controls are executed in Local Currency o Y : Controls are executed in the currency defined in the Currency property of the Entity – The default value (blank) is equivalent to “N”


RKT

7

Controls - Security

The following two take tasks are related to Controls from an administration point of view: – Edit Controls definition – View Controls definition


RKT

8

Accessing and Enabling Controls

In the Administration module, expand Rules and select the Controls items

Before Controls can be used, they need to be enabled from the Controls Administration screen


RKT

9

Navigation

From the Controls Main Page, you can access the different components by clicking on the numbers

When a specific component is open, there is always a link on the top right of the screen for the next step – In Controls – In Control Sets – In Assignments


RKT

10

Controls – Main Screen

The Main screen for controls can be used to add New controls, Edit or Delete existing controls

The drop-down box allows to display all controls or to filter them by a Set of controls


RKT

11

Controls – Control Editing (1)

The control definition screen can be split in 2 main sections: – The top of the screen contains the buttons to Save, Close and Validate the control – The header section : specifies the type of control, the threshold and the break-down dimensions – The detail section : specifies which members are compared Top

Header

Detail


RKT

12


The header section – ID : id for the control, no space allowed – Type : Blocking / Warning. All blocking controls must pass before the work status can be changed – Equation type : type of comparison using the equal, different, bigger and smaller operators – Control Level : Level of this control, linked to the “Control_Level” property of the Entity dimension – Tolerance Threshold o In value : absolute value o In % : percentage is calculated based on the value of the top part – Breakdown Dimension(s) o Up to 2 dimensions can be specified as break-down dimensions o The control will be executed separately for each member of the break-down dimension. In the example of a break-down by Audit on the member ALL_INPUT, the control will be executed for each member below ALL_INPUT (INPUT and INPUT11) in this example o For a breakdown, the same member must be specified in the top and in the bottom part


RKT

13


The detailed section – Top Part o Sign: + or o Account Member from the Account dimension (parent or base level) o Flow Member from the Flow dimension (parent or base level) o Interco: Member from the Interco dimension (parent or base level) o AuditID Member from the AuditID dimension (parent or base level) o Multiply select multiply or divide (for the Value specified) o Value: value to multiply or divide by – Bottom Part o Same column as top part o Year Offset use a different year. Values can be a year (2010) or an offset (+1,-1) o Period: use a different period. Values can be a period (1) or an offset (+1,-1) o Category: use a different category (enter ID of category to use)


RKT

14

Controls - Documents

A document (report or input schedule) can be linked to each control. This will provide a hyperlink for the user, so that when a control fails, the user can open that document to understand where the issues is coming from To set this up, you need to select the document tab

Then click the Add button and select the type of document, finally select which document to add

The document then show up in a list


RKT

15

Controls - Example

Here is an example of a control that checks that a Balance Sheet is balanced (with a tolerance of 1) with a breakdown by AuditId (for all AuditId below ALL_INPUT)


RKT

16

Sets of Controls (1)

From the Control Sets screen, click New to create a new set

Enter an ID for the Set (no space allowed)


RKT

17

Sets of Controls (2)

Add or remove controls into your set and click OK to close the window


RKT

18

Assignment of Controls (1)

There are two views available to assign the controls: – Categories by Time – Control Sets by Time

Categories by Time – Click Category and Time to select members (you can select more than one member at a time) – Click Show – Click Edit (on the top left) – Double click to select the cell you want to define controls sets and click once more to display the dropdown list with all the available control sets and select the appropriate one

– Click Save © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

RKT

19

Assignment of Controls (2)

Control Sets by Time – Click Control Sets, Category and Time (you can select more than one member at a time)

– Click Show – Click Edit (on the top left) – Tick the checkbox to decide which controls should be assigned for a Category and Time

– Click Save


RKT

20

Rules: Controls Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Define controls, control sets and assignments


RKT

21






RKT

22


Business Process Flows - Templates

Business Process Flows - Templates Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain Process Template Management Define process parameters and create Activities with associated Activity Workspaces Explain Content definition by adding actions, existing content ,or new reports on the fly Explain the LCM template (draft, deploy, archive)


RKT

2

Topics 1. Introduction 2. Process Template Management 3. Template Version Management 4. View and Archive Template Versions 5. Business Process Flow- Activities

Introduction

This function enables you to set up Business Process Flows (BPFs). BPFs organize business processes into a prepackaged set of application tasks. Any of the available features for users within the Web and Office interfaces can be used by a business process flow. Using a Web interface that is accessible from Office and other Web interfaces, users are guided through a set of predefined sequential tasks. Based on the BPF template you created, you can generate a BPF instance in the administration console.


RKT

4

Business Example

Example: You can set up a single business process flow that can be used across Models within an Environment. Based on the BPF template you created, you can generate a BPF instance in the administration console. One instance of the monthly process Resource Planning uses a specific category dimension member, such as Actual, and a specific time period, such as 20011.JUN. This allows you to distinguish different versions of the same BPF.


RKT

5


Process Template Management (1 of 11) Template Creation Logon to BPC->Go to Admin Page->In the left pane, Go to Business process Flow->Choose Process Templates


RKT

7

Process Template Management (2 of 11) Template Creation •Click New,

this will open the Process Template Designer.


RKT

8

Process Template Management (3 of 11) Template Creation •Enter properties in the Process Setting tab. •Name & Description •Context •Process Monitors: The users can monitor all the instances created from this template.


RKT

9

Process Template Management (4 of 11) Template Creation Go to Activities tab->Add new Activity by clicking New in the left side panel. Set properties for the activity. •Name & Instruction •Dimension and Users: This is for Activity context and Performer/Reviewer. •Opening Criteria.


RKT

10


RKT

11

Process Template Management (5 of 11) Activities->Activity Workspaces •Open Activity Workspace editor •Click the Create button in Workspaces section. •Then a new workspace tab is open. Add New Contents: Use 3 ways to add contents; •Add Content •Add New Report •Add Hyperlink


RKT

12

Process Template Management (6 of 11) Activities->Activity Workspaces •Add new hyperlinks by clicking the Add Hyperlinks button. •A new Hyperlinks view is added in the left side panel. In the main canvas, a new Hyperlink is added. •Go to Hyperlink Editor in the right side panel •Set properties in Edit Hyperlink pane in the right hand side •Click the Browse button to navigate to desired report. •Click the Save button to save the hyperlink.


RKT

13

Process Template Management (7 of 11)

If you want to browse the folder, go to Administration Security © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

Team. Then add yourself to the team. RKT

14

Process Template Management (8 of 11) •Set the context: By default, workspace view context will be used unless any change is made on each hyperlink.


RKT

15

Process Template Management (9 of 11) •You can reset the context to its original setting Use Workspace Context. •Open the member selector, and check the radio button for Automatic (Use Workspace Context). •Add Related Actions: Open related action editor by clicking the Edit button in the section Related Action. •Add as many Hyperlinks as you wish by repeating the step above.


RKT

16

Process Template Management (10 of 11) •Hyperlink Validation: You can validate if Hyperlinks are correctly set or not. •Click the Validate button in the view toolbar. Green valid icon is displayed if the Hyperlink is valid while red warning icon is displayed for the invalid.


RKT

17

Process Template Management (11 of 11) •Hyperlink Simulation: You can simulate hyperlinks at Design-time. Using simulation mode, you can verify whether the hyperlinks are well designed as expected. •Click Stop Editing, then the name of hyperlink becomes clickable except for the invalid hyperlinks.


RKT

18


Template Version Management (1 of 7) BPF Templates are managed using version information. There are three types of versions available in BPF Templates: Draft, Deployed, and Inactive. •Draft is set by default for a new process template.


RKT

20

Template Version Management (2 of 7) To see version history of a template. Click the Versions button from the toolbar. In the below example, there is only one version.


RKT

21

Template Version Management (3 of 7) •Draft version can be deployed by clicking the Deploy button.

•At this moment, the version history is below. The “Draft” version has been changed to “Deployed”.


RKT

22

Template Version Management (4 of 7) •To edit the template, you need to create a new version regardless of process instance existence. Click the New Version button from the toolbar. •The system creates a new version and sets this version to “Draft”.

•The system will maintain two versions of the template one each for “Draft” and “Deployed”


RKT

23

Template Version Management (5 of 7) • To deploy the new version, click the Deploy button.

•The system will change the old template from Deployed to Inactive as well as changing the new template to Deployed from Draft.


RKT

24

Template Version Management (6 of 7) •To edit the newly deployed version, click New Version from the toolbar.

•The system will create a new version and set its status to Draft. •The system also keeps track of older versions which are “Deployed” and “Inactive”.


RKT

25

Template Version Management (7 of 7) Note: Template version may have the following possibilities Only 1 Draft version for any given template Only 1 Deployed version for a given template Many Inactive versions for a given template


RKT

26


View & Archive Specific Template Version (1 of 3)

Viewing and archiving a specific template version by clicking Versions and selecting View or Archive.


RKT

28

View & Archive Specific Template Version (2 of 3) Note: The View template version opens the template version in read-only so users are not able to modify it.


RKT

29

View & Archive Specific Template Version (3 of 3) Note: If a user tries to archive a specific template version having active process instances, the archive will not be allowed.

What is the same as template level archive? Template level archive can be only done only if there are no active instances.


RKT

30


Business Process Flow- Activities (1 of 8)

Perform Activities: From the Home Folder, click Activities. •The upper area renders all activities you are involved in. •The lower area renders all instances of a certain activity your are involved in


RKT

32

Business Process Flow- Activities (2 of 8) •The Activity lists the process name, context, action required, instances completed, and the Process Manager.

•Click Multiple Assignees. •System shows the performers and Reviewers on the next screen for the Activity


RKT

33

Business Process Flow- Activities (3 of 8) •Select a view in the left panel. It shows the content in the workspace canvas. •Click the hyperlink to perform the action


RKT

34

Business Process Flow- Activities (4 of 8) •Click alternate Activities to see other contents as shown below. •Perform the action: Click the hyperlink to launch the action. In the Business Process Flow side panel, you can see all the hyperlinks which are in the same type. This makes end-user’s work easier as they can perform the same type of actions without going back to Activity Workspace.


RKT

35

Business Process Flow- Activities (5 of 8) •Click the Input Target by Product action and EPM Add-in for Excel automatically opens.

•When you are finished entering data and have saved the data, you can go back to Activity Workspace by clicking the Return to Activity Workspace button.

. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

RKT

36

Business Process Flow- Activities (6 of 8) •Complete or Submit the Activity Workspace: Click the Complete or Submit button in the toolbar of the workspace to complete that Activity.

•If the Activity doesn’t require review, the button label is “Complete” rather than “Submit”.


RKT

37

Business Process Flow- Activities (7 of 8) •To switch activities inside the activity workspace. Click Switch Activity to see available activities. Once you choose one of them, the current activity workspace is closed, and the workspace of the chosen activity will be open.


RKT

38

Business Process Flow- Activities (8 of 8) In Place Completion • Activity instances can be completed without opening the Activity workspace. Select one or more Activity instance(s) in the list, and open the Actions menus in the toolbar. The user can select one of the following: Complete, Approve, or Reject activities.


RKT

39

Business Process Flows - Templates Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Explain Process Template Management Define process parameters and create Activities with associated Activity Workspaces Explain Content definition by adding actions, existing content ,or new reports on the fly Explain the LCM template (draft, deploy, archive)


RKT

40






RKT

41


Business Process Flows - Instances

Business Process Flows - Instances Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain how to manage the lifecycle of BPF instances: Create/Start, Suspend, Reset, Archive. Explain how to manage assignment of process and activity instances. Explain E-Mail notification


RKT

2

Topics 1. Business Example 2. Process Instance Creation 3. Process Instance Management 4. E-mail Notification

Business Example

A BPF instance is an iteration of a business process flow template that is in active use. An authorized user can create a BPF template called quarterly Reporting to coordinate the quarterly reporting activities of various personnel. When that user, or another authorized user, creates a business process flow for a specific period, such as December 2010, based on the quarterly Reporting template, the December 2010 BPF is considered an instance. In this example, there are four instances of the quarterly Reporting BPF, one for each quarter of the year.


RKT

4


Process Instance Creation How to create a new process instance Click the New button on the toolbar

The process instance creation wizard appears.


RKT

6

Process Instance Creation

In the wizard, Select the process template which you have created and click Next Set the process instance owner


RKT

7


Set the process instance context Check the assignment. You can also change the performers/reviewers.


RKT

8


Create the process instance. You can also start the process by selecting the Start this process instance checkbox.


RKT

9


The process instance Planning for context Budget, 2012 has been created.


RKT

10


Process Instance Management Functions

Function

Description

Start

To start a an process Instance.

Suspend/resume

To suspend a running instance, Select the instance and choose suspend To resume a suspended instance, Select the instance and click resume

Change Assignment

process instance owner and activity owners can be changed by selecting change assignment option.

Reset

To reset BPF instances back to step 1, choose Reset.

Archive

To archive finalized or inactive instances, choose Archive.


RKT

12

Process Instance Management Perform Activities

This function displays the business process flows that contain steps requiring specific action by the currently logged-on user. Home>Activities: Displays the processes and steps in which the currently logged-on user can perform certain actions. Users can open a specific step region or activity and execute tasks for that step region.


RKT

13

Process Instance Management Perform Activities Steps

• Go to Home page • Click the Activities link in the left panel. All the process instances which you are involved in will be listed in the upper table. • Select the process instance that you have created. Only the activity instances which you are involved in will be listed in the lower table. • To open the activity instance, click the name of the Activity instance. It opens the Activity Workspace which is associated with.


RKT

14

Process Instance Management Perform Activities – Activity Workspace (Steps)

Choose Client > Home > Activities > Activity Workspace Select a view in the left panel. It shows the content in the workspace canvas

Click the hyperlink to launch the action © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

RKT

15



RKT

16


Submit the Activity Workspace: Click a Complete or Submit button in the toolbar of the workspace.

Once submitted, the status will be changed to “Submitted”. And, the labels of the button will be changed to “Approve” and “Reject”. Close the Activity Workspace by clicking “x” mark in the tab. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

RKT

17

Process Instance Management Monitor Process Instance

Choose Web Client > Home > Process Monitor Click the Process Monitor link in the left side pane: All the process instances which you have right to monitor will be listed.

See the details of a process instance: Click the name of process instance that you want to see details. Or just select the process instance, and click the Open button in the toolbar. Then, it opens a new tab and shows the details of the selected process instance. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

RKT

18

Process Instance Management Monitor Process Instance – Steps

See the details of the process instance: It lists all the activity instances with its status.


RKT

19

Process Instance Management Monitor Process Instance – Steps Switch to Group By mode: Click Show Groups in the toolbar. It shows Groups in the left pane so that you can see only those groups you want to. The groups supported are: – Activity – Context – Action Required – Status


RKT

20

Process Instance Management Monitor Process Instance – Steps

Complete (Finalize) the process instance: You can finalize a process instance if you are the process instance owner. Select a process instance of which activity instance are all completed, then click the Complete button in the toolbar.


RKT

21

Process Instance Management Archive a Process Instance

Choose Administrator > Process Instances Completed (Finalized) process instance can be archived. Select the completed process instance, and click Archive on the toolbar.


RKT

22


E-mail Notification Email notification is used to notify owners when: BPF Instance is created and actions are taken Instance is completed and ready to be finalized Reviewers are notified by e-mail when a step region is ready for review

Types of BPF e-mails Planning and Consolidation contains a number of e-mail templates by default These are S-type (system) templates, which cannot be modified A copy of each system template can be created and customized according to the business needs. These are C-type (customized) templates.


RKT

24

E-mail Notification Setup

Execute transaction SE80 in the backend system. Choose Package in the left navigation pane, then enter the package name UJB. Click F8. It opens BPC: BPF Email template table overview.


RKT

25


To see the detail of each template, double-click a template.


RKT

26


There are two ways to set body of email template, either using Smart Form Body or Email Body. If both are set, then Smart Form Body will be used. If there is not Smart Form Body, then, Email Body will be used.


RKT

27

E-mail Notification Activation/Deactivation

To activate/deactivate the email notification, Click the icon to edit. The email template list appears in Edit mode. Change the value in column Is Active to yes or no to activate/deactivate.


RKT

28

E-mail Notification Manage Email Notification Template: Using Smart Form Body


RKT

29



RKT

30


Enter the name of the new Smart Form Body and create it. Note: Name of custom email template should start with Z or Y. Note: You can create this new template only as a Local object. Or you can transport it by choosing a package.


RKT

31


Form Template can be viewed by clicking the Change button. You can create new one using the Create button.


RKT

32


Expand the Pages and Windows until you see the leaf node which is NOTIF_BODY. This node will display the notification text body that you can edit.


RKT

33


Double-click NOTIF_BODY to open the notification text body as shown below.


RKT

34


Example of Email Notification is below.


RKT

35

E-mail Notification Create Custom Email Template

.

Click the New Entries button in the toolbar.


RKT

36



RKT

37



RKT

38

Business Process Flows - Instances Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Explain how to manage the lifecycle of BPF instances: Create/Start, Suspend, Reset, Archive. Explain how to manage assignment of process and activity instances. Explain E-Mail notification


RKT

39






RKT

40


Work Status

Work Status Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain the new Work Status features


RKT

2

Work Status Introduction

Creating a Work Status You must specify a name for the work status You must also specify who controls the work status

How to create a Work Status Specify a name for the work status You must specify who controls the work status The owner (s) The manager (s) or both

You can add a description You can define who can change the data in the system


RKT

3

Create a Work Status

You must specify a name for this work status. You can add a description. You must specify who controls this work status: The owner(s) The manager(s) Both

You must then specify which data entry methods are permitted when this status is set to a slice of data. The data entry methods are: Data manager Journal Manual Entry Comments Documents


RKT

4

Manage the Work Status

To manage the work status, you can: Reorder a work status Edit a work status Delete a work status


RKT

5

Managing Work Status Benefits

Benefits of this feature include: Managing data locking settings of a model Managing notifications

For example, there are several benefits related to managing the work status, including: Reordering a work status Editing a work status Deleting a work status


RKT

6

Manage the Work Status Reorder a Work Status

Click the Reorder button available in the toolbar of the list of work statuses: This command opens a popup window in which are listed all the work statuses Select the work status (only single selection) you want to reorder and click the Move Down or Move Up buttons A work status that is set to unlocked cannot be reordered


RKT

7

Manage Notifications

You can enable email notification capability Use the Notifications command from the toolbar of the work statuses

Unlocked is the default work status that cannot be deleted nor reordered


RKT

8

Manage Data Locking Settings of a Model

To be able to edit the data locking settings of a model select the corresponding row in the list at the bottom of the overview page and then click the Edit button (or directly click the Settings for: model ID hyperlink ).


RKT

9

Work Status Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Explain the new Work Status features


RKT

10






RKT

11


Journal Templates

Journal Templates Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain the new Journal Templates features


RKT

2

Introduction

Journal Template: Journals were rewritten as a web component but can still be invoked from the Excel client. Accessed from the Admin Web Client, journal templates can be created for Planning and Consolidations models.


RKT

3

Business Example

Journal templates are input forms where users enter journal entries. For example, a journal template can be created for each model. You can have only one template for each model in SAP BPC.


RKT

4

The New Journal Template and Features Benefit

A benefit of this feature includes: By selecting a journal template it activates/deactivates available actions that can be performed. – Open, Journal Parameters, Delete Journals


RKT

5

The New Journal Template and Features Accessing the Journal Template

A new journal template is defined in the Administration section.


RKT

6


An existing journal template can be deleted in the Administration section, but only after all journal entries using that template have been deleted as well.


RKT

7


All existing journal entries can be deleted in this Administration section.


RKT

8


Journal parameters can be configured for all journal entries associated with the defined template.


RKT

9

The New Journal Template and Features Journal Template Features

Click the journal template name and a new tab opens, revealing the template configuration options.


RKT

10


Select the journal header dimension by highlighting the desired dimension on the Members area (left side) and using the arrow buttons to add/remove the dimension into the Detail Column for Header area (right side).


RKT

11


The journal template can define how the journal entries will be displayed. By checking the Balance by Entity option, the journal entries will be subtotaled and checked for balances across each Entity (the Balance by Currency works in a similar fashion).


RKT

12

Journal Templates Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Explain the new Journal Templates features


RKT

13






RKT

14


Context Defaults

Context Defaults Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain the new Context Defaults features


RKT

2

Topics 1. Configure the Context Defaults Context defaults overview page How to set a model as default Configure the defaults for a model

Configure the Context Defaults Context Defaults Overview Page

To access Context Defaults Choose the Administration tab Choose Features > Context Defaults


RKT

4

Configure the Context Defaults Set a Model as Default

To set a model as default Select the model Click the Set as Default button


RKT

5

Configure the Context Defaults Configure the Defaults for a Model (1)

To configure the defaults for a model (1) Select the model Click the Edit button in the toolbar of bottom pane


RKT

6

Configure the Context Defaults Configure the Defaults for a Model (2)

To configure the defaults for a model (2) Specify for each dimension of the selected model


RKT

7

Context Defaults Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Explain the new Context Defaults features


RKT

8






RKT

9


Drill-Through

Drill-Through Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain the new Drill-Through features Create a new Drill-Through Specify the specific parameters of a Drill-Through Delete any parameter Test a Drill-Through


RKT

2

Business Example

Your company is doing a planning report based on regional data. During reporting, you need to have more information about the selected region. The Drill-Through functionality is linked to an online search webside, giving you all necessary information.


RKT

3

Create a New Drill-Through Prerequisites

Before performing (or using) the Drill-Through feature, ensure that the following prerequisites have been met: You are logged on to any BPC Environment with administration authorizations From the Home Screen, switch to the Administration Area by clicking the Planning and Consolidation Administration link


RKT

4

Create a New Drill-Through Administration

Inside the Administration Area you will find the Drill-Through maintenance in the content tree under the Features node.


RKT

5


Click the New button on the toolbar of the overview page to create a new definition.


RKT

6


General settings: Enter an ID (mandatory) Enter a description (optional) Specify the target URL – There is basic control performed while typing the URL to check that the address starts with http://

Select the model from which the drill can be launched.


RKT

7

Create a New Drill-Through Create a Google Search Drill-Through

Create a Drill-Through to Google Search Engine In the ID field, enter SearchGoogle (without any Spaces) In the Description field enter a description In the Target URL field enter http://google.com/search? In the Drill can be launched from model field, choose Consolidation


RKT

8


Parameter mapping To finalize the configuration of the definition, you need to configure the mapping of parameters that will be used in the URL to drill from a report to the target data. Click the Add button to insert a new parameter in the mapping table.


RKT

9


In the Parameter column, enter the code q of the parameter.

In the second column you can specify that the mapping of this parameter will be based on a user-defined value or a dimension assigned to the model. For this example, select the Account dimension.


RKT

10


Finally, in the last column, you can either specify a value that will be passed to the parameter (if you have chosen User defined-values or specify that the mapping of the parameter will be based on the ID of the dimension member or one of the properties of the dimension. For this example, select ID as the property of the Account dimension.


RKT

11


If the mapping of a parameter is not valid, a status icon displays indicating an error.


RKT

12


Remove the p parameter by Selecting the parameter Click the Remove button

Click the Save button at the top of the screen to save the query.


RKT

13

Create a New Drill-Through Test the Query

This command opens a popup window in which you have to manually enter a value to simulate the mapping of the parameters that will use a member ID of the Account dimension.

In the Property or Value column, enter Gross Margin. This simulates a later selection of an account selection by gross margin. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

RKT

14

Create a New Drill-Through Test the Query

As a result The screen indicates a successful status.

The browser opens a new window showing the Google webpage with pre-selected search content.


RKT

15

Drill-Through Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Explain the new Drill-Through features Create a new Drill-Trough Specify the specific parameters of a Drill-Trough Delete any parameter Test a Drill-Trough


RKT

16






RKT

17


Audit

Audit Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain Activity Audit changes Explain new audited tasks for Data Audit


RKT

2

Audit Administration Maintenance

In the Administration Area you will find the Audit maintenance in the content tree under the Features node.


RKT

3


The overview page of the Audit view is split into two distinct panes.

1

2


RKT

4


In the top pane, you can view and edit the settings of the activity audit.

An activity audit type is set to Off if disabled and On if enabled.


RKT

5


In the pane below, you can see the main data audit settings configured for each model in the environment.

For each model, data audit is set to Off if disabled and On if enabled. If enabled, you can see for which categories in the model.


RKT

6

Audit Administration Activity Audit Configuration

You can edit the activity audit settings by clicking the Edit button.

This command opens a dialog box in which you can enable or disable each type of activity audit, by flagging or unflagging the specific type.


RKT

7

Audit Administration Activity Audit Configuration

After clicking the Save button, the settings are activated.


RKT

8

Audit Administration Data Audit Configuration

You can edit the activity audit settings for each Model. Select one Model in the list

Click the Edit button

Or use the Configuration for: … hyperlink


RKT

9


On this page, you can manage a matrix that enables you to activate the data audit for each of the categories (members of the category dimension) and also for each type of data management task independently.

Select Yes in the drop-down list of each intersection to activate the data audit. You can also specify, for each category, a frequency for a data audit purge (that is, archiving process performed by running a DM package).


RKT

10


Click Save to validate the selections.


RKT

11


If the data audit is enabled for at least one task in one category, the audit trail status is set to On.

The list of categories is also updated accordingly.


RKT

12

Audit Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Explain Activity Audit changes Explain new audited tasks for Data Audit


RKT

13






RKT

14


Other Administration Parameters

Other Administration Parameters Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Create/Change administrative parameters in web UI and IMG – Functional Parameters – System Parameters – Technical Parameters


RKT

2

Topics 1. Introduction 2. Business Example 3. Web Admin Task BPC 7.5 – Web Admin Tasks Changes in BPC 10 Examples of parameters moved to UI

4. Setup of BPC Technical Parameters Setup IMG parameter (Transaction SIMGH) Setup IMG parameter process

5. List of Parameters

Introduction

Administration parameters are used to change/enhance the functionality and configuration of BPC Application.

Functional Parameters

For example, APPROVALORG

Configuration Parameters

For example, ALLOW_FILE_SIZE

System Parameters

For example, AVAILABLEFLAG


RKT

4




Business Example

Administration parameters are necessary components of every Business planning and consolidation application. They are mainly used to change and enhance the functionality of the application. Admin Parameters can be enforced at different levels in BPC.


RKT

6




BPC 7.5 - Web Admin Tasks


RKT

8

Changes in BPC 10 BPC NW 7.5 – Set Application Set / Application parameters “Functional” parameters set by the user

“Configuration” parameters set by the user

“System” parameters controlled by the system

e.g. APPROVALORG

e.g. ALLOW_FILE_SIZE

e.g. AVAILABLEFLAG

Table = UJA_USER_DEF

BPC NW 10.0

EXAMPLE:

Set these parameter values Controlled only through Set these configuration The Application Setup Tasks include these main steps: in the UI of the the related functions parameter values Administration Workspace1. Manage the or options in the in KPI IMG Library Administration Workspace e.g. “Hierarchy” setting managed in the Work Status view

2. Manage Roles= SIMGH Transaction 3. Manage Conversion Factors

e.g. “Change Status” function

4. Manage Reporting Frameworks 5.Environment View Organization Hierarchy(Environment & Model level) Tables = UJA_PARAM (Cross level) / UJA_PARAM_APP Except for few “system” parameters which are still stored in UJA_USER_DEF

6. Manage Audit Logs


RKT

9

Examples of Parameters Moved to UI – 1/2


RKT

10

Examples of Parameters Moved to UI – 2/2


RKT

11




Set IMG Parameters Prerequisites

Before performing changes in IMG parameters, ensure that the following prerequisites have been met: BPC 10 Installation - Complete BPC 10 Post Installation Configuration - Complete Identify the parameters needs to be changed Impact of parameter change should be analyzed/assessed


RKT

13

Setup IMG Parameter Transaction SIMGH


RKT

14

Setup IMG Parameter Process-1/4


RKT

15



RKT

16



RKT

17



RKT

18




Functional and System Parameters Managed Through the Admin UI and Functions – 1/2 Level

Category

Model

Work Status

APPROVALORG

Par am eter Nam e

Environment

Work Status

APPROVALSTATUSMAIL

Environment

Work Status

APPROVALSTATUSMSG

Parameter Description

Optional

Storage table

If you w ant to use the w ork status feature, you must use this field to identify the hierarchy level (H1, H2, H3, ..., Hn) for w hich you w ant to track the w ork status of deliverables. You can define only one hierarchy for each application w ithin an application set. For alternate organizations, "No Status" is displayed w hen view ing those members in the w ork status screen. If this field is left blank, w ork status tracking is not enabled. Defines w hether ow ners and managers receive an e-mail w hen there is a change to an assigned w ork status. Has the follow ing possible values: Yes: Send e-mail No: Do not send e-mail In the Microsoft version of Planning and Consolidation, the follow ing SMTP application set parameters must be set up as w ell to use e-mail notifications in the system: SMTPAUTH, SMTPPASSWORD, SMTPPORT, SMTPSERVER, and SMTPUSER. In the NetWeaver version of the system, the ABAP SMTP service is used for sending e-mails. Allow s you to define a custom e-mail message that is sent to the ow ners and managers of a w ork status w hen a w ork status code is changed. The message is applicable to all applications in the application set. You can customize the message using the follow ing variables:

Required

UJ0_PARAM_APP

Optional

UJ0_PARAM_APP

Optional

UJ0_PARAM_APP

%USER% — Name of user w ho changed this status %STA% — Work status %OWNER% — Entity ow ner (Microsoft version only) %TIME% — Time of change %REGION% - Lock region (NetWeaver version only) — For example: ENTITY: CG1, TIME: 2009.Q1, DATASRC: DC_1, PROJECT: PRJ_1, PRODUCT: PRO_1 Example You can create a message such as, This is to inform you that %USER% has updated the w ork status for %REGION% on %TIME%. Environment

Audit

AUDIT_ADM IN

Optional

UJ0_PARAM_APP

Environment

Audit

AUDIT_BIZRULE

Optional

UJ0_PARAM_APP

Environment

Audit

AUDIT_BPF

Optional

UJ0_PARAM_APP

Environment

Audit

AUDIT_USER

Optional

UJ0_PARAM_APP

Environment

Environment Mngt

AVAILABLEFLAG

Required

UJ0_PARAM_APP

Environment

Environment Mngt

AVAILABLEMSG

Required

UJ0_PARAM_APP

Model

Consolidations

CALCULATION

Optional

UJA_USER_DEF

Model

Model Mgmt

COM MENT

Optional

UJ0_PARAM_APP

Model

Consolidations

OPENINGBALANCE

Optional

UJA_USER_DEF


Controls w hether the system is offline or not. 1 means the system is online and available for sending data to the database. You can take the system offline by changing the value to 0. This setting can also be controlled w ithin the administration console. Default value = "Current Appset status is available" The message that is displayed to users w ho try to access an application that is offline (AVAILABLEFLAG = 0). For example, the message might be “Business Planning and Consolidation is temporarily unavailable due to scheduled maintenance. Please try again later.” This parameter is flag f or account transformation of business rules. This value can be changed (checkbox) in the “Business Rules” view . Default = deactivated = 0 Valid Value = 1 = activated This parameter controls w hether comments are allow ed in the Application (Optional) Valid values: • ON • OFF Default value is ON This is a flag for opening of business rules. This value can be changed (checkbox) in the “Business Rules” view . Default = deactivated = 0 Valid Value = 1 = activated

RKT

20

Functional and System Parameters Managed Through the Admin UI and Functions – 2/2 Le vel

Cate gory

Model

Consolidations

INTERCOMPANY

Param e ter Nam e

Model

Consolidations

FXTRANS

Model

Consolidations

INTCOBOOKINGS

Model

Journals

JRN_BALANCE

Model

Journals

JRN_MAXCOUNT

Model

Journals

JRN_REOPEN

Model

Journals

JRN_REOPEN_PROPERTY

Environment

BPC Web

MAXLRCOLUM NS

Environment

BPC Web

MAXLRROWS

Model

Legal Consolidation

ORG_INTCO

Model

Legal Consolidation

ORG_PARENTPROPERTY

Environment

Excel Reporting

TEMPLATEVERSION

Model

Consolidations

USELIM

Model

Controls

VALID


Param e ter Des cription

Optional

This is a flag for Eliminations of business rules. This value can be changed (checkbox) in the “Business Rules” view . Default = deactivated = 0 Valid Value = 1 = activated This is a flag for Currency translation of business rules. This value can be changed (checkbox) in the “Business Rules” view . Default = deactivated = 0 This is a flag for intercompany booking of business rules. This value can be changed (checkbox) in the “Business Rules” view . Default = deactivated = 0 Use this parameter to control w hether it is necessary for Journals to be balanced. Valid values are: 0 – Journals need not be balanced 1 – Journals need to be balanced The def ault value is 0. This parameter is used in Interface for Office - Journal. (Nota: N or Y are also accepted for historic reason) Use this parameter to specify the maximum number of journal entries returned f rom a query in the Journal Manager. This is useful if you have a large number of Journal Entries and w ant to protect a user from launching a long query. The def ault value is blank. Use this parameter to define the default for reopening journals. Valid values are: 0 – Does not allow reopening of journals 1 – Allow s the reopening of journals The def ault value is 0. This parameter is used in Interface for Office – Journal. (Nota: N or Y are also accepted for historic reason) Use this parameter to specify the property name in the account dimension that is used to further filter the journals to reopen. A valid value is a property in the account type dimension. The def ault value is GROUP. If this parameter is not set, the GROUP property must exist in the account type dimension. Alternatively, to use a property other than GROUP, change the value of the ACCOUNT_PROPERTY column in the Journal Translation template. This value can be any property in the account type dimension, or *. The maximum number of columns to display in a live report in BPC Web. The value includes header and data columns. For example, if you specify a value of 5, one heading column and f our data columns are displayed. If the values for these option do not exist in the db table, it w ill give def ault value 30 The maximum number of row s to display in a live report in BPC Web. The value includes header and data row s. For example, if you specify a value of 5, one heading row and four data row s are displayed. the values for these option do not exist in the db table, it w ill give default value 1000 The non interco member in the Inte rcom pany dimension in the ow nership application if using dynamic hierarchies. This parameter is used w ith dynamic hierarchy statutory applications w hen defining fixed hierarchies. The value must match the value in the ParentProperty property value of entities in the statutory application's supporting Current version number of the dynamic templates in your application set. Whenever you add to or change your input schedule or report dynamic templates, you should increment this version number so that users w ill automatically get the new templates dow nloaded w hen they log on to this application set. You can also reset the This is a f lag for US eliminations of business rules. This value can be changed (checkbox) in the “Business Rules” view . Default = deactivated = 0 This is a flag for controls. This value can be changed (checkbox) in the “Controls” view . Default = deactivated = 0 Valid Value = 1 = activated

Optional

UJA_USER_DEF

Storage table

Optional

UJA_USER_DEF

Optional

UJA_USER_DEF

Optional

UJA_USER_DEF

Optional

UJA_USER_DEF

Optional

UJA_USER_DEF

Optional

UJA_USER_DEF

Optional

UJ0_PARAM _APP

Optional

UJ0_PARAM _APP

Optional

UJ0_PARAM _APP

Optional

UJ0_PARAM _APP

Required

UJ0_PARAM _APP

Optional

UJA_USER_DEF

Optional

UJA_USER_DEF

RKT

21

IMG Parameters – 1/3 Optional

Storage table

Environment

Level

File Service

Category

ALLOW_FILE_SIZE

This is the maximum file size a user is allow ed to upload. The default value is 100 MB.

Required

UJ0_PARAM_APP

Environment

Security

ALLOW_SSO_HTTP

By default, SSO information can only be sent through an https URL. This parameter enables to remove this limitation and so allow s to send SSO information through an http URL. If the value = 1, in a Drill-Through definition you can use and set the user-defined parameter "SSO" to "true" even if this is an http URL.

Optional

UJ0_PARAM_APP

Environment

File Service

ALLOW_EXTENSIONS

Optional

UJ0_PARAM_APP

Environment

Interfaces

Optional

UJ0_PARAM_APP

Environment

Interfaces

= “FIM Main Application Page” Represents w hat the link looks like – a generic Icon is acceptable but w e have time the ability to provide distinctive jpeg or gif w ould be a nice to have.

Optional

UJ0_PARAM_APP

Environment

Interfaces

= “Yes” If SSO = No, then w e don’t include this in the SSO information in the SOAP header

Optional

UJ0_PARAM_APP

Environment

Interfaces

= “http://hostname and port for FIM/” The URL to the FIM Main Page associated w ith the FIM server

Optional

UJ0_PARAM_APP

Environment

Comments

AV_INT_LOC_1 BPC Shall support no more than 5 Additional Available Interfaces. The number ‘1’ in the parameter above (or 2,3,4 and 5) would indicate what parameters are for what interface (each distinct available interface would having the 4 parameters all with the same trailing #) AV_INT_NAME_1 BPC Shall support no more than 5 Additional Available Interfaces. The number ‘1’ in the parameter above (or 2,3,4 and 5) would indicate what parameters are for what interface (each distinct available interface would having the 4 parameters all with the same trailing #) AV_INT_SSO_1 BPC Shall support no more than 5 Additional Available Interfaces. The number ‘1’ in the parameter above (or 2,3,4 and 5) would indicate what parameters are for what interface (each distinct available interface would having the 4 parameters all with the same trailing #) AV_INT_URL_1 BPC Shall support no more than 5 Additional Available Interfaces. The number ‘1’ in the parameter above (or 2,3,4 and 5) would indicate what parameters are for what interface (each distinct available interface would having the 4 parameters all with the same trailing #) CLR_COMMENTS_HISTORY

Defines allow ed file extensions for upload. If [ALL], it allow s all extension in BPC. This w as in BPC 4.x and w as reintroduced in BPC 5.1 SP2. = “A,O,W” User could choose w hat BPC Interface the Available Interface w ill show up in. User could choose ‘A’ alone for Admin or any combination of ‘O’ (Office) and ‘W’ (Web)

Optional

UJ0_PARAM_APP

Environment

File Service

DEFAULT_EXTENSIONS

Required

UJ0_PARAM_APP

Environment

Technical

Deletes the comment history except for the last comment entered. Possible values for this parameter are: 0: This is the default value and saves the history of comments. 1: The historical comments are deleted and only the latest comments remain. This is the list of default extensions that are allow ed. This list includes: XLS,XLT,DOC,DOT,PPT,POT,XML,MHT,MHTML,HTM,HTML,XLSX,XLSM,XLSB,ZIP,PDF,PPTX ,PPTM,POTX,POTM,DOCX,DOCM,DOTX,DOTM,CDM,TDM,PNG,GIF,JPG,CSS,MRC Controls the minimum level of ABAP messages to store in the log in terms of severity, w hich you view by the transaction SLG1. The default value for this parameter is Info. The possible values for this parameter are: Donothing Info Warning Error Fatal

Required

UJ0_PARAM_APP


Parameter Name

LOGLEVEL


RKT

22

IMG Parameters – 2/3 Level Environment

Category Technical


Optional

Storage table

TRACEUSER

Parameter Name

Defines the Planning and Consolidation user for w hich the system performs remote tracing, in the form DomainName\UserName. This parameter is blank by default, and is populated by an administrator only w hen conducting tracing activities for a specific client.

Optional

UJ0_PARAM_APP

Use this parameter to specify the server group on w hich the Data Manager packages w ill run. If there is a server group specified at the Application level and is different than the one specified at the Application Set level, the Application level w ins. Use this parameter to enable Data Manager packages to w rite Zero data w hen loading transaction data to BPC (including from flat file, BW InfoProvider). If there is a parameter specified at the Application level and is different than the one specified at the Application Set level, the Application level w ins.Possible values for this parameter are: Yes (1): Enables to support w riting zero data Default = No (0) Use this parameter to specify in w hich RFC server group data manager parallel executing unit should be. When user uses export function, w e w ill split the Enviornment data to different chunk size to avoid memory dump, this parameter specify the minum chunk size w e w ill read from exported data Record w hich chunk read from the database

Optional

UJ0_PARAM_APP

Optional

UJ0_PARAM_APP

Optional

UJ0_PARAM_APP

Optional

UJ0_PARAM

Environment and Model

Data Manager

background_server_group (formely called "EXECSERVER")


Data Manager

DM_WRITE_ZERO_DATA


Data Manager

Parallel_server_group

Global

Technical

MIN_CHUNK_SIZE

Global

Technical

CLM_CURRENT_CHUNK

Global

Technical

MAX_CHUNK_SIZE

Global Parameters (cross Environments)

Technical

EnablePrinting


BPC Web

MaxSystem ReportQuerySize


BPC Web

MaxWebReportQuerySize


Technical

SMTPAUTH


When user uses export function, w e w ill split the Enviornment data to different chunk size to avoid memory dump, this parameter specify the maximum chunk size w e w ill read from exported data If "Yes”, printing capabilities are available for users (through crystal engine) If "No”, printing button is hidden in all areas of the Web UI and w e don’t have printing capabilities. Maximum query size in cells (before zero compression), before w e ask the user if he w ants to continue or cancel the query. Used for System reports. Maximum query size in cells (before zero compression), before w e ask the user if he w ants to continue or cancel the query. Used for Web reports. The authentication method of the SMTP server. (Required) 0 = Anonymous 1 = Basic 2 = NTLM This setting does not change the method on the SMTP server, but must match the type of authentication enabled on it. Failure to set this appropriately can result in errors from the email server.

Optional

UJ0_PARAM

Optional

UJ0_PARAM

Optional

UJ0_PARAM

Required

UJ0_PARAM

Required

UJ0_PARAM

Required

UJ0_PARAM

RKT

23

IMG Parameters – 3/3 Level

Category

Parameter Nam e


Optional

Storage table


Technical

SMTPPASSWORD

The passw ord for the sending email user name. (Required)

Required

UJ0_PARAM


Technical

SMTPPORT

Required

UJ0_PARAM


Technical

SMTPSERVER

Port number for your SMTP email server. Default is port 25, the default SMTP server port number. (Required) The name or TCP/IP address of the SMTP email server the system uses to send email. (Required) The user name from w hich email from the system originates. (Required)

Required

UJ0_PARAM


Technical

SMTPUSER

Model

Application Mgmt

BPC_STATISTICS

Model

Data Manager

DTSLOGPAGESIZE

Model

Legal Consolidation

Model

Technical

SIGNED_DATA_FORMAT

Model

Script Logic

VALIDATE_MBR_LOGIC

Model

Technical


ORG_ACCOUNTOWN

YTD_NECJ_RETRIEVE

The valid values are ON/OFF. BPC Statistics can be used to monitor system performance. Certain modules in BPC w ill w rite out detailed runtime statistics to tables UJ0_STAT_HDR and UJ0_STAT_DTL, so that you can better analyze w here performance bottle necks are occurring. Use this parameter to set the number of records that display in the Data Manager Status View . Enter the number of records to display. The default value is 300. This parameter is used in Data Manager - Status View . parameter allow s customers to provide an alternative account to PGROUP in ow nership cube Use this parameter to specify the decimal precision and scale of the signeddata column of the tables tblFact, tblFac2 and tblFactWB in an application. The default value is 25,10 (25 for precision and 10 for scale). This parameter is used in Admin – Add a new application, Modify application, and Copy an application. Use this parameter to specify that the system validates members w hen processing logic. The performance of processing logic decreases due to this validation. Valid values are: 1 – The system filters records that w ould otherw ise post to a parent member to a member that no longer exists or a member calculated dimension formula 0 – The system bypasses this validation The default value is 0. This parameter is used in Script Logic – posting data during running script logic. Use this parameter to specify the query type to improve the performance of data retrieval w hen retrieving YTD measures on Periodic applications or the opposite. This parameter is useful in the follow ing circumstances: YTD / QTD measures data is retrieved on periodic application or Periodic / QTD measures data is retrieved on YTD application. The retrieval range is huge, but the portion of the data existing cells is small. ColKeyRange or Row KeyRange has more than tw o dimensions. The retrieval range has no members w ith a dimension formula. Valid values are: 1 – To use the NonEmptyCrossJoin query 0 – Not to use the NonEmptyCrossJoin query The default value is 0. This parameter is used in Retrieve data functions EVDRE, EVGET, EVGTS, EVSND, EVINP.

Required

UJ0_PARAM

Optional

UJ0_PARAM_APP

Optional

UJ0_PARAM_APP

Optional

UJ0_PARAM_APP

Optional

UJ0_PARAM_APP

Optional

UJ0_PARAM_APP

Optional

UJ0_PARAM_APP

RKT

24

Other Administration Parameters Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Create/Change administrative parameters in Web UI and IMG Functional Parameters System Parameters Technical Parameters


RKT

25






RKT

26


Security Model Changes

Security Model Changes Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Describe the new Security Model with BPC 10 in SAP NetWeaver with EPM Add-in Describe the new Security Model with EPM Web UI


RKT

2

Topics 1. The New Security Overview 2. NetWeaver Authorizations 3. BPC Web UI Authorizations 4. Data Access Profile

The New Security Overview

The BPC 10 application is built on an Adobe Flex client architecture, which requires Adobe Flash 10.1 The NetWeaver security for 7.3 also applies to the BPC 10 application


RKT

4

User Authorizations in BPC 10

This means two sets of user authirzations will be application in BPC10: – Netweaver (The Classical Netweaver Secuirty. For example, SU01, PFCG, and so on) – BPC Web UI The installation user can access the administration workspace from any client machine The system administrator can perform all administrative tasks but does not have any access to members Upon installation, there is one admin team (ADMIN) defined in Web UI which can be used as a sample Upon installation, there are three task profiles defined in Web UI which can be used as samples – PrimaryAdmin: Full Administration previledges – SecondaryAdmin: Access to Public Folder & Dimension – SystemAdmin: Full Administration & Dimension access The following types of users are created in SAP NetWeaver Application server first: – For administrative related tasks, define dialog users – Adobe Flex Client uses Internet users – Content Lifecycle Management uses Dialog users © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

RKT

5

Steps to Define Security

Manage Users and roles in SAP NetWeaver Application server using SU01 & PFCG. Add user in Web Admin UI Assign users to team (optional) Assign task profiles to users or teams Assign data access profile to user or teams


RKT

6


BPC Netweaver Authorizations

BPC 10 uses the Classic Netweaver authorization concept where authorizations are assigned to roles and profiles are generated.


RKT

8

BPC NetWeaver Authorizations

For BPC10 end user, standard roles are provided. Recommendations are to copy and adopt: – /POA/BUI_FLEX_CLIENT: This role is required to start the Flex Client – /POA/BUI_UM_USER: This role is required to work with User Management CLM Standard Roles: – /POA/CLM_BPC_USER: BPC & CLM features – ZSAP_BPC_CLM_EXPORT: Extraction – ZSAP_BPC_CLM_IMPORT: Deployment – SAP_QAP_RFCACL_DEVELOPER: Remote Function Call – SAP_QAP_RFC_DESTINATIONS: Trust System – ZSAP_BPC_BTCH_JOB: Background Job – Z_BUI_S_ADMIN_USER: Logon Web Client – Z_BUI_S_DISPLAY_USER: Logon Web Client © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

RKT

9

BPC Netweaver Authorizations (Cont.)

Standard BPC Authorization Objects: – /POA/A_BUI: Authorizations of a BUI user regarding content types, resource types, applications, and activities. – /POA/A_BPT: BUI Authorization Object including partitions – S_DEVELOP: General authorization object for objects in the ABAP Workbench & Flex Client. Object type should SMIM for MIME repository – /POA/A_RST: SBC REST Authorization Object. It is used for user management service – S_USER_AGR: Authorization used for Retrieving roles and user info – S_USER_GRP: Authorization used for Retrieving roles and user info


RKT

10

BPC Netweaver CLM Authorizations

CLM Authorizations: – /POA/CLMAC: Authorization Object for CLM actions and applications. – /POA/CLMRP: Authorization Object to Execute CLM Utilities – S_TABU_DIS: Table Maintenance for CLM with values of CLMC & CLMA – S_APPL_LOG: Check Application Log Entries – S_BTCH_JOB: Control background job creation. For CLM, JOBACTION should be RELE – S_DEVELOP: CLM to generate XSLT code to validate inbound XML documents. Object Type should be XSLT & SMIM – S_ICF: Authorization Object for controlling outbound RFC calls. – S_START: Authorization to start or run an application/development object (in this case, CLM Web Dynpro application) © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

RKT

11


BPC Web UI Authorizations

BPC Web UI Authorizations are made available using an internet browser by using Adobe Flash technology All user authorizations are managed from Web UI Admin client


RKT

13

BPC Web UI Task Profile

The following default administrative task profiles permit a specific set of tasks: – SystemAdmin – PrimaryAdmin – SecondaryAdmin A System Administrator (SystemAdmin), by default, has the following task rights: – Manage Environments – Manage Security – Use System When Offline


RKT

14

BPC Web UI Task Profile (Cont.)

A Primary Administrator (PrimaryAdmin), by default, has the following task rights: – Manage Models – Manage Business Rules – Manage Dimensions – Manage Data Locks and Work Status – Manage Environment Status – Manage Drill Throughs – Manage Templates – Manage Audit – Use Offline Distribution – Edit Comments – Edit Book and Distribution templates – Publish Books – Run Documents from EPM add-in – Manage Security – Administer Documents © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

RKT

15

BPC Web UI Task Profile (Cont.)

A Secondary Administrator (SecondaryAdmin), by default, has the following task rights: – Manage Dimensions – Edit content of Public Folder

Tips for Assigning Task Profiles The number of task profiles administrators can assign to a user is not limited. However, SAP recommends that you do not assign multiple task profiles to users because it may cause you confusion in determining their ultimate access rights. Task access security is cumulative, and tasks cannot be explicitly denied. As a result, assigning multiple task profiles can create a situation where users have access to tasks that you may not want them to have.


RKT

16

Administration Task Profile Description Task

Can be assigned to

Description

Manage Business Rules

Primary Administrator

Can define business rules

Manage Data Locks and Work Status

Primary administrator

Can define and edit work status codes

Manage Dimensions

Primary and secondary administrators

Create, modify, process, and delete dimensions and members.

Manage Document Types

Any user or team

Can categorize collaboration postings, which is useful when filtering collaboration postings to see certain types. Subtypes can be managed by administrators or created by users as they post.

Manage Drill Through


Can create and modify drill-through setup.

Manage Environment Status


Can view environment status.

Manage Environments

System administrator

Can create and modify environments, and set environment parameters.

Manage Models


Can create, modify, and delete models in an environment, make changes to dimensions and add dimensions, and optimize models.


RKT

17

Analysis and Collection Task Profile Description

Task

Can be assigned to

Description

Manage Templates

Any user or team

Can access templates from the public folder, and restrict workbook options. A team member or team leader with this task can access and save templates to their respective team folder.

Run Drill Through

Any user or team

Can execute drill-through.

Use Input Forms and Save Data

Any user or team

Can access the built input schedules and send data. Can use spread, weight, and trend options. Controls submitting data from the web reports.


RKT

18

Audit Task Profile Description

Task

Can be assigned to

Description

Manage Audit

Any user or team

Can manage activity and data auditing


RKT

19

Business Process Flow Task Profile Description

Task

Can be assigned to

Description

Use Offline Distribution

Any user or team

Can use the Offline Distributor.

Use Offline Collection

Any user or team

This user or team collects changes to offline input schedules and sends data to a database.


RKT

20

Comments Task Profile Description

Task

Can be assigned to

Description

Administer Comments

Any user or team

Can add, modify, and remove comments for all users.

Edit Comments

Any user or team

Can add, modify, and remove his or her own comments.


RKT

21

Consolidations Task Profile Description

Task

Can be assigned to

Description

Dismiss Blocking Controls

Any user or team

Can force failing controls to Dismissed status

Edit Ownership Manager

Any user or team

Can add, modify, and remove his or her own comments.

Edit Controls definition

Any user or team

This user or team has write access to the Ownership Manager, but cannot run the ownership calculation routine.

Reset Control Dismissal

Any user or team

Can set up controls in Administration.

View Consolidation Monitor

Any user or team

Can reset a Dismissed control status to its previous status.

View Consolidation Monitor

Any user or team

Can reset a Dismissed control status to its previous status.


RKT

22

Consolidations Task Profile Description (Cont.)

Task

Can be assigned to

Description

Run Consolidation Tasks

Any user or team

Can access the Consolidation Monitor, but cannot perform any actions.

Run Controls

Any user or team

Can run currency translation and consolidations in the Consolidation Monitor.

Run Ownership Calculations

Any user or team

Can access Controls Monitor and run control calculations.

View Controls

Any user or team

Can access Controls Monitor in read-only mode.

View Controls definition

Any user or team

Can read Control Manager definitions.

View Ownership Manager

Any user or team

Can access the landing page of the Ownership Manager.


RKT

23

Data Manager Task Profile Description

Task

Can be assigned to

Description

Run Admin Packages

Any user or team

Can run Admin packages within Data Manager.

Edit Packages

Any user or team

Can maintain packages within Data Manager.

Edit Transformation Files

Any user or team

Can maintain transformation files within Data Manager.

Edit Conversion Files

Any user or team

Can maintain conversion files within Data Manager.

Cancel Any User Packages

Any user or team

Can cancel user packages within Data Manager.

Edit Package Schedules for any user

Any user or team

Can change the package schedule for any user within Data Manager.

Run Packages

Any user or team

Can run packages within Data Manager

Edit Package Links

Any user or team

Can maintain package links within Data Manager.

Upload Data

Any user or team

Can upload data within Data Manager.

Download Data

Any user or team

Can download data within Data Manager.


RKT

24

Folder Access Task Profile Description

Task

Can be assigned to

Description

Edit content of Public Folders

Secondary Admin

Can add and manage content in the public folder, including creating new folders. User also needs document type access rights, such as Edit Workspaces or Edit Reports.


RKT

25

Journal Task Profile Description

Task

Can be assigned to

Description

Edit Journals

Any user or team

Can create or modify journal entries.

Lock/Unlock Journals

Any user or team

Can lock and unlock journal entries

Manage Journals

Any user or team

Can manage journals as follows: Create and maintain journal templates Clear journal tables Create Journal

Post Journals

Any user or team

Can post journals.

View Journals

Any user or team

Can view journals.

Unpost Journals

Any user or team

Can Unpost journal entries.

Reopen Journals

Any user or team

Can reopen journals.


RKT

26

Publish Task Profile Description

Task

Can be assigned to

Description

Edit Book and Distribution templates.

Primary Admin

Can create, edit, and save book and distribution templates.

Publish Books

Primary Admin

Can publish a book of reports.

Run Documents from EPM add-in

Primary Admin

Can run documents from the EPM Add-in for Microsoft Office.


RKT

27

System Reports Task Profile Description

Task

Can be assigned to

Description

Run Audit Reports

Any user or team

Can run audit reports.

Run Comment Reports

Any user or team

Can run a comment report.

Run Security Reports

Any user or team

Can run security reports.

Run Work Status Reports

Any user or team

Can run a work status report.


RKT

28

System Security Task Profile Description

Task

Can be assigned to

Description

Use System When Offline

System Admin

Can log onto Planning and Consolidation when the status of an environment is Not Available.

Manage Security

System and primary administrators

Can manage users, task, and data access profiles.


RKT

29

Transport Task Profile Description

Task

Can be assigned to

Description

Manage Transport

System Admin

Can retrieve Planning and Consolidation TLOGO


RKT

30

Web Report Profile Description

Task

Can be assigned to

Description

Edit Documents

Any user or team

User can use documents, can add, edit, and delete their own documents, and can access all documents shared with them.

Edit Reports


User can create web reports, and can open and edit their web reports and those of other users. Gives these rights in all folders the user has write access.

Administer Documents


Can use documents, and can add, edit, and delete all documents.

Edit Workspaces

Any user or team

Can create and update workspaces.

Edit Crystal Dashboards

Any user or team

Can create and modify, and save Crystal Dashboards.


RKT

31

Web Service Profile Description

Task

Can be assigned to

Description

Access BPC from FIM and SSM

Any user or team

Can access Planning and Consolidation from the Financial Information Management and Strategy Management applications.


RKT

32

Work Status Profile Description

Task

Can be assigned to

Description

Use Work Status

Any user or team

Can change the work status on a data region.


RKT

33


Data Access Profile

Data access profile must be defined for secured dimensions of the model After creating the data access profile, you assign it to users as needed Data Access Security is based on: – By default, no one other than the system administrator has access to members. Member access must be explicitly granted. – A user can be assigned data access individually and through team membership – Data access privileges flow down the hierarchy, from parent to child – When in conflict, the least restrictive data access profile is applied – In case of a conflict between individual and team data access, the least restrictive setting is applied – Denial of data access can be set only at the user level When defining access to a secured dimension that has one or more defined hierarchies, security is applied to the member and all of its children


RKT

35

Creating Data Access Profile


RKT

36

Modifying Data Access Profile


RKT

37

Copying Data Access Profile


RKT

38

Removing Data Access Profile


RKT

39

Security Model Changes Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Describe the new Security Model with BPC 10 in SAP NetWeaver with EPM Add-in Describe the new Security Model with EPM Web UI


RKT

40






RKT

41


Performing Activities

Performing Activities Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Create a Performing Activity Template Deploy a Performing Activity Instance Understand how the Process Monitor tracks progress Explain how activity execution is linked to the Activity Instance


RKT

2

Performing Activities

Performing Activities (formally known as Business Process Flows) guide you through a sequence of tasks within a defined business process. Depending on your role, the activities available to you can involve completing actions, or reviewing submitted actions. A template is developed in the BPC Admin client. This template can then be copied into a number of active instances. Assigned end-users can access these instances to perform the prescribed tasks. This is the same behavior as with previous BPC versions.


RKT

3

Performing Activities User Interface

The main change in this development and deployment process is the user interface. The templates are created in the BPC 10 enhanced Administration Web Client.


RKT

4

Creating a Performing Activity Template Prerequisite for Creating a Performing Activity Template

The prerequisite for creating a Performing Activity template is a driver dimension with properties that define an owner and a reviewer for BPFs.


RKT

5

Creating a Performing Activity Template

To create a new template Click +New


RKT

6


Enter Name and Description, identify Model and Dimension(s) (used to uniquely identify each instance).


RKT

7


To create new activities Click +New


RKT

8

Creating a Performing Activity Template Process Settings Tab

Enter a name and description of the new template Identify the model and one or more dimensions that will be used to uniquely identify any instances deployed from this template. Indentify the Process Monitor user (the person who will be able to monitor all instances from this template and who will be able to finalize instances).


RKT

9

Creating a Performing Activity Template Activities Tab

To define a new activity Click the Activities tab


RKT

10

Creating a Performing Activity Template Activities Tab

Defining the activity is similar to previous version of BPC: 1. You will need to provide a desciption of the activity 2. Identify a driving dimension and a specific member to identify the performers/reviewers associated with this activity 3. Identify the property of the driver dimension that contains the performer (formally called the “owner“) of this activity 4. Activate the need for a reviewer (checkbox), then identify the property where tha name of the reviewer is stored 5. Determine opening criteria (same as in previous versions) 6. Allow this activity to be reopened (checkbox) 7. Link in a workspace that can contain one or more Actions.


RKT

11

Creating a Performing Activity Template Creating Activities

Activities (formally known as step and sub-steps) provide a hyperlinked set of predefined actions to all end-user BPC functionality. Actions can: Open workspaces Open reports and input schedules in BPC Excel Open BPC Word and BPC PowerPoint interfaces Run Data Manager packages Set Work Status Run Consolidation functions Link to external URLs Open Audit functions Open BPC Library and Document storage


RKT

12


Collections of Activities can be defined for the person who will be completing the actions (the performer). The same set of activities developed for the reviewer can be accessed by reviewers, or if desired, a separately defined workspace can be constructed for the exclusive use of the reviewer. The workspace radio button selector controls this selection.

The workspace (the reviewer’s workspace or, if selected, the reviewer’s workspace) is accessed by clicking the Edit button(s) provided.


RKT

13


Activities can contain one or more actions and each action can consist of one or more sub-actions and each sub-action can be linked to one or more related action.


RKT

14

Creating a Performing Activity Template Creating Actions

Actions may include: Links to unstructured data (documents) stored in BPC A web report Hyperlinks to access all BPC functionality Hyperlinks to access external URLs


RKT

15


To Add Content Actions Click Add Content and the selection box appears


RKT

16


Add New Report Actions: Click Add New Report and an Untitled New Report template opens Configure and rename using the same techniques in any other BPC web-based report


RKT

17


Add Hyperlinks Action: Click Add Hyperlinks and a New Hyperlink action is created


RKT

18


Defining a Hyperlink Action: Enter name and description Select a target action to be associated with the hyperlink


RKT

19


Defining a Hyperlink Action: Depending on your action selection, a second selection box may appear to refine the specific action.


RKT

20


Defining a Hyperlink Action: Some action selections may require the location of a specific report or Data Manager package.


RKT

21


Defining a Hyperlink Action: Some actions will require the selection of the specific dimensional context to be used when executing the action. Options include: – Use the dimension value specified by the workspace – Use a specific dimension value selected at the time of the action’s configuration


RKT

22


Defining a Hyperlink Action: Related Actions can be linked into the action definition. Click the Edit button and a popup appears allowing you to enter additional actions to be made available for selection when executing the main action being defined. In the example below, the related action allows the user to check the package status after executing a currency conversion package.


RKT

23

Creating a Performing Activity Template Template Administration

Saved templates can be validated, locked, copied, deleted, archived, and deployed (readied for instance creation). Templates can be copied into another version to allow the continued operation of existing instances based on an older version of the same template.


RKT

24

Deploying Performing Activity Instances

Once a template has been defined, saved, and validated, the administrator can deploy instances (copies of the template) for execution.

To start the instance creation: Click +New


RKT

25

Deploying Performing Activity Instances Step 1

Creating the instance is a five step wizard driven process. 1. Select the process template.


RKT

26


2. Select the instance owner (this person will receive email updates).


RKT

27


3. Select the context that the instance will be identified with.


RKT

28


4. Review and update assignments, use the Change Performer and Change Reviewer options to reselect new individuals.


RKT

29


5. Review all selections. You have the option to start the instance (make the new instance available to the assigned users) immediately if desired.


RKT

30

Deploying Performing Activity Instances If the instance was created successfully, you will see a green status bar.


RKT

31

Deploying Performing Activity Instances Once the instance is created, it will be displayed in the Process Instance administration view. If the option to immediately start the instance was not selected during the instance creation, the instance will initially be set to a suspended status. The suspended status stops any user from using this instance until it is ready for final deployment.


RKT

32

Deploying Performing Activity Instances The suspended instance can be selected and started (made available to the assigned users), and changes can be made to individual assignments, or the instance can be Archived.

Once a process instance has been archived, it cannot be restored or recovered.


RKT

33

Deploying Performing Activity Instances Changing the assignment will cause a popup to appear that allows the selection of a new process owner and new activity owners.


RKT

34

Deploying Performing Activity Instances Starting a suspended instance will make the activities contained within the instance available to the activity owners and reviewers. Starting the instance changes the instance status to Running.


RKT

35

Deploying Performing Activity Instances A running instance can be suspended (all new activity processing stopped).

A suspended instance can be resumed.


RKT

36

Deploying Performing Activity Instances A non-running instance can be reset (resetting takes the instance back to a running status and all activities back to their initial state).


RKT

37

Deploying Performing Activity Instances The Instance owner is informed of all status changes via email.

Hyperlink to the Process Monitor


RKT

38

Performing Activities Process Monitor

The instance owner can run the BPC web-based Process Monitor to view all assigned instances. The Process Monitor lists a percent completion for each instance and can be sorted by template and/or instance status.


RKT

39


Click an instance in the Process Monitor and a new tab opens exposing the details of the selected instance. Click the Perform action to open the defined action.


RKT

40

Performing Activities Activity Execution

Once the defined action opens (in the case illustrated below, BPC Excel is opened and a Data Manager package is presented for execution), the user is presented with a detailed Business Process Flow action pane that links all related actions and other actions in one location. When the activity has been completed, the user can click the Return to Activity Workspace button to continue to the next activity.


RKT

41


Upon returning to Activity Workspace, the Process Monitor is updated with current status and activity statistics (number complete).


RKT

42

Performing Activities Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Create a Performing Activity Template Deploy a Performing Activity Instance Understand how the Process Monitor tracks progress Explain how activity execution is linked to the Activity Instance


RKT

43






RKT

44


Web Client Structure

Web Client Structure Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Describe the Home tab, built-in screens and use of tabs


RKT

2

Topics 1. Home Tab 2. Built-in Screens

Home Tab

The Home Tab can be broken into five parts: • Header • Built-in Screens • Creation Area • Launch Area • Footer


RKT

4

Header The Header area shows the following information: • • • •

Current user Logoff button Link to custom Preferences Link for Help


RKT

5

Preferences (1 of 2) The Text Size as well as Theme can be customized for the User.


RKT

6

Preferences (2 of 2) Language and Region can also be customized


RKT

7

Create Area (1 of 4)

The Create Area allows users to create new Workspaces, Reports, and Input Forms.


RKT

8


Creating New Workspaces opens a new Tab.


RKT

9


Creating a New Report opens a new Tab.


RKT

10


Creating a New Input Form opens a new Tab.


RKT

11

Launch Area

The Launch Area allows users to access the EPM Office Add-in Excel, EPM Office Add-in Word, EPM Add-in Powerpoint, and Planning and Consolidation Administration.


RKT

12

Footer Area

The Footer Area shows the current Environment the user is logged in to, the access rights of the user, a hyperlink to download the EPM Add-in software, and an About link for Planning and Consolidations.


RKT

13

Environment

To change the Environment, click the Environment hyperlink and all available Environments will be listed.


RKT

14

Show Access Rights

The current user can see their Access Rights by clicking Show Access Rights.


RKT

15

Download Center

To install the EPM Add-in for Microsoft Office, click the Download Center hyperlink.


RKT

16


Built-in Screens

The Home Tab comes with built-in screens for Activities, Process Monitor, Library, Documents, Consolidation Central, and Audit.


RKT

18

Activities

Activities lists the processes that you, as the currently logged-on user, can access to perform or review actions.


RKT

19

Process Monitor

The Process Monitor displays a list of Processes, and the full set of process instances.


RKT

20

Library

The Library enables you to store and modify objects like Workspaces, Reports, Input Forms, Crystal Dashboards, and books.


RKT

21

Documents

Documents is a central repository for storing files and websites.


RKT

22

Consolidation Central (1 of 5)

Consolidation Central allows the user to manage consolidated data.


RKT

23


Consolidation Manager


RKT

24


Controls Manager


RKT

25


Journals


RKT

26


Ownership Manager


RKT

27

Audit

Audit allows the user to run reports containing system information.


RKT

28

Web Client Structure Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Describe the Home tab, built-in screens and use of tabs


RKT

29






RKT

30


Web Client Structure

Web Client Structure Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Describe the Home tab, built-in screens and use of tabs


RKT

2


Home Tab

The Home Tab can be broken into five parts: • Header • Built-in Screens • Creation Area • Launch Area • Footer


RKT

4

Header The Header area shows the following information: • • • •

Current user Logoff button Link to custom Preferences Link for Help


RKT

5

Preferences (1 of 2) The Text Size as well as Theme can be customized for the User.


RKT

6

Preferences (2 of 2) Language and Region can also be customized


RKT

7


The Create Area allows users to create new Workspaces, Reports, and Input Forms.


RKT

8


Creating New Workspaces opens a new Tab.


RKT

9


Creating a New Report opens a new Tab.


RKT

10


Creating a New Input Form opens a new Tab.


RKT

11

Launch Area

The Launch Area allows users access to EPM Office Add-in Excel, EPM Office Add-in Word, EPM Add-in Powerpoint, Planning and Consolidation Administration, and FIM integration.


RKT

12

Footer Area

The Footer Area shows the current Environment the user is logged in to, the access rights of the user, a hyperlink to download the EPM Add-in software, and an About link for Planning and Consolidations.


RKT

13

Environment

To change the Environment, click the Environment hyperlink and all available Environments will be listed.


RKT

14

Show Access Rights

The current user can see their Access Rights by clicking Show Access Rights.


RKT

15

Download Center

To install the EPM Add-in for Microsoft Office, click the Download Center hyperlink.


RKT

16


Built-in Screens

The Home Tab comes with built-in screens for Processes, Library, Documents, Consolidation Central, Analysis and Audit.


RKT

18

Processes

Processes guide users through a prepackaged set of application tasks that must be completed sequentially.


RKT

19

Library

The Library enables you to store and modify objects like Workspaces, Reports, Input Forms, Crystal Dashboards, and books.


RKT

20

Documents

Documents is a central repository for storing files and websites.


RKT

21


Consolidation Central allows the user to manage consolidated data.


RKT

22


Journals


RKT

23


Ownership Manager


RKT

24


Automated variance analysis (AVA) provides analysis in real-time, removing the manual effort of investigation. It can evaluate the data stored within a given model and navigates the model automatically, determining the key contributors of performance.


RKT

25


By clicking AVA Admin, a user can setup Global Indexes, Default Comparisons, and Traversal Dimensions.


RKT

26


By clicking KPI Admin, a user can setup different KPI’s, users who can access them (Authorization), what the comparisons should be, performance indexes specifically for that KPI, as well as the Constraints (specifying the dimension members).


RKT

27

Audit

Audit allows the user to run reports containing system information.


RKT

28

Web Client Structure Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Describe the Home tab, built-in screens and use of tabs


RKT

29






RKT

30


Library

Library Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain the Library


RKT

2

Topics 1. Folders 2. Filter Library Objects 3. Library Actions

Folders

Library: Allows the user to create, view, and edit Planning and Consolidation objects.

Favorites shows the folder where the object is stored


RKT

4


Folders

A user can filter the objects displayed in the folders.


RKT

6


Folders

Library actions are just below the filtering option, allowing the user to create, open, delete, rename, and move objects to certain folders.

By clicking New, the user is able to create a new objects.


RKT

8

Folders

To Open an object, either double-click the object or highlight the object and select Open.

In this case, the Rates workspace is opened rendering two subfolders (Rates and Ownership).


RKT

9

Folders

To Delete an object, highlight the object and select Delete.

Confirmation box making sure you want to delete the object.


RKT

10

Folders

To Rename an object, highlight the object and select Rename.

Prompt screen to Rename the object.


RKT

11

Folders

To Move an object to another folder, highlight the object and select Move To.

Prompt screen to Move the object.


RKT

12

Library Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Explain the Library


RKT

13






RKT

14


Library

Library Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain the Library


RKT

2


Folders

Library: Allows the user to create, view, and edit Planning and Consolidation objects.

Favorites shows the folder where the object is stored


RKT

4


Folders

A user can filter the objects displayed in the folders.


RKT

6


Folders

Library actions are just below the filtering option, allowing the user to create, open, delete, rename, and move objects to certain folders.

By clicking New, the user is able to create a new objects.


RKT

8

Folders

To Open an object, either double-click the object or highlight the object and select Open.

In this case, the Rates workspace is opened rendering two subfolders (Rates and Ownership).


RKT

9

Folders

To Delete an object, highlight the object and select Delete.

Confirmation box making sure you want to delete the object.


RKT

10

Folders

To Rename an object, highlight the object and select Rename.

Prompt screen to Rename the object.


RKT

11

Folders

To Move an object to another folder, highlight the object and select Move To.

Prompt screen to Move the object.


RKT

12

Library Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Explain the Library


RKT

13






RKT

14


Navigation and Context in Reports and Input Forms

Navigation and Context in Reports and Input Forms Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Describe Context Defaults, Drill, Refresh and Save


RKT

2

Topics 1. Accessing Web Reports 2. Context Defaults 3. Drill 4. Refresh and Save

Accessing Web Reports

Web Reports can be accessed either through the Library or from the Start Page, if the report has been marked as a Favorite. Library view

Reports set up via Favorites


RKT

4


Context Defaults

The current context is displayed along the top of the report. A white context window means that you are not at the context default set in BPC Administration.

Via the Administration user interface, an administrator can set the reporting and input form context defaults as well as display or hide certain dimensions. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

RKT

6

Context Defaults

To change the context of the report, select the dimension and choose from the dropdown list.

To add new dimensions to the context, select the blue plus sign and all dimensions will be displayed.


RKT

7

Context Defaults

To remove a dimension from the current context, place the cursor in the upper left corner of the dimension and click the “x”.

To restore a dimension to the context defaults, place the cursor in the top left corner of the dimension, and click the blue arrow.


RKT

8


Drilling

To drill down within a report, click the plus buttons next to the dimension member within the report. This can be done on both the row and column axis.


RKT

10


Refresh and Save

To restore the report to it’s original format, select Refresh. To Save the report, click Save in the upper right corner of the report.


RKT

12

Navigation and Context in Reports and Input Forms Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Describe Context Defaults, Drill, Refresh and Save


RKT

13






RKT

14


Navigation and Context in Reports and Input Forms

Navigation and Context in Reports and Input Forms Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Describe Context Defaults, Drill, Refresh and Save


RKT

2


Accessing Web Reports

Web Reports can be accessed either through the Library or from the Start Page, if the report has been marked as a Favorite. Library view

Reports set up via Favorites


RKT

4


Context Defaults

The current context is displayed along the top of the report. A white context window means that you are not at the context default set in BPC Administration.

Via the Administration user interface, an administrator can set the reporting and input form context defaults as well as display or hide certain dimensions. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

RKT

6

Context Defaults

To change the context of the report, select the dimension and choose from the dropdown list.

To add new dimensions to the context, select the blue plus sign and all dimensions will be displayed.


RKT

7

Context Defaults

To remove a dimension from the current context, place the cursor in the upper left corner of the dimension and click the “x”.

To restore a dimension to the context defaults, place the cursor in the top left corner of the dimension, and click the blue arrow.


RKT

8


Drilling

To drill down within a report, click the plus buttons next to the dimension member within the report. This can be done on both the row and column axis.


RKT

10


Refresh and Save

To restore the report to it’s original format, select Refresh. To Save the report, click Save in the upper right corner of the report.


RKT

12

Navigation and Context in Reports and Input Forms Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Describe Context Defaults, Drill, Refresh and Save


RKT

13






RKT

14


Creating Web Reports & Input Forms

Creating Web Reports & Input Forms Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain how to create web reports & input forms


RKT

2

Topics 1. Creating Web Reports and Input Forms 2. Inputting Data 3. Comments and Work Status

Web Reports and Input Forms

To create a new report or input form, select New Report or New Input Form from the Start Page.


RKT

4


The new report designer is opened allowing the user to configure the report or input template.


RKT

5


Below the Context Default is the Report Action Menu.


RKT

6


To add dimensions to the column or row axis, highlight the dimension and select the icon on the right. The user will then be prompted to the dimension to either the Row or Column.

The second way is to drag and drop the dimension(s) to the appropriate axis.


RKT

7


The current expansion will show under the dimensions, in this case Children of (Current Context). To modify the expansion behavior, click the icon to the right of the highlighted dimension.


RKT

8


The user can define how the selection will be expanded by choosing the appropriate selection.

Possible selections •Single Member •Children of •Descendants of •Base Members of •Fixed List


RKT

9


The expansion can either use the Current Context or Select a Fixed Member.

Select a Fixed Member displays the Member Selector box. If the expansion is “Fixed List”, then the user will be able to select multiple dimension members.


RKT

10


The last selection defines the starting member behavior (to display it or not). To have multiple expansions, select the blue plus sign to add additional expansions.


RKT

11


Below the Context Default is the report action menu where you define the type of report (Report or Input Form), the format of the data, Comments, and Chart characteristics.


RKT

12


It is possible to display a chart below the report or input form by selecting the Chart Action item.


RKT

13


To modify the type of chart, select Modify Chart.

Chart Options include: • 4 bar graphs • Line graph • Pie chart • Legend definition • Grid display


RKT

14


After making the appropriate selections, the report renders data as well as the chart.


RKT

15


When the Report or Input Form is finished, select Finish Editing and be sure to Save it.


RKT

16


Inputting Data

When entering data via an input form, it is important to make sure you are entering data at a base member level, not at a parent level.


RKT

18

Inputting Data

After changing the Intercompany dimension to a base member, the user can enter data.

After selecting Save, a splash screen appears making sure you want to send the data.


RKT

19

Inputting Data

Data has been successfully saved to the database.


RKT

20


Comments

Comments can be entered at the cell level, for base members or for parents.


RKT

22

Comments

Enter the desired comments, set the Priority (None, Low, Medium, High, or Critical), as well as a Keyword (if needed).

Select Modify Context to specify a custom or alternate context.


RKT

23

Comments

After entering the Comment, the report action menu shows a (1) as well as an Excel Comment tick mark in the report. Place the cursor in the cell and the comment will appear.


RKT

24

Comments

A user can Edit Comments, Delete Comments, View History, as well Manage Comments from a web report or input form.

Select Mange Comments and a new tab is opened allowing the user to see all comments where they can Edit, Delete, Show History, or Edit the Criteria.


RKT

25

Work Status

If users have appropriate task security “Use work status”, they can change work status directly from a web report, by clicking on the “Work status” button from the web report toolbar.

The “Change work status” dialog will appear and Users can select the context for which they want to change the work status and select a new status from the list.


RKT

26

Creating Web Reports & Input Forms Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Explain how to create web reports & input forms


RKT

27






RKT

28


Creating Web Reports & Input Forms

Creating web Reports & Input Forms Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain how to create web reports & input forms


RKT

2



To create a new report or input form, select New Report or New Input Form from the Start Page.


RKT

4


The new report designer is opened allowing the user to configure the report or input template.


RKT

5


Below the Context Default is the Report Action Menu.


RKT

6


To add dimensions to the column or row axis, highlight the dimension and select the icon on the right. The user will then be prompted to the dimension to either the Row or Column.

The second way is to drag and drop the dimension(s) to the appropriate axis.


RKT

7


The current expansion will show under the dimensions, in this case Children of (Current Context). To modify the expansion behavior, click the icon to the right of the highlighted dimension.


RKT

8


The user can define how the selection will be expanded by choosing the appropriate selection.

Possible selections •Single Member •Children of •Descendants of •Base Members of •Fixed List


RKT

9


The expansion can either use the Current Context or Select a Fixed Member.

Select a Fixed Member displays the Member Selector box. If the expansion is “Fixed List”, then the user will be able to select multiple dimension members.


RKT

10


The last selection defines the starting member behavior (to display it or not). To have multiple expansions, select the blue plus sign to add additional expansions.


RKT

11


Below the Context Default is the report action menu where you define the type of report (Report or Input Form), the format of the data, Comments, and Chart characteristics.


RKT

12


It is possible to display a chart below the report or input form by selecting the Chart Action item.


RKT

13


To modify the type of chart, select Modify Chart.

Chart Options include: • 4 bar graphs • Line graph • Pie chart • Legend definition • Grid display


RKT

14


After making the appropriate selections, the report renders data as well as the chart.


RKT

15


When the Report or Input Form is finished, select Finish Editing and be sure to Save it.


RKT

16


Inputting Data

When entering data via an input form, it is important to make sure you are entering data at a base member level, not at a parent level.


RKT

18

Inputting Data

After changing the Intercompany dimension to a base member, the user can enter data.

After selecting Save, a splash screen appears making sure you want to send the data.


RKT

19

Inputting Data

Data has been successfully saved to the database.


RKT

20


Comments

Comments can be entered at the cell level, for base members or for parents.


RKT

22

Comments

Enter the desired comments, set the Priority (None, Low, Medium, High, or Critical), as well as a Keyword (if needed).

Select Modify Context to specify a custom or alternate context.


RKT

23

Comments

After entering the Comment, the report action menu shows a (1) as well as an Excel Comment tick mark in the report. Place the cursor in the cell and the comment will appear.


RKT

24

Comments

A user can Edit Comments, Delete Comments, View History, as well Manage Comments from a web report or input form.

Select Mange Comments and a new tab is opened allowing the user to see all comments where they can Edit, Delete, Show History, or Edit the Criteria.


RKT

25

Work Status

If users have appropriate task security “Use work status”, they can change work status directly from a web report, by clicking on the “Work status” button from the web report toolbar.

The “Change work status” dialog will appear and Users can select the context for which they want to change the work status and select a new status from the list.


RKT

26

Creating web Reports & Input Forms Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Explain how to create web reports & input forms


RKT

27






RKT

28


Workspaces

Workspaces Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Describe Embedded content, linked content, saving & authorizations


RKT

2

Topics 1. Creating a Workspace 2. Modifying a Workspace

Creating Workspaces

Workspaces are groupings of specific content related to a business processes.


RKT

4

Creating Workspaces


The default context is inherited from the Administration defaults set up by the Administrator.


RKT

5

Creating Workspaces

To change the Model, click the blue files button to the left of the current context.

Adding Content links to content already stored in the Library.


RKT

6

Creating Workspaces

When a new object is added to the Workspace, a new line item is created under Overview.


RKT

7

Creating Workspaces

A user can add, edit, delete, manage comments as well as view comment history.

Work Status can also be updated from within workspaces.


RKT

8

Creating Workspaces

Reports and Input Forms can be created specifically for workspaces.

Add a new report/input form to a workspace opens the report designer.


RKT

9

Creating Workspaces

Objects can be renamed, deleted, and set as default within the workspace.


RKT

10

Creating Workspaces

Workspaces can be saved on one of the three library folders (Public, Private, or Teams).



RKT

11


Modifying Workspaces

To modify a workspace, select Library from the Home folder, and select Workspaces.


RKT

13

Workspaces Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Describe Embedded content, linked content, saving & authorizations


RKT

14






RKT

15


Workspaces

Workspaces Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Describe Embedded content, linked content, saving & authorizations


RKT

2


Creating Workspaces



RKT

4

Creating Workspaces


The default context is inherited from the Administration defaults set up by the Administrator.


RKT

5

Creating Workspaces

To change the Model, click the blue files button to the left of the current context.

Adding Content links to content already stored in the Library.


RKT

6

Creating Workspaces

When a new object is added to the Workspace, a new line item is created under Overview.


RKT

7

Creating Workspaces

A user can add, edit, delete, manage comments as well as view comment history.

Work Status can also be updated from within workspaces.


RKT

8

Creating Workspaces

Reports and Input Forms can be created specifically for workspaces.

Add a new report/input form to a workspace opens the report designer.


RKT

9

Creating Workspaces

Objects can be renamed, deleted, and set as default within the workspace.


RKT

10

Creating Workspaces




RKT

11


Modifying Workspaces

To modify a workspace, select Library from the Home folder, and select Workspaces.


RKT

13

Workspaces Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Describe Embedded content, linked content, saving & authorizations


RKT

14






RKT

15


Using Crystal Dashboards

Using Crystal Dashboards Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain how to add a Crystal Dashboard to the Library and add it in to a Workspace


RKT

2

Topics 1. Overview of Dashboard Design Functionality 2. Installation and Configuration 3. Designing Dashboards 4. Publishing Dashboards

Crystal Dashboards Functionality: Overview

Crystal Dashboards and SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation – Read live data – Simulate and write-back – Dashboards built dynamically using metadata Key Crystal Dashboard capabilities: – Provide a planning dashboard with rich visualization attributes – Adds the capability for write back for simple data input.


RKT

4


Installation and Configuration: Requirements To run the dashboard based on flash files: – Adobe Flash Player installed on client PCs To build the dashboard: – SAP BusinessObjects Dashboard Design – SAP EPM Add-In for Microsoft Excel – SAP BW OLE DB Provider – SAP EPM Connector – SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation Data Grid(Optional) To run the dashboard outside of BPC web client(standalone or in Excel) – Crossdomain file must be created at http(s)://:/sap/crossdomain.xml – Details can be found in the EPM Office Add-Ins Master Guide XMLA service in ICF must be activated – /sap/bw/xml/soap/xmla/ node can be activated via Transaction SICF – Details can be found in the SBOP PC 10.0 Installation Guide © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

RKT

6

Installation and Configuration: Configure the Model

Configure the Model from the Planning and Consolidation Administration Console 1. Log on to the Admin Console 2. Click Models 3. Click the Model name 4. Check Use as Source of data 5. Click Save


RKT

7

Installation and Configuration: Dashboard Add-Ons

Install the Dashboard Design Add-Ons 1. The EPM Connector xlx file is located in the installation directory of the EPM add-in under the EPMConnector folder C:\Program Files (x86)\SAP BusinessObjects\EPM AddIn\EPMConnector\EPMConnector.xlx

2. The BPC Data Grid xlx file is available as part of the How-To guide on SDN. http://www.sdn.sap.com/irj/scn/go/portal/prtroot/docs/librar y/uuid/8032028f-82c7-2b10-0995-8333d8041b30

3. Install the Add-Ons from the Dashboard Design menu 4. Click Install Add-On, then choose the xlx file, then click Close


RKT

8


Designing Dashboards – Create the Connection

Create a new local connection 1. Launch SAP BusinessObjects Dashboard Design 2. From Excel within Dashboard Design, click the EPM tab 3. Click Report Actions, then Manage Connections 4. From the connection manager, choose Create


RKT

10


Choose a connection type 1. Choose Local Connection 2. Select SAP BW OLE DB Provider 3. Click Connect


RKT

11


Configure the connection 1. Enter the application server host 2. Select the Authentication 3. Enter the System number 4. Enter the Client number 5. Enter the Language 6. Click Next 7. Enter user and password 8. Click Logon


RKT

12


Choose the location 1. Select $INFOCUBE 2. Click Finish


RKT

13


Select the Model 1. Select the cube/model from the list 2. All models are listed in alphabetical order regardless of environment 3. You must select the cube which corresponds to the transient query cube 4. Click OK


RKT

14

Designing Dashboards – Create a Report

Create a new report 1. Select the connection 2. Click OK


RKT

15


Design the new report 1. Click the Edit Report button 2. Configure the report 3. Click OK


RKT

16


Retrieve the Report Definition 1. In any cell, enter =GetReportDefinition() 2. Press Enter 3. XML string will be returned


RKT

17

Designing Dashboards – Create the Dashboard

Design the dashboard 1. Select the BPC Data Grid object and drag and drop it into the layout editor


RKT

18


Configure the BPC Data Grid 1. Bind the header data element to the header row in the excel spreadsheet 2. Configure the columns, such as Alignment. 3. Bind the detail data element to the detail rows in the excel spreadsheet.


RKT

19

Designing Dashboards – Configure the EPM Connector

You can make the EPM add-in report dynamic by using the EPM connector. 1. Delete the static data from the EPM add-in report 2. From the Dashboard Design menu, choose Data, then Connections


RKT

20


Choose the Connector Type 1. From the Data Manager window, click Add 2. Under Add-On Connections, choose EPM Connector


RKT

21


Configure the Input Details of the EPM Connector connection 1. Enter a connection name 2. Select the Application and operation 3. Enter the URL for host application server 4. Define the Report Definition value by binding it to the cell on the spreadsheet


RKT

22


Configure the Output Details of the EPM Connector connection 1. Click Output Details 2. Check Refresh on Load 3. Click Close


RKT

23

Designing Dashboards – Add Connection Refresh Button

Add a connection refresh button to trigger the EPM connection 1. Drag and drop the Connection Refresh Button user interface element into the layout editor. 2. Configure the button to trigger the EPM connector connection.


RKT

24

Designing Dashboards – Adding Input Data Functionality

Configure the Data Grid to accept input 1. Click the BPC Data Grid object, and in the configuration section, set the columns as Editable.


RKT

25


Create a new EPM connector connection 1. Set operation as Input Data 2. Select Environment and Model


RKT

26


Set the cell definition 1. For each dimension, set the specific member


RKT

27


Set the cell value definition for this connection 1. Bind the cell of the spreadsheet for this new value. In this example, the cell for Material Cost and March 2011 is bound to this field. This value in this cell will be written back when this connection is triggered.


RKT

28


Add a update button to trigger the EPM connection for Input Data 1. Drag and drop the Connection Refresh Button user interface element into the layout editor. 2. Configure the button to trigger the EPM connector connection.


RKT

29

Designing Dashboards – Preview the Dashboard

Preview the dashboard 1. From the Dashboard Design menu, click Preview 2. The dashboard will then be launched showing the values


RKT

30


Publishing Dashboards – Export the Dashboard Design

Exporting the Dashboard to Flash 1. Export the Dashboard by choosing File, Export, Flash(SWF) 2. Give a name to the swf file and click Save


RKT

32

Publishing Dashboards – Upload the Dashboard

Upload the Dashboard 1. Click the Home tab 2. Click Library 3. From the Library click Dashboards 4. Click New, then Dashboard 5. Select the SWF file from the location and click Upload You may also upload the XLF file for storage as well


RKT

33

Publishing Dashboards – Save Dashboard Configuration

Configure the attributes of the Dashboard 1. Configure any variables 2. Click Save


RKT

34

Publishing Dashboards – Library View

Library view shows the new Dashboard 1. Click the Refresh button 2. The new dashboard is now available in the library


RKT

35

Publishing Dashboards – Adding to a Workspace

Create a new workspace and add the dashboard 1. Click Workspaces 2. From the menu, click New, then Workspace 3. In the new Untitled Workspace tab, click Add Content 4. Choose the location of the dashboard, then select the dashboard file 5. Click OK


RKT

36


Save the workspace 1. In the new Untitled Workspace tab, click Save Workspace, then Save Workspace As 2. Choose the location 3. Enter the name of the workspace as well as a description 4. Click Save


RKT

37


The dashboard is now added to the workspace


RKT

38

Using Crystal Dashboards Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Explain how to add a Crystal Dashboard to the Library and add it in to a Workspace


RKT

39






RKT

40


Using Crystal Dashboards

Using Crystal Dashboards Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain how to add a Crystal Dashboard to the Library and add it into a Workspace


RKT

2


Crystal Dashboards Functionality: Overview

Crystal Dashboards and SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation – Read live data – Simulate and write-back – Dashboards built dynamically using metadata Key Crystal Dashboard capabilities: – Provide a planning dashboard with rich visualization attributes – Adds the capability for write back for simple data input.


RKT

4


Installation and Configuration: Requirements To run the dashboard based on flash files: – Adobe Flash Player installed on client PCs To build the dashboard: – SAP BusinessObjects Dashboard Design – SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0 ODBO Client – SAP EPM Add-In – SAP EPM Connector – SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation Data Grid (Optional)


RKT

6

Installation and Configuration: Server Configuration Configure XMLA Provider – In the SBOP PC installed folder: o Choose Web XMLA > WebSrvr o Edit Datasource.xml o Check or modify the server name in the blow xml tag Data Source=servername – Restart the .net server Configure Flash, crossdomain.xml files – Three files are required, one under Websrvr, one under Websrvr->Web, and one under Websrvr->xmla


RKT

7

Installation and Configuration: Dashboard Add-Ons

Install the Dashboard Design Add-Ons 1. The EPM Connector xlx file is located in the installation directory of the EPM add-in under the EPMConnector folder C:\Program Files (x86)\SAP BusinessObjects\EPM AddIn\EPMConnector\EPMConnector.xlx

2. The BPC Data Grid xlx file is available as part of the How-To guide on SDN. http://www.sdn.sap.com/irj/scn/go/portal/prtroot/docs/librar y/uuid/8032028f-82c7-2b10-0995-8333d8041b30

3. Install the Add-Ons from the Dashboard Design menu 4. Click Install Add-On, then choose the xlx file, then click Close


RKT

8



Create a new local connection 1. Launch SAP BusinessObjects Dashboard Design 2. From Excel within Dashboard Design, click the EPM tab 3. Click Report Actions, then Manage Connections 4. From the connection manager, choose Create


RKT

10


Choose a connection type 1. Choose Local Connection 2. Select SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 3. Click Connect


RKT

11


Configure the connection 1. Enter the application server host 2. Select the Authentication 3. Click Next 4. Enter user and password 5. Click Logon


RKT

12


Choose the Environment 1. Select the Environment 2. Click Finish


RKT

13


Select the Model 1. Select the cube/model from the list 2. Click OK


RKT

14


Create a new report 1. Select the connection 2. Click OK


RKT

15


Design the new report 1. Click the Edit Report button 2. Configure the report 3. Click OK


RKT

16


Retrieve the Report Definition 1. In any cell, enter =GetReportDefinition() 2. Press Enter 3. XML string will be returned


RKT

17


Design the dashboard 1. Select the BPC Data Grid object and drag and drop it into the layout editor


RKT

18


Configure the BPC Data Grid 1. Bind the header data element to the header row in the excel spreadsheet 2. Configure the columns, such as Alignment. 3. Bind the detail data element to the detail rows in the excel spreadsheet.


RKT

19


You can make the EPM add-in report dynamic by using the EPM connector. 1. Delete the static data from the EPM add-in report 2. From the Dashboard Design menu, choose Data, then Connections


RKT

20


Choose the Connector Type 1. From the Data Manager window, click Add 2. Under Add-On Connections, choose EPM Connector


RKT

21


Configure the Input Details of the EPM Connector connection 1. Enter a connection name 2. Select the Application and operation 3. Enter the URL for host application server 4. Define the Report Definition value by binding it to the cell on the spreadsheet


RKT

22


Configure the Output Details of the EPM Connector connection 1. Click Output Details 2. Check Refresh on Load 3. Click Close


RKT

23

Designing Dashboards – Add Connection Refresh Button

Add a connection refresh button to trigger the EPM connection 1. Drag and drop the Connection Refresh Button user interface element into the layout editor. 2. Configure the button to trigger the EPM connector connection.


RKT

24


Configure the Data Grid to accept input 1. Click the BPC Data Grid object, and in the configuration section, set the columns as “Editable”.


RKT

25


Create a new EPM connector connection 1. Set operation as “Input Data” 2. Select Environment, and Model


RKT

26


Set the cell definition 1. For each dimension, set the specific member


RKT

27


Set the cell value definition for this connection 1. Bind the cell of the spreadsheet for this new value. In this example, the cell for Material Cost and March 2011 is bound to this field. This value in this cell will be written back when this connection is triggered.


RKT

28


Add a update button to trigger the EPM connection for Input Data 1. Drag and drop the Connection Refresh Button user interface element into the layout editor. 2. Configure the button to trigger the EPM connector connection.


RKT

29

Designing Dashboards – Preview the Dashboard

Preview the dashboard 1. From the Dashboard Design menu, click Preview 2. The dashboard will then be launched showing the values


RKT

30


Publishing Dashboards – Export the Dashboard Design

Exporting the Dashboard to Flash 1. Export the Dashboard by choosing File, Export, Flash(SWF) 2. Give a name to the swf file and click Save


RKT

32

Publishing Dashboards – Upload the Dashboard

Upload the Dashboard 1. Click the Home tab 2. Click Library 3. From the Library click Dashboards 4. Click New, then Dashboard 5. Select the SWF file from the location and click Upload You may also upload the XLF file for storage as well


RKT

33

Publishing Dashboards – Save Dashboard Configuration

Configure the attributes of the Dashboard 1. Configure any variables 2. Click Save


RKT

34

Publishing Dashboards – Library View

Library view shows the new Dashboard 1. Click the Refresh button 2. The new dashboard is now available in the library


RKT

35


Create a new workspace and add the dashboard 1. Click Workspaces 2. From the menu, click New, then Workspace 3. In the new Untitled Workspace tab, click Add Content 4. Choose the location of the dashboard, then select the dashboard file 5. Click OK


RKT

36


Save the workspace 1. In the new Untitled Workspace tab, click Save Workspace, then Save Workspace As 2. Choose the location 3. Enter the name of the workspace as well as a description 4. Click Save


RKT

37


The dashboard is now added to the workspace


RKT

38

Using Crystal Dashboards Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Explain how to add a Crystal Dashboard to the Library and add it into a Workspace


RKT

39






RKT

40


Documents

Documents Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain how to add external documents, filter, and archive


RKT

2

Topics 1. Adding Documents 2. Open Documents 3. Properties 4. Archive 5. Filter 6. Only My Documents

Documents

Documents is a repository for storing or sharing files and is a built-in screen on the Home tab.


RKT

4

Adding Files (1 of 5)

To post files or URL, select Add from the Home Folder.


RKT

5


When adding unstructured data, the user can browse their hard drive or a networked drive by selecting Browse.


RKT

6


The user can further distinguish the document by using Type and Subtype.

An administrator defines the different Types and Sub-types.


RKT

7


Storing the document by Context.


RKT

8


Adding Security to the document


RKT

9

Topics 1. Adding Documents 2. Opening Documents 3. Properties 4. Archive 5. Filter 6. Only My Documents

Opening a Document

To open or view the document, double click on the document or select Open from the menu bar.


RKT

11


Properties of a Document

To view or edit the properties of a document, select the document and select Properties from the menu bar.

The user can view or edit the properties description, Type, Subtype, Context, as well as the security of the document.


RKT

13


Archiving a Document

To Archive or delete a document, highlight the document and click Archive.

Before the document is archived, a warning message is rendered.


RKT

15


Filtering for a Document

A user can use Filtering to find a certain document.


RKT

17


Only My Documents

A user view only the documents they have added by checking the checkbox Only My Documents and clicking Refresh.


RKT

19

Documents Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Explain how to add external documents, filter, and archive


RKT

20






RKT

21


Documents

Documents Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain how to add external documents, filter, and archive


RKT

2

Topics 1. Adding Documents 2. Open Documents 3. Properties 4. Archive 5. Filter 6. Only My Documents

Documents

Documents is a repository for storing or sharing files and is a built-in screen on the Home tab.


RKT

4


To post files or URL, select Add from the Home Folder.


RKT

5


When adding unstructured data, the user can browse their hard drive or a networked drive by selecting Browse.


RKT

6


The user can further distinguish the document by using Type and Subtype.

An administrator defines the different Types and Sub-types.


RKT

7


Storing the document by Context.


RKT

8


Adding Security to the document


RKT

9


Opening a Document

To open or view the document, double click on the document or select Open from the menu bar.


RKT

11


Properties of a Document


The user can view or edit the properties description, Type, Subtype, Context, as well as the security of the document.


RKT

13


Archiving a Document


Before the document is archived, a warning message is rendered.


RKT

15


Filtering for a Document

A user can use Filtering to find a certain document.


RKT

17


Only My Documents

A user view only the documents they have added by checking the checkbox Only My Documents and clicking Refresh.


RKT

19

Documents Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Explain how to add external documents, filter, and archive


RKT

20






RKT

21


Audit Reports

Audit Reports Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Describe Audit Reports


RKT

2

Topics 1. Overview 2. Administration 3. Security 4. Data

Overview

The auditing capabilities have been broken into two groups Security and General.


RKT

4


Administration

To turn on Audit, an administrator needs to enable this feature.


RKT

6

Administration

To enable administrative auditing, select Edit


RKT

7

Administration

To enable Data Auditing by Model, highlight the model and choose Edit.


RKT

8


Security

Security Audit is broken into four groups: User, Teams, Task Profiles, and Data Access Profiles.


RKT

10

User

Security Audit for Users shows all users having access to the system.

To select a new audit report, instead of closing the folder, the user can choose New Report and select from Security, Data Changes, Comments, Work Status, or Administration activity. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

RKT

11

User

Double-clicking on the user gives the ability to view the Teams, Task Profiles, and Data Access Profiles associated with that user.


RKT

12

Teams

Security Audit for Teams shows all Teams that have been created.

Double-clicking on the team renders a new screen allowing visibility to all the users assigned to a particular team as well as the Task Profiles and Data Access Profiles.


RKT

13

Task Profiles

Security Audit for Task Profiles shows all Task Profiles that have been created as well as assigned task within that profile.

Double-clicking on the Task Profile renders a new screen allowing detailed visibility to all tasks, users and teams associated with this Task Profile.


RKT

14

Data Access Profiles

When Data Access Profiles is selected, a new folder is opened showing all Data Access Task Profiles that have been created, the model it is assigned to, the dimension as well as dimension member, and the type of access it is granting.


RKT

15


Data Audits

Audits can be performed on Data Changes, Comments, Work Status, and Administration Activity.


RKT

17

Data Changes (1 of 3)

Data Changes can be audited by entering the Model, Dimension Members, timeframe, as well as additional criteria.


RKT

18




RKT

19


The report shows all necessary data as well as being able to filter on a certain column.


RKT

20

Comments

Similar to data changes, a user can view comments by dimension intersections.


RKT

21

Comments

Comments Report is rendered after selecting Display.

A user can double-click on the Dimension Members to get a view of the exact intersection of data.


RKT

22

Work Status

The report on work status allows you to display the work status codes for a set of given criteria.


RKT

23

Administration Activity (1 of 3)

The administration activity audit records information on tasks performed in the system.


RKT

24


Administrators can search on specific Tasks, Task Areas (Environment or Model), Task Groups, and Task Types (All, Add, Change, or Delete). Valid Task Names: • Copy Environment • Delete Environment • Create Model • Copy Model • Modify Model • Delete Model • Create Dimension • Copy Dimension • Modify Dimension • Delete Dimension • Process Dimension


RKT

25


The administration activity audit reports on the selected criteria.


RKT

26

Audit Reports Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Describe Audit Reports


RKT

27






RKT

28


Audit Reports

Audit Reports Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Describe Audit Reports


RKT

2


Overview

The auditing capabilities have been broken into three groups: Processes, Security, and General.


RKT

4

Topics 1. Overview 2. Processes 3. Security 4. Data

Processes

There are three different Processes audit reports: Process Details, Process Overview, and Process Operations.


RKT

6

Processes Details (1 of 2)

Process details returns the actual steps and sub-steps for a Process Template (BPF).


RKT

7

Processes Details (2 of 2)

The Detail report shows the instance (intersection, of data), the steps needing to be performed, as well as the status (Action Required or not).


RKT

8

Processes Overview (1 of 2)

This report gives you audit information on the statuses of steps in all active and completed processes.


RKT

9

Processes Overview (2 of 2)

This report renders the BPF (Process Template), Model, the activation date, as well as the current status.


RKT

10

Processes Operations

This report renders the operations performed in steps for all active and completed processes.


RKT

11


Security

Security Audit is broken into five groups: User, Teams, Task Profiles, Data Access Profiles, and Processes


RKT

13

User

Security Audit for Users shows all users having access to the system.

To select a new audit report, instead of closing the folder, the user can choose New Report and select from Security, Data Changes, Comments, Work Status, or Administration activity. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

RKT

14

User

Double-clicking on the user gives the ability to view the Teams, Task Profiles, and Data Access Profiles associated with that user.


RKT

15

Teams

Security Audit for Teams shows all Teams that have been created.

Double-clicking on the team renders a new screen allowing visibility to all the users assigned to a particular team as well as the Task Profiles and Data Access Profiles.


RKT

16

Task Profiles

Security Audit for Task Profiles shows all Task Profiles that have been created as well as assigned task within that profile.

Double-clicking on the Task Profile renders a new screen allowing detailed visibility to all tasks, users and teams associated with this Task Profile.


RKT

17

Data Access Profiles

When Data Access Profiles is selected, a new folder is opened showing all Data Access Task Profiles that have been created, the model it is assigned to, the dimension as well as dimension member, and the type of access it is granting.


RKT

18

Processes

The report shows all security information for a business process flow.

Clicking on the above BPF, the user can now see the users and teams associated with the BPF.


RKT

19


Data Audits

Audits can be performed on Data Changes, Comments, Work Status, and Administration Activity.


RKT

21




RKT

22




RKT

23


The report shows all necessary data as well as being able to filter on a certain column.


RKT

24

Comments

Similar to data changes, a user can view comments by dimension intersections.


RKT

25

Comments

Comments Report is rendered after selecting Display.

A user can double-click on the Dimension Members to get a view of the exact intersection of data.


RKT

26

Work Status

The report on work status allows you to display the work status codes for a set of given criteria.


RKT

27


The administration activity audit records information on tasks performed in the system.


RKT

28


Administrators can search on specific Tasks, Task Areas (Environment or Model), Task Groups, and Task Types (All, Add, Change, or Delete). Valid Task Names: • Copy Environment • Delete Environment • Create Model • Copy Model • Modify Model • Delete Model • Create Dimension • Copy Dimension • Modify Dimension • Delete Dimension • Process Dimension


RKT

29


The administration activity audit reports on the selected criteria.


RKT

30

Audit Reports Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Describe Audit Reports


RKT

31






RKT

32


Book Publishing Changes

Book Publishing Changes Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Describe the new UI in Excel Create, edit, and validate book publishing templates Schedule and publish books immediately


RKT

2

Book Publishing Introduction

Book Publishing Allows one or more reports to be combined in a book for offline viewing. Books can be sent to a printer or saved in PDF format Books can be published to the web client’s Library A new online Books Viewer is also included in this release

Books can be created in real time or scheduled


RKT

3

Business Example

Senior management wishes to receive all key financial reports in PDF format at the end of each quarter. There are currently 12 key reports, each stored in separate templates. With Book Publishing all templates can be combined in a single PDF document in a single operation.


RKT

4

Book Publishing Prerequisites

Before performing book publishing, ensure that the following prerequisites have been met: The reports / templates you want to publish exist You understand how the reports are to be combined – Which sections to include – What templates include in which section – Dimension selection criteria for each section


RKT

5

Topics 1. Creating a Book Template 2. Editing a Book Template 3. Validating a Book Template 4. Publishing a Book

Book Publishing Creating a Book Template

How to create a template Choose Book Publications > New Template Configure the Book fields – Template Name – Overwrite Mode – Variable Time

Configure the Section fields – Section Name(s) – Included Templates and description – Fixed Members – Suppressed Members – Variable Members


RKT

7

Configure the Book Fields

The Book Fields are set once in each Book Template. Three fields are available: – Template Name – The name of the Book Template o Required – Add/Replace – Determines if content is added or replaced when a book is published multiple times o Possible Values: Add, Replace, By Section o Required

Variable Time – Time member can be hard coded by configuring this field – Optional


RKT

8

Configure the Section Fields

A book can have one or more sections Each section can contain one or more reports – Click the appropriate button to Add, Duplicate or Delete a section

Each section has an associated Dimension Member Selection section – This determines the members to be included for each report in this book section


RKT

9

Configure the Section Fields Section and Report Fields The following is configured in each section: – Section Name – The name of the section o Required – Add/Replace - Determines if the section is added or replaced when a book is published multiple times o Is only active if By Section is selected in the Add/Replace Book field – Report Workbook – Allows you to browse to reports stored locally or on the server o One report is required per section o Additional reports can be configured by clicking the plus icon – Workbook Description – Each report must have an associated description o Required


RKT

10

Configure the Section Fields Dimension Member Selection Each section also has a Dimension Member Selection section. This section includes: – Fixed Member – For dimensions and members you want to hard code. o Member’s not specified are taken from the current view o Optional – Suppressed Member – For dimensions and members you want to suppress when their value is zero. o Optional – Variable Members – Used to get data in for multiple members of one or more dimension o Required


RKT

11

Configure the Section Fields Dimension Member Selection – Selecting Dimensions Click Select Dimensions to configure Fixed, Suppressed and Variable members.


RKT

12

Configure the Section Fields Dimension Member Selection – Selecting Members Click ‘…’ to select dimension members. – You can select a single member per dimension for Fixed and Suppressed members – You can select multiple members per dimension for Variable Members


RKT

13


Book Publishing Editing a Book Template

How to edit a template Choose Book Publications > Open Template Update the Book fields – Template Name – Overwrite Mode – Variable Time

Update the Section fields – Section Name(s) – Included Templates and description – Fixed Members – Suppressed Members – Variable Members


RKT

15


Book Publishing Validating a Book Template

How to validate a template Choose Open > Open Server Root Folder… – Navigate to WebExcel\TemplateLibrary\Books – Open the book

Choose Book Publication > Validate


RKT

17


Book Publishing Publishing a Book

How to publish a book Choose Book Publications > Publish Books Select the Publication Type – Publish Now or Schedule

Select Publication Format – Printer or PDF

Select template(s) and section(s) to publish Review the Summary Click Process


RKT

19

Select the Publication Type

A book be published immediately or scheduled – If scheduled you will see an additional user interface allowing you to configure credentials and frequency.


RKT

20

Select the Publication Format

A book can be published to a printer or a PDF – PDF’s can be published individually, per variable members, or in a single PDF.


RKT

21

Select Template(s) and Selection(s) to Publish

Multiple templates and sections can be published at once – Select templates and sections by clicking the related check box.


RKT

22

Review Summary

A summary is displayed highlighting book publication details


RKT

23

Process

Click Process to begin the process


RKT

24

Book Publishing Changes Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Describe the new UI in Excel Create, edit, and validate book publishing templates Schedule and publish books immediately


RKT

25






RKT

26

SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0 Version for Microsoft

Book Publishing Changes

Book Publishing Changes Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Describe the new UI in Excel Create, edit, and validate book publishing templates Schedule and publish books immediately


RKT

2

Book Publishing Introduction

Book Publishing Allows one or more reports to be combined in a book for offline viewing. Books can be sent to a printer or saved in PDF format Books can be published to the web client’s Library A new online Books Viewer is also included in this release

Books can be created in real time or scheduled


RKT

3

Business Example

Senior management wishes to receive all key financial reports in PDF format at the end of each quarter. There are currently 12 key reports, each stored in separate templates. With Book Publishing all templates can be combined in a single PDF document in a single operation.


RKT

4

Book Publishing Prerequisites

Before performing book publishing, ensure that the following prerequisites have been met: The reports / templates you want to publish exist You understand how the reports are to be combined – Which sections to include – What templates include in which section – Dimension selection criteria for each section


RKT

5


Book Publishing Creating a Book Template

How to create a template Choose Book Publications > New Template Configure the Book fields – Template Name – Overwrite Mode – Variable Time

Configure the Section fields – Section Name(s) – Included Templates and description – Fixed Members – Suppressed Members – Variable Members


RKT

7

Configure the Book Fields

The Book Fields are set once in each Book Template. Three fields are available: – Template Name – The name of the Book Template o Required – Add/Replace – Determines if content is added or replaced when a book is published multiple times o Possible Values: Add, Replace, By Section o Required

Variable Time – Time member can be hard coded by configuring this field – Optional


RKT

8

Configure the Section Fields

A book can have one or more sections Each section can contain one or more reports – Click the appropriate button to Add, Duplicate or Delete a section

Each section has an associated Dimension Member Selection section – This determines the members to be included for each report in this book section


RKT

9

Configure the Section Fields Section and Report Fields The following is configured in each section: – Section Name – The name of the section o Required – Add/Replace - Determines if the section is added or replaced when a book is published multiple times o Is only active if By Section is selected in the Add/Replace Book field – Report Workbook – Allows you to browse to reports stored locally or on the server o One report is required per section o Additional reports can be configured by clicking the plus icon – Workbook Description – Each report must have an associated description o Required


RKT

10

Configure the Section Fields Dimension Member Selection Each section also has a Dimension Member Selection section. This section includes: – Fixed Member – For dimensions and members you want to hard code. o Member’s not specified are taken from the current view o Optional – Suppressed Member – For dimensions and members you want to suppress when their value is zero. o Optional – Variable Members – Used to get data in for multiple members of one or more dimension o Required


RKT

11

Configure the Section Fields Dimension Member Selection – Selecting Dimensions Click Select Dimensions to configure Fixed, Suppressed and Variable members.


RKT

12

Configure the Section Fields Dimension Member Selection – Selecting Members Click ‘…’ to select dimension members. – You can select a single member per dimension for Fixed and Suppressed members – You can select multiple members per dimension for Variable Members


RKT

13


Book Publishing Editing a Book Template

How to edit a template Choose Book Publications > Open Template Update the Book fields – Template Name – Overwrite Mode – Variable Time

Update the Section fields – Section Name(s) – Included Templates and description – Fixed Members – Suppressed Members – Variable Members


RKT

15


Book Publishing Validating a Book Template

How to validate a template Choose Open > Open Server Root Folder… – Navigate to WebExcel\TemplateLibrary\Books – Open the book

Choose Book Publication > Validate


RKT

17


Book Publishing Publishing a Book

How to publish a book Choose Book Publications > Publish Books Select the Publication Type – Publish Now or Schedule

Select Publication Format – Printer or PDF

Select template(s) and section(s) to publish Review the Summary Click Process


RKT

19

Select the Publication Type

A book be published immediately or scheduled – If scheduled you will see an additional user interface allowing you to configure credentials and frequency.


RKT

20

Select the Publication Format

A book can be published to a printer or a PDF – PDF’s can be published individually, per variable members, or in a single PDF.


RKT

21

Select Template(s) and Selection(s) to Publish

Multiple templates and sections can be published at once – Select templates and sections by clicking the related check box.


RKT

22

Review Summary

A summary is displayed highlighting book publication details


RKT

23

Process

Click Process to begin the process


RKT

24

Book Publishing Changes Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Describe the new UI in Excel Create, edit, and validate book publishing templates Schedule and publish books immediately


RKT

25






RKT

26


Books Viewer

Books Viewer Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain how to open Books from the Library and navigate using links and Context


RKT

2

Introduction

Book Viewer Books are viewed in the Library section of the Home tab Books published as a single PDF document are viewed using a PDF viewer such as Adobe. Books published as a multiple PDF book are viewed via the new Book Viewer functionality Each Section of a Book will be a separate item in the Library – The name and section displayed in the Library is defined in the book template

A Book is opened from the Library as an HTML page in a new browser window – This does not open a Business User Interface (BUI) Workspace in the Workspace Window

A very simplified Context Bar provides the filters needed to navigate inside the Book. A navigation pane with a simple flat list allows opening each report in a multiple report book.


RKT

3

Business Example

Senior management wishes to review all of their key financial reports in PDF format at the end of each quarter. There are currently 12 key reports, each published to the SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0, version for SAP NetWeaver library. With the Book Viewer they now have the ability to navigate inside a Book, choosing between multiple reports and filtering different dimension members using the context bar.


RKT

4

Book Viewer Prerequisites

Before using the Book Viewer feature, ensure that the following prerequisites have been met: The reports / templates you want to publish already exist. The reports you want to review have been published in a book format. You have the appropriate security to review the book. You have a PDF Viewer such as Adobe installed on your client machine.


RKT

5

Book Structure

The structure of a Book consists of the following components: Sections – Have a specific dimensionality (VaryKeys & fixed members) – There is always one Section at least, additional Sections are optional

Reports – A Section can have one or several reports – All reports use the dimensionality defined in the Section


RKT

6

Book Security

Book Viewing Security The book is secure and at least one of the vary keys is a secured dimension. The book is not secure if none of the vary key(s) are not a secured dimension. A book published as a single PDF on the Web is not secured. A book printed to a local printer is not secured. Anyone can access the report even non BPC users.


RKT

7

Navigation: Selecting Book

Selecting a Book Logon onto BPC 10 Web Navigate to the Library section of the Home tab Select the link Books Navigate to the Public Folder Choose the Book you want to view – There will be one item in the Library for each Section defined in the structure of a Book.


RKT

8

Navigation: Context Bar

Filtering using the Context Bar Choose the book to view – If there are multiple reports in the Book, a navigation pane with a simple flat list allows opening each report

A simplified version of the Context Bar is displayed that provides the filters needed to navigate inside the Book. – The Context Bar only displays the dimensions available to navigate in the Book – The navigation is via a simple set of filters, one for each dimension defined as the “VaryKeys” in the Book definition – Please note that all of the reports in one Section share the same VaryKey.


RKT

9

Navigation: Single Report Book Single Report Book The title of the Book is displayed in a Tab No report links will be displayed Select the dimension members from the Context Select the Display button to view the book – The report will be displayed based on the PDF reader setting.

After reviewing the report, change the dimension members for the existing report.


RKT

10

Navigation: Multiple Report Book Multiple Report Book Select the dimension members from the Context Select the report, from report links list – A list with all of the reports as defined in the book template will be displayed. – Select the report by clicking on the name o The report will be displayed based on the PDF reader setting – After reviewing the report, change the dimension members for the existing report or select a different report.


RKT

11

PDF Viewer: Display Options

The Book Viewer uses links, opening PDFs behaves just like in any web page containing links to PDF. Based on user preferences, the Books can be displayed either embedded in the browser or in a separate window. PDF viewer clients, such as Adobe Reader, provide users with an option to display the PDFs in a separate window, the PDF Viewer (not embedded). The default for Adobe Reader is to display PDFs embedded in the browser. A message will be displayed if the PDF is not displayed embedded.


RKT

12

Topic Summary: Book Viewer

This Book Viewer simplifies the navigation of published reports With the Book Viewer users have the ability to navigate inside a Book, choosing between multiple reports and filtering different dimension members.


RKT

13

Books Viewer Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Explain how to open Books from the Library and navigate using links and Context


RKT

14






RKT

15


Books Viewer

Books Viewer Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain how to open Books from the Library and navigate using links and Context


RKT

2

Introduction

Book Viewer Books are viewed in the Library section of the Home tab Books published as a single PDF document are viewed using a PDF viewer such as Adobe. Books published as a multiple PDF book are viewed via the new Book Viewer functionality Each Section of a Book will be a separate item in the Library – The name and section displayed in the Library is defined in the book template

A Book is opened from the Library as an HTML page in a new browser window – This does not open a Business User Interface (BUI) Workspace in the Workspace Window

A very simplified Context Bar provides the filters needed to navigate inside the Book. A navigation pane with a simple flat list allows opening each report in a multiple report book.


RKT

3

Business Example

Senior management wishes to review all of their key financial reports in PDF format at the end of each quarter. There are currently 12 key reports, each published to the SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0, version for Microsoft library. With the Book Viewer they now have the ability to navigate inside a Book, choosing between multiple reports and filtering different dimension members using the context bar.


RKT

4

Book Viewer Prerequisites

Before using the Book Viewer feature, ensure that the following prerequisites have been met: The reports / templates you want to publish already exist. The reports you want to review have been published in a book format. You have the appropriate security to review the book. You have a PDF Viewer such as Adobe installed on your client machine.


RKT

5

Book Structure

The structure of a Book consists of the following components: Sections – Have a specific dimensionality (VaryKeys & fixed members) – There is always one Section at least, additional Sections are optional

Reports – A Section can have one or several reports – All reports use the dimensionality defined in the Section


RKT

6

Book Security

Book Viewing Security The book is secure and at least one of the vary keys is a secured dimension. The book is not secure if none of the vary key(s) are not a secured dimension. A book published as a single PDF on the Web is not secured. A book printed to a local printer is not secured. Anyone can access the report even non BPC users.


RKT

7

Navigation: Selecting Book

Selecting a Book Logon onto BPC 10 Web Navigate to the Library section of the Home tab Select the link Books Navigate to the Public Folder Choose the Book you want to view – There will be one item in the Library for each Section defined in the structure of a Book.


RKT

8

Navigation: Context Bar

Filtering using the Context Bar Choose the book to view – If there are multiple reports in the Book, a navigation pane with a simple flat list allows opening each report

A simplified version of the Context Bar is displayed that provides the filters needed to navigate inside the Book. – The Context Bar only displays the dimensions available to navigate in the Book – The navigation is via a simple set of filters, one for each dimension defined as the “VaryKeys” in the Book definition – Please note that all of the reports in one Section share the same VaryKey.


RKT

9

Navigation: Single Report Book Single Report Book The title of the Book is displayed in a Tab No report links will be displayed Select the dimension members from the Context Select the Display button to view the book – The report will be displayed based on the PDF reader setting.

After reviewing the report, change the dimension members for the existing report.


RKT

10

Navigation: Multiple Report Book Multiple Report Book Select the dimension members from the Context Select the report, from report links list – A list with all of the reports as defined in the book template will be displayed. – Select the report by clicking on the name o The report will be displayed based on the PDF reader setting – After reviewing the report, change the dimension members for the existing report or select a different report.


RKT

11

PDF Viewer: Display Options

The Book Viewer uses links, opening PDFs behaves just like in any web page containing links to PDF. Based on user preferences, the Books can be displayed either embedded in the browser or in a separate window. PDF viewer clients, such as Adobe Reader, provide users with an option to display the PDFs in a separate window, the PDF Viewer (not embedded). The default for Adobe Reader is to display PDFs embedded in the browser. A message will be displayed if the PDF is not displayed embedded.


RKT

12

Topic Summary: Book Viewer

This Book Viewer simplifies the navigation of published reports With the Book Viewer users have the ability to navigate inside a Book, choosing between multiple reports and filtering different dimension members.


RKT

13

Books Viewer Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Explain how to open Books from the Library and navigate using links and Context


RKT

14






RKT

15


Data Manager UI in the EPM add-in for Excel

Data Manager UI in the EPM Add-in for Excel Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Describe the Data Manager UI in the EPM add-in for Excel


RKT

2

Business Example

In every Budgeting and Forecasting cycle, as well as Consolidation, there is a need to work with data (import, move, delete, and so on), and also a need of automating some processes (running currency conversion, and so on). This presentation will go over the new Data Manager UI (User Interface), which works exactly the same as in previous BPC versions, however the tab is different.


RKT

3

Data Manager UI

The ability to access the Data Manager User Interface is only possible with a Webservice connection, using the standard Planning and Consolidation connection type:

If you connect to a BPC environment using the ODBO provider (for MS or NW), the Data Manager ribbon will be grayed out:


RKT

4

Data Manager UI

The access to the new Data Manager UI is performed from a dedicated Data Manager tab, next to the EPM one (only used for report layout):

Using a “Webservice” connection type, the connection to the Data Manager is the same than the one used in the EPM tab. In that case, the Data Manager tab inherits the connection from the EPM one. Notice that you can also connect to a BPC model on whatever side. Using an ODBO connection type on the EPM tab, you’ll have to logon to a Webservice connection on the Data Manager tab, in order to work with data manager features. In that case, there is no inheritance from the EPM tab.


RKT

5

Data Manager UI

Two ribbons are available in the Data Manager tab: Connection: place where you define the Webservice connection to reach in order to work with Data Manager features. Data Manager Group: place where you can perform all BPC 7.5 data manager tasks: – Run package or package links – View package, package links ,and schedule status – Upload data – Download data – Data preview – Organize package or package links list – Create and manage Transformation files – Create and manage Conversion files – The More button will allow you to either Clear the prompt values or change the dedicated connection for Data Manager.


RKT

6

Data Manager UI

With the exception of the new Data Manager tab, there is no big change, in terms of Data Manager functionalities, compared to the BPC 7.5 version. However be aware of the following: Package links are still only available for BPC NW, and not for BPC MS. Opposite to the reporting part, when working with the Data Manager, you can only connect to one connection (back-end) at the same time. Of course, multiple connections could be setup in the Active Connection drop-down list, but before accessing any Data Manager tasks, you should choose which one will be used for Data Manager tasks. This example shows two connections on which to report, one for Consolidation model, and another one for Ownership model. Using the Data Manager will force the user to choose the correct one before working on any Data Manager features.


RKT

7

Data Manager UI in the EPM Add-in for Excel Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Describe the Data Manager UI in the EPM add-in for Excel


RKT

8






RKT

9


Data Manager Enhancements and Updates

Data Manager Enhancements and Updates Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Describe the Data Manager Enhancements and Updates


RKT

2

Topics 1. Technical Improvements 2. Security and Task Profiles 3. Data Manager Packages Loading Transaction Data from BW InfoProvider (Append Mode) Import Packages Methods

4. Data Manager Data Maintenance

Technical Improvements

REST (Representational State Transfer) Web Service enables communication between SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation Clients and SAP NetWeaver BW (Application Server). Also known as RESTful Web Service, it relies on a stateless, Client / Server, cacheable communications protocol and in virtually all cases, the HTTP communication protocol is used. All services will be exposed as RESTful Web services for internal communication between BPC 10 NW clients and server. RFC Calls are now replaced by RESTful Web Services to improve Data Manager Debugging during troubleshooting activities. One unified Class* is used to implement and enhance master data attribute/text/hierarchy loading and making it consistent.


RKT

4



Security and Task Profiles Task Profiles are located under the Security section of the Web administration page.

Specific Data Manager tasks are accessible on the Data Manager section, when editing a particular profile.


RKT

6

Security and Task Profile Descriptions Task Profile

Description

Run Admin Packages

Can view and run packages set to type "admin".

Edit Packages

The ability to edit, create, delete packages. Can change package type. Can add transformation and conversion files but cannot change them. Apply for maintenance of both admin and user package types.

Edit Transformation Files

The ability to edit, create, and delete transformation files.

Edit Conversion Files

The ability to edit, create, and delete conversion files.

Cancel any User Packages

Provides the ability to cancel other user packages. Only NW provides the ability to Cancel.

Edit Package Schedules for any users

This task provides the ability to view logs and change schedules for any package. Detailed logs may contain sensitive data, thus this type of task is required.

Run Packages

User will be able to run packages from the folders he has the right to read into (depending on team membership), and including private folder.

Edit Package Links

The ability to edit, create, and delete package links.

Upload Data

The ability to upload a data file.

Download Data

The ability to download a data file and perform "data preview“.


RKT

7



Loading Transaction Data from BW InfoProvider (Append mode) Running “Load Transaction Data from BW InfoProvider “ package in Append mode won’t overwrite or clear existing data in the target application ; the key figure of new and old data with the same data range will be cumulated automatically. New data without same data range will be directly appended into the application.

Source ACCOUNT FRINGEBENEFIT OTHEREXP

CATEGORY ACTUAL ACTUAL

DATASRC INPUT INPUT

ENTITY FINANCE FINANCE

INTERCO NON_INTERCO NON_INTERCO

RPTCURRENCY LC LC

TIME 2006.JAN 2006.JAN

SIGNEDDATA 1500 500

Target REQUEST ID

ACCOUNT

8161 8162 8162

FRINGEBENEFIT FRINGEBENEFIT OTHEREXP

CATEGO RY ACTUAL ACTUAL BUDGET

DATASRC

ENTITY

INTERCO

INPUT INPUT INPUT

FINANCE FINANCE FINANCE

NON_INTERCO NON_INTERCO NON_INTERCO

RPTCURRENC Y LC LC LC

TIME

SIGNEDDATA

2006.JAN 2006.JAN 2006.JAN

1600 160 1700

Expected results in Target ACCOUNT FRINGEBENEFIT OTHEREXP OTHEREXP

CATEGORY ACTUAL ACTUAL BUDGET


DATASRC INPUT INPUT INPUT

ENTITY FINANCE FINANCE FINANCE

INTERCO NON_INTERCO NON_INTERCO NON_INTERCO

RPTCURRENCY LC LC LC

TIME 2006.JAN 2006.JAN 2006.JAN

SIGNEDDATA 3260 500 1700

RKT

9

Import Packages Methods

When importing data from a source file, two (2) methods to consider : Merge data values : This imports all records from source file but does not overwrite existing records in the target database. Replace & Clear Data values : this feature will first clear existing values in destination database and import records from source file. In fact, Records in destination are cleared by the data range provided by dimension type E (Entity), T(Time), C(Category), D (DataSrc) from the source data. Expected behavior : - If application has the dimension of type DataSrc, only the target data, which is in the data range of the dimensions with type of DataSRC, Entity, Time, Category from the source, will be cleared. - If application has no the dimension of type DataSrc, only the target data, which is in the data range of the dimension with type of Entity, Time, Category from the source, will be cleared.


RKT

10



Data Manager Data Maintenance Data Manager Packages may dump during execution. Data stored and remaining in the temporary tables will impact system performance. Data Manager Maintenance Program (UJD_BACKEND_DATA_MAINTENANCE ) retrieves and displays all obsolete data entries and can be deleted to improve performance.


RKT

12

Data Manager Enhancements and Updates Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Describe the Data Manager Enhancements and Updates


RKT

13






RKT

14


Consolidation Monitor

Consolidation Monitor Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain the status information displayed in the monitor Describe running Rules Describe incremental consolidation


RKT

2

Feature or Task Introduction

Consolidation Monitor This feature provides an overview of the whole consolidation process in one single screen. The monitor tracks the following items: Status of the controls Work Status Execution status for currency conversion Execution status for consolidation This feature will be very useful for all the users that need to monitor the progress of the consolidation process (at a group or at a local level), as they have all the information they need on one single screen.


RKT

3

Consolidation Monitor Benefits

Benefits of this feature include: Overview of the controls, work status and execution status for currency conversion and consolidation on one single screen Overview of the progress in the consolidation process for: – Individual entities – Consolidation groups

Currency Conversion and Consolidation can be triggered from that same screen


RKT

4

Consolidation Monitor Prerequisites

The Consolidation Monitor has the following prerequisites: Usage of a Consolidation type Model Definition of the ownership structure for that period Definition of work status (for work status display) Definition of controls (for control display) Assignment of relevant task profiles


RKT

5

Consolidation Monitor Security

There are two security tasks related to the Consolidation Monitor: View Consolidation Monitor – provides access to the Consolidation Monitor Run Consolidation Tasks – provides permission to run the Currency Conversion and the Consolidation from the monitor


RKT

6

Consolidation Monitor Starting Page

The starting page can be divided into 3 sections – Context: Selection of Model, Category, Entity and Consolidation Group – Actions List of possible actions – Status: Details of the status for the selected context Context Actions

Status


RKT

7

Consolidation Monitor Actions

The following Actions are available (some actions may be grayed out if no entity or a node level is selected) – Work Status: Open the screen to update work status for the selection – Translate: Runs currency conversion – Consolidate: Runs consolidation – Display Running Processes: Opens a window that shows which processes are currently running – Reset: Resets execution status for Currency Translation and Consolidation – Refresh: Refreshes the current screen – Show Description: Shows description instead of ID – View Select between a hierarchical and flat view


RKT

8

Consolidation Monitor Work Status

This screen allows one to update the work status for the selected entity

This currently only works on base level entities; work status cannot be set on parent levels using the Consolidation Monitor


RKT

9

Consolidation Monitor Running Currency Conversion

The following steps need to be performed in order to execute Currency Conversion 1.

In Consolidation Central Consolidation Monitor, in the scope context area, select the Category, Time and Group dimension members for which you want to run the currency translation.

2.

Select the row for the Group or Entity you require and click Translate.

3.

In the Translate dialog box, verify the selected dimension members and choose whether to run a full or incremental translation.

4.

Click OK.


RKT

10

Consolidation Monitor Running Currency Conversion (Cont’d)

When executing Currency Conversion on a group level (node), the screen shown on the previous slide is displayed. This performs a conversion into group currencies. When Currency Conversion is executed on an Entity level, the following screen is displayed.

This performs a currency conversion into the selected reporting currency. It is also possible to select which Rate Entity to use for this conversion.


RKT

11

Consolidation Monitor Running Consolidation

The following steps need to be performed in order to execute Consolidation 1.

In Consolidation Central Consolidation Monitor, in the scope context area, select the Category, Time and Group dimension members for which you want to run the consolidation.

2.

Select the row for the Group or Entity you require and click Consolidate.

3.

In the Consolidation dialog box, verify the selected dimension members and choose whether to run a full or incremental consolidation.

4.

Click OK.


RKT

12

Consolidation Monitor Currency Conversion and Consolidation

Please note the following points: – Member in the Entity type dimension of the Rate application needs to be called GLOBAL (in upper case) for the conversion to group currencies to work properly – The respective programs for currency conversion and consolidation are called directly. No logic script is called, therefore no custom calculations can be executed.


RKT

13

Consolidation Monitor Incremental vs. Full

The Currency Conversion and Consolidation programs can be executed in incremental or full mode. The incremental mode will only execute the program for those entities that were changed since the last execution of the program (this is of course much faster than executing the program for all entities) The process works the following way: – Every time data is written-back to the system, a timestamp is written to a separate table to keep track of when the data of an entity has last been updated

– When a program runs in incremental mode, it will check which entity has been modified since it’s last execution and only perform the calculation for those entities, which significantly speeds up the process.


RKT

14

Consolidation Monitor Incremental vs. Full (Cont’d)

The incremental mode only works when data has been updated, it does not work in the following cases: Rates were changed Ownership information was changed Business Rules were changed The program needs to be run in full mode if one of the cases mentioned above has occurred


RKT

15

Consolidation Monitor Display Running Processes

This screen displays the currently running processes and shows the progress of each process (you can select whether you want to see all processes or only your own ones)

If a process has failed, opening this screen will allow this process to be reset (after a certain period), so that it can be executed again.


RKT

16

Consolidation Monitor Reset

Highlight a group or entity and click the Reset button, this will display a screen with the current selection

The Currency Conversion and Consolidation status are then set back to “To be executed”


RKT

17

Consolidation Monitor Status

This screen displays the controls, work status and execution status for Currency Translation and Consolidation

The status is set to Done once the programs were successfully executed. The Currency Translation and Consolidation status are set back to To Be Executed if data is entered (for the Entity were data has been entered)


RKT

18

Consolidation Monitor Status Roll-up

The status on the parent level (for controls, work status, currency translation and consolidation) is based on the lowest status of the children. There is no status that is stored on the node levels, they are computed when the monitor is displayed. In the example below, one entity has the status set to To Be Executed and the parent Corporate shows that same status, as it is the lowest status of all it’s children.


RKT

19

Consolidation Monitor Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Explain the status information displayed in the monitor Describe running Rules Describe incremental consolidation


RKT

20






RKT

21


Controls

Controls Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain the status information displayed Describe linked documents


RKT

2

Controls

A Control is the individual check of data accuracy and consistency. Controls are enabled or disabled at model level.


RKT

3

Business Example

Controls are an important component mainly in consolidation application to ensure proper data quality. End-users run controls to check their data quality and allow them to fix their data. The level of controls might be different by entities and time periods.


RKT

4

Controls Prerequisites

To use the Controls feature from the end-user point of view, the following needs to be defined: Controls need to be defined and assigned in the Administration module For Consolidation type application, ownership structure need to be maintained Work Status need to be defined in the Administration Module

Controls replace the validations that were used in the SBOP PC 7.5 release.


RKT

5

Controls Security

The following four tasks are related to Controls from an end-user point of view: Reset Control Dismissal Dismiss Blocking Controls View Control Run Controls


RKT

6

Process Overview

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Run Controls Review Controls Identify issues in data Correct Data Re-run Controls


RKT

7

Controls Set Context

The selection of the context will define which Category, Time and Groups/Entities are displayed in the Control Monitor. Depending on the type of application, the third selection box will: For Consolidation type application, display the Group type dimension (user selects a group and will get all the sub-groups and entities displayed, according to the definition in the Ownership Manager) For Planning type application, display the Entity type dimension (user selects an Entity and will get the selected Entity and all its descendants, according to the hierarchy of the Entity dimension)


RKT

8

Controls Controls Monitor

Controls Monitor indicates for each entity: Control Set: Control set that has been assigned for this category and period Status: Displays status of current control Level: Level of control applicable for that entity (linked to the CONTROL_LEVEL property) Number of Blocking: How many blocking controls have failed Number of Warnings: How many warning controls have failed


RKT

9

Controls Status and Type of Controls

The following statuses exist: To be executed: Control needs to be run (has not been executed yet or data have changed since last execution) Passed: Control passed successfully Failed: Control has failed, data needs to be corrected Dismissed: Control was forced to pass

There are two types of controls: Blocking: All blocking controls must pass (or be dismissed) in order to allow a change of the work status. These controls are mandatory. Warning: These controls are provided for information only, but they do not block the process.


RKT

10

Controls Levels

There are four level of controls that can be assigned to an entity. An entity uses all the controls that have been assigned to that level (and above). 1: Basic 2: Standard 3: Advanced 4: Comprehensive


RKT

11

Controls Controls Monitor

Depending on the type of application, the entities are organized according to the: Setup in the Ownership Manager for Consolidation applications Hierarchy of the Entity dimension for Planning applications

The View drop-down box in the top right corner allows you to select between a hierarchy and a flat view


RKT

12

Controls Execute Controls

To execute controls, highlight the entity or node and click the Run Controls button

Check the settings for the dimensions, they should be correct as they are taken over from the context


RKT

13

Controls Review Controls

After the execution, the status and the number of blockings and warnings are updated.

Status for node levels are calculated on the fly, the node level will always show the lowest status of all its children. Highlighting an entity in the top part of the screen displays a list of the failed controls in the bottom part of the screen (details for S000 in this example).


RKT

14

Controls Review Controls

To get a detailed view of all controls, select the Entity and click the Open Control Results button

This opens a new tab that contains the details


RKT

15

Controls Results Overview

Context Actions

Details Document links


RKT

16

Controls Results Actions

The drop-down box at the top allows to select which controls should be displayed based on their status.

Controls can be run by clicking the Run Controls button and refreshed with the Refresh button.


RKT

17

Controls Results Details

This view contains the detail about all the controls, a drill down can be done on a control by clicking the arrow on the left of the screen

The breakdown members indicate which member of the break-down dimension is displayed if break-down has been defined for that control The Equation and Result columns show the calculation that are performed and the result that is calculated The Threshold column indicates the threshold that was defined for that period The Type column indicates whether the control is Blocking or Warning The Status column indicates if the control has passed, failed or has been dismissed


RKT

18

Controls Linked Documents

If linked documents has been defined for a control, they can be accessed with the hyperlink at the bottom of the screen.

This will start the EPM add-in and open the selected report. Please note that only the Category, Entity, and Time dimensions are passed to the report, the rest of the dimension need to be set manually in the report itself.


RKT

19

Controls Dismissing Controls

There are cases were blocking controls need to be passed, although the data is failing. For example, when there are some last minute corrections and the figures need to be published, although all the controls are not passed. For this exceptional case, there is the possibility to force a control to pass by dismissing it. A blocking control that has failed can be forced to pass, by highlighting the control and clicking the Dismiss block button.

The control then receives the status Dismissed.


RKT

20

Controls Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Explain the status information displayed Describe linked documents


RKT

21






RKT

22


Ownership Manager

Ownership Manager Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Understand the new Ownership Manager interface Navigate the Ownership Manager functions and features Create and maintain Ownership hierarchies Execute Ownership calculations


RKT

2

The New Ownership Manager Interface Ownership Manager - Prerequisites

The ownership manager requires an Ownership model to be defined that is of the technical model type ownership. Model definition:

The Ownership model must include the following dimensions: Dimension type “A” – provides information on ownership type such as PGROUP, POWN, PCON, and PCTRL Dimension type “C” * *must be the same dimension as Dimension type “E” * used within the Legal Dimension type “T” * (Consolidation) application Dimension type “I” * Dimension type “G”* © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

RKT

3

The New Ownership Manager Interface Ownership Manager Security Tasks

Access to the ownership manager (formally known as the Dynamic Hierarchy Editor in earlier versions of BPC) is controlled via the following three security tasks:


RKT

4

The New Ownership Manager Interface Accessing the Ownership Manager

The ownership manager (formally known as the Dynamic Hierarchy Editor in earlier versions of BPC) is accessed via the web interface and is located on the Start Page within the Consolidation Central node.


RKT

5


Click the Ownership Manager access link to display the ownership definition in the right context screen.


RKT

6


The ownership definition screen includes an overview display of the ownership hierarchy, and for each node the Generated and/or Current consolidation method, the Consolidation Rate (formally PCON), and the Financial Interest Rate (formally POWN) rates to be employed for the selected node.


RKT

7


Although the Ownership Manager uses terms such as Consolidation Rate and Financial Interest Rate, the data is stored with the same data modeling as in previous versions. For example, Consolidation Rates are stored as PCON values and Financial Interest Rates are stored as POWN values in the database.


RKT

8


Access existing/create new versions of ownership hierarchy by changing the context selections for the Category, Time, and Group dimensions.

The system will remember the last dimension value. Use the restore dimension feature to return to the previously selected value.


RKT

9

The New Ownership Manager Interface Editing the Ownership Hierarchy

Change data views and adjust number of decimal places to be displayed:


RKT

10


View member IDs or ID and Descriptions by selecting the checkbox provided.

or


RKT

11


Edit and define the hierarchy by selecting EDIT.

Clicking the Edit button will open a new tab that will allow you to create/edit an ownership hierarchy.


RKT

12


Editing opens a new tab titled Edit Ownership (selected context for Category, Time, and Group).


RKT

13


Access existing, or create new, versions of ownership hierarchies by changing the context selections for the Category, Time, and Group dimensions.


RKT

14


Add/Remove individual Entity values from the Group hierarchy


RKT

15


Use Pin/Unpin features to drag and drop selections.


RKT

16


Context menu provides same functions as in tool bar.


RKT

17


Use up/down arrows to reposition a selection within a hierarchy.


RKT

18


Turn on/off viewing of member descriptions.


RKT

19

The New Ownership Manager Interface Editing the Ownership Hierarchy:

Click top group node to view summary of all entities entered.


RKT

20


Click individual entity nodes to view settings for that entity.


RKT

21


Double-click current cells to modify settings.


RKT

22


Click the Update Ownership Upwards checkbox. This feature allows the system to calculate the consolidation rates and the financial interest rate for parent nodes in the ownership hierarchy:


RKT

23


The Show Empty checkbox forces the system to display entities with zero consolidation rates and financial interests:


RKT

24


Ownership hierarchies can be saved.

Ownership hierarchies can be copied into a different context.


RKT

25


Click Calculate to run internal program that determines the generated values for Consolidation Rate and Financial Interests.


RKT

26


Save all changes before closing editing tab. If you forget to save, a popup box will appear to remind you.


RKT

27

Ownership Manager Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Understand the new Ownership Manager interface Navigate the Ownership Manager functions and features Create and maintain Ownership hierarchies Execute Ownership calculations


RKT

28






RKT

29


Ownership Manager

Ownership Manager Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Understand the new Ownership Manager interface Navigate the Ownership Manager functions and features Create and maintain Ownership hierarchies


RKT

2

The New Ownership Manager Interface Prerequisites

The ownership manager requires an Ownership model to be defined that is of the technical model type ownership. Model definition:

The Ownership model must include the following dimensions: Dimension type “A” – provides information on ownership type such as PGROUP, POWN, PCON, and PCTRL Dimension type “C” * *must be the same dimension as Dimension type “E” * used within the Legal Dimension type “T” * (Consolidation) application Dimension type “I” * Dimension type “G”* © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

RKT

3

The New Ownership Manager Interface Ownership Manager Security Tasks

Access to the ownership manager (formally known as the Dynamic Hierarchy Editor in earlier versions of BPC) is controlled via the following security tasks.


RKT

4


The ownership manager (formally known as the Dynamic Hierarchy Editor in earlier versions of BPC) is accessed via the web interface and is located on the Start Page within the Consolidation Central node.


RKT

5


Click the Ownership Manager access link to display the ownership definition in the right context screen.


RKT

6


The ownership definition screen includes an overview display of the ownership hierarchy, the current selected consolidation method, the current selected consolidation rate (formally PCON), and the current selected Financial Interest Rate (formally POWN) rates to be employed for the selected node.


RKT

7


Although the Ownership Manager uses terms such as Consolidation Rate and Financial Interest Rate, the data is stored with the same data modeling as in previous versions. For example, Consolidation Rates are stored as PCON values and Financial Interest Rates are stored as POWN values in the database.


RKT

8


Access existing/create new versions of ownership hierarchy by changing the context selections for the Category, Time, and Group dimensions.

The system remembers the last dimension value. You can use the restore dimension feature to return to previously selected value.


RKT

9


Change data views and adjust number of decimal places to be displayed.


RKT

10


View member IDs or ID and Descriptions by selecting the checkbox provided.

or


RKT

11


Edit and define the hierarchy by selecting Edit.

Clicking the Edit button opens a new tab that allows you to create/edit an ownership hierarchy.


RKT

12


Editing opens a new tab titled Edit Ownership (selected context for Category, Time, and Group).


RKT

13


Access existing, or create new, versions of ownership hierarchies by changing the context selections for the Category, Time, and Group dimensions.


RKT

14


Add/Remove individual Entity values from the Group hierarchy.


RKT

15


Use the Pin/Unpin features to drag and drop selections.


RKT

16


The context menu provides same functions as in tool bar.


RKT

17


Use up/down arrows to reposition a selection within a hierarchy.


RKT

18


Turn on/off viewing of member descriptions.


RKT

19


Click top group node to view summary of all entities entered.


RKT

20


Click individual entity nodes to view settings for that entity.


RKT

21


Double-click current cells to modify settings.


RKT

22


Check the Update Ownership Upwards box. This feature allows the system to calculate the consolidation rates and the financial interest rate for parent nodes in the ownership hierarchy.


RKT

23


The Show Empty checkbox forces the system to display entities with zero consolidation rates and financial interests.


RKT

24


Ownership hierarchies can be saved.

Ownership hierarchies can be copied into a different context.


RKT

25


Save all changes before closing editing tab. If you forget to save, a popup box will appear to remind you.


RKT

26

Ownership Manager Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Understand the new Ownership Manager interface Navigate the Ownership Manager functions and features Create and maintain Ownership hierarchies


RKT

27






RKT

28


Journals

Journals Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: View and create journal templates View and create journal entries Use advanced journal query to locate a journal Explain the automatic balancing features of journals Create and manage journal groups Explain journal statuses


RKT

2


The journal template is accessed via the web interface and is located in the Administration interface within the Features section.


RKT

3


Highlighting the journal template activates/deactivates available actions that can be taken.


RKT

4


A new journal template can be defined in this Administration section.


RKT

5


An existing journal template can be deleted in this Administration section, but only after all journal entries using that template have been deleted as well.


RKT

6


All existing journal entries can be deleted in this Administration section.


RKT

7


Journal parameters can be configured for all journal entries associated with the defined template.


RKT

8


Click the Journal Template name and a new tab opens, revealing the template configuration options.


RKT

9


Select journal header dimension by highlighting the desired dimension on the Members screen (left side) and using the arrow buttons to add/remove the dimension into the Detail Column for Header (right side).


RKT

10


The journal template can define how the journal entries will be displayed. By checking the Balance by Entity option, the journal entries will be subtotaled and checked for balances across each Entity (the Balance by Currency works in a similar fashion).


RKT

11


Additional header fields can be added into a journal header by selecting the Additional Headers option. Adding a new additional header object causes a popup to open that allows for the definition of the new header which can be text or date specific.


RKT

12


Define reopen rules for journals on the Reopen Rule tab. The reopen rule allows you to identify specific Account(s) (and Account properties), Flows, and Interco dimension values to determine source journal entries to be reopened (Source). The filtering property on the account Source dimension can be selected from the dropdown list provided. Once reopened, the journal entries can be reposted to a new (Destination) Account, Flow, and Interco dimension entry. Sign reversal of the value upon reopening is also available. The system validates all entries when attempting to save.


RKT

13

The New Journal Template and Features Journal Landing Page

The journal landing page keeps track of: How many journal entries have been made using the template If there were any additional journal header items entered The availability of reopen logic for the template

You may have only one template defined for a selected model.


RKT

14

The New Journal Template and Features Journal Landing Page

Journal entries can be entered via the web interface or via the EPM 10 add-in for Excel. When entering a journal via the web interface, navigate to Consolidation Central >Journals > New.

Journals Landing Page


RKT

15

The New Journal Template and Features Journal Entries

Journal entries can be previewed from the Journal Landing Page.

Preview


RKT

16

The New Journal Template and Features Journal Queries

Two methods are available to allow viewing a specific set of journals: The context bar: allows the selection either a base member or a node (all leaves will implicitly be used as a filter in that case) Advanced query: which provides the ability to set a detailed filter on any of the journal fields (such as posted date, status, and so on)


RKT

17

The New Journal Template and Features Advanced Query for Journal Entries

Advanced query: files can be +/- from the query definition, values can be included/excluded, and journal properties can be access via the advanced query tool. Advanced Query allows end-users to define criteria making it faster and easier to display specific journals All dimensions and journal options can be used as filters Filter on text fields “Beginning with…”, “Containing…”, “In List” as well as on Dates: “From… To…”


RKT

18


Journal statuses can be viewed on the journal landing page, as well as date of posting, who posted the document, and modified date/time.

Individual Journals can be opened in separate tabs for easy viewing.


RKT

19


Access to the Posting/UnPosting, Open/Re-Open, Lock/Unlock functions are all controlled by the current status of the journal. For example, a Saved journal:

For example, a Locked journal:


RKT

20

The New Journal Template and Features Journal Security

The ability to view, edit, post/unpost, reopen, lock/unlock are all controlled by specific tasks assignments in BPC security.


RKT

21

The New Journal Template and Features Journal Group Management

Journals created via multiple headers are automatically grouped together under a common Group ID.

Grouped journals can be ungrouped and separated into independent journals. Actions taken (such as Posting) on one group member will be taken on all group members.


RKT

22

The New Journal Template and Features Journal Creation

Journals can be created in multiple ways: Single journal entry Using multiple headers to generate a group of individual journal entries Using multiple values for various dimension selections in the journal body


RKT

23


Single journal entry has the Multiple Headers and Multiple Value check boxes unchecked.


RKT

24


Using multiple headers will generate a group of individual journal entries with common values but different header selections.

After checking the Multiple Headers checkbox, select the dimension that will contain the multiple selections. A member selection popup box will appear, select one or several dimension members…each member selection will create a separate, but grouped, journal entry upon saving the journal. In the example shown, this journal definition will create three grouped journal entries for 2010.JAN, 2010.FEB, and 2010.MAR. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

RKT

25


Using multiple values expands the journal entry screen based upon the dimension selected for multiple entry:

The result is an expanded journal entry section allowing separate entries for each of the selected dimension members.


RKT

26

The New Journal Template and Features Journal Creation – Creating Journal Entries

The journal tab consists of a context menu, option selections, and a three tab journal entry for data input.


RKT

27


The Journal Entry sub-tab allows the user to directly input journal postings, the system automatically provides a running summary of the accumulated values entered.


RKT

28


The Additional Properties sub-tab allows the user to enter and additional property fields defined in the template. See the entry for “Ldate” in the example below.


RKT

29


The Additional Properties date entry option is especially useful in the Banking industry.

Date selector popup >


RKT

30

The New Journal Template and Features Journal Creation – Status

Journals can have one of the following status assignments: • Saved - Journal has been saved but journal entries have not been committed to database • Deleted - Journal has been deleted, the system retains this information to prevent any subsequent reuse of journal ids • Posted - Journal entries have been committed to database • Unposted - Journal entries previously committed to database have been reversed with offsetting postings made in the database • Locked - Journal entries have been posted and the data is locked from any additional changes. Journals cannot be unposted or deleted with a Locked status. • Unlocked - A locked journal can be unlocked by an administrator with the Lock/Unlock security task assignment. Unlocking a journal sets its status to posted.


RKT

31

The New Journal Template and Features Journal BAdIs (Business Add Ins)

When journal entries are being Saved or Posted, an ABAP based BAdI can be triggered to create additional calculated records. This journal specific BAdI allows can perform calculations on the journal entries and can create new records which will be stored and displayed within the journal itself. The BAdI is delivered empty but can be customized by clients. A typical BAdI implementation will be able to leverage fields that the journal.lgf logic does not access (additional items, date fields, and so on)


RKT

32

The New Journal Template and Features Advanced Journal Balancing

Dimensions driving the balancing behavior are defined in the journal administration page


RKT

33


Journal balancing can be checked not only at journal level, but also for any entity/ currency member which is used in the journal body (as detail dimensions). Subtotals are calculated automatically and displayed for each Entity/Currency combination used.


RKT

34


Journal entries are checked dynamically, if an out of balance condition occurs the system will color code the problem area in red highlights.


RKT

35

Journals Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: View and create journal templates View and create journal entries Use advanced journal query to locate a journal Explain the automatic balancing features of journals Create and manage journal groups Explain journal statuses


RKT

36






RKT

37


Journals

Journals Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: View and create Journal Templates View and create Journal entries Use advanced journal query to locate a journal Understand the automatic balancing features of journals Create and manage journal groups


RKT

2

Creating the Journal Template

The journal template is accessed via the BPC Administration client interface and is located under the specified application.

You may have only one template defined for a selected model.


RKT

3


1. Select all journal header dimensions using the selection checkboxes.


RKT

4


2. Set header dimension order by changing the numbered sequence.

1 2 3 4 5 6


RKT

5


3. Set remaining dimensions order using left/right shift buttons.


RKT

6


4. Create any additional header items/sub-items.


RKT

7


5. Review all selections and compete by clicking Finish.


RKT

8


An existing journal template can be deleted in this Administration section, but only after all journals entries using that template have been deleted as well.


RKT

9

Journal Parameters

Journal parameters are configured in BPC Administration under the specific model.


RKT

10

Journal Validation Rules

Journal validation rules are configured in BPC Administration under the specific model.

Journal Validation rules provide the ability to configure valid journal entries prior to comitting the jounal record(s) to the database.Validation prevents incorrect records from being saved to the cube. When saving the journal input, validation logic for journals is supported as following: Validating all dimension members Checking the data intersection against any relevant validation rules © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

RKT

11

Journal Translation Rules

Journal translation rules are configured in BPC Administration under the specific model.

Before you can reopen journal transactions, you must define translation information for the dimensions used in the reopen tasks. The translation table defines the Source and Destination accounts. You typically do this for specific accounts, but you can create translations for other detail dimensions as well. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

RKT

12

Journal Entries

Journals entries can previewed from the Journal Landing Page. Click any journal entry and its preview is displayed at the bottom.

Preview


RKT

13

Journal Queries

Two methods available to allow viewing a specific set of journals: The context bar: allows the selection either a base member or a node (all leaves will implicitly be used as a filter in that case) Advanced query: which provides to ability to set a detailed filters on any of the journal fields (such as posted date, status, and so on)


RKT

14

Advanced Query for Journal Entries

Advanced query: files can be +/- from the query definition, values can be included/excluded, and journal properties can be access via the advanced query tool Advanced Query allows end-users to define criteria making it faster and easier to display specific journals All dimensions and journal options can be used as filters Filter on text fields Beginning with…, Containing…, In List as well as on Dates : From… To…


RKT

15

Journal Entries

Journal statuses can be viewed on the journal landing page, as well as date of posting, who posted the document, and modified date/time.

Individual Journals can be opened in separate tabs for easy viewing.


RKT

16

Journal Entries

Access to the Posting/UnPosting, Open/Re-Open, Lock/Unlock functions are all controlled by the current status of the journal. For example, a Saved journal:

For example, a Locked journal:


RKT

17

Journal Security

The ability to view, edit, post/unpost, reopen, lock/unlock is all controlled by specific tasks assignments in BPC security.


RKT

18

Journal Group Management

Journals created via multiple headers are automatically grouped together under a common group id.

Grouped journals can be ungrouped and separated into independent journals. Actions taken (such as Posting) on one group member will be taken on all group members.


RKT

19

Journal Creation

Journals can be created in multiple ways: Single journal entry Using multiple headers to generate a group of individual journal entries Using multiple values for various dimension selections in the journal body


RKT

20

Journal Creation

Single journal entry has the Multiple Headers and Multiple Value check boxes unchecked.


RKT

21

Journal Creation

Using multiple headers will generate a group of individual journal entries with common values but different header selections.

After checking the Multiple Headers checkbox, select the dimension that will contain the multiple selections. A member selection popup box will appear, select one or several dimension members…each member selection will create a separate, but grouped, journal entry upon saving the journal. In the example shown, this journal definition will create three grouped journal entries for 2010.JAN, 2010.FEB, and 2010.MAR. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

RKT

22

Journal Creation

Using multiple values expands the journal entry screen based upon the dimension selected for multiple entry.

The result is an expanded journal entry section allowing separate entries for each of the selected dimension members.

Using multiple values will generate a group of individual journal entries with potentially different values but the same header selection.


RKT

23

Journal Creation – Creating Journal Entries

The journal tab consists of a context menu, option selections, and a three tab journal entry for data input.


RKT

24


The Journal Entry sub-tab allows the user to directly input journal postings, the system automatically provides a running summary of the accumulated values entered.


RKT

25


The Additional Properties sub-tab allows the user to enter and additional property fields defined in the template. (See the entry for Comment in the example below.)


RKT

26

Journal Creation – Status

Journals can have one of the following status assignments: • Saved – journal has been saved but journal entries have not been committed to database • Deleted – journal has been deleted, the system retains this information to prevent any subsequent reuse of journal ids. • Posted – journal entries have been committed to database • Unposted – journal entries previously committed to database have been reversed with offsetting postings made in the database • Locked – journal entries have been posted and the data is locked from any additional changes. Journals cannot be unposted or deleted with a Locked status. • Unlocked – A locked journal can be unlocked by an administrator with the Lock/Unlock security task assignment. Unlocking a journal sets its status to posted.


RKT

27

Advanced Journal Balancing

Dimensions driving the balancing behavior are defined in the journal administration page.


RKT

28


Journal balancing can be checked not only at journal level, but also for any entity/ currency member which is used in the journal body (as detail dimensions). Subtotals are calculated automatically and displayed for each Entity/Currency combination used.


RKT

29


Journal entries are checked dynamically, if an out of balance condition occurs the system will color code the problem area in red highlights.


RKT

30

Journals Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: View and create Journal Templates View and create Journal entries Use advanced journal query to locate a journal Understand the automatic balancing features of journals Create and manage journal groups


RKT

31






RKT

32


BPC 7.5 Migration

BPC 7.5 Migration Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain how to migrate BPC 7.5 reports built with former EV functions Explain how to migrate BPC 7.5 EVDRE reports


RKT

2

Topics 1. Cell-based formulas 2. API, custom menus, evMNU and book templates 3. EVDRE reports

Cell-based Formulas In EPM Add-in, you can access the list of all supported cell-based formulas via the “Insert function” button, and choose the new “EPMFunctions” category:


RKT

4

Cell Based-formulas BPC 7.5 reports may only be built with EV functions. Here’s the list of all former BPC 7.5 functions that have been developed again in BPC 10, and are also backward compatible: evAPD evAPP evASD evAST evBET evBNV evCGP evCGT evCOM evCVW evDES evDIM evDNV evGET

EPMModelCubeDesc EPMModelCubeID EPMEnvDatabaseDesc EPMEnvDatabaseID EPMComparison EPMBook EPMCommentPartialContext EPMCommentFullContext EPMSaveComment EPMContextMember EPMMemberDesc EPMDimensionType EPMDocumentList EPMRetrieveData


evGTS evHNV evLCK evMBR evMNU evPRO evPRP evRNG evRTI evSND evSVR evTIM evUSR OsCLD

EPMScaleData EPMURL EPMWorkStatus EPMSelectMember EPMExecuteAPI EPMMemberProperty EPMDimensionProperty EPMCellRanges EPMRefreshTime EPMSaveData EPMServer EPMMemberOffset EPMUser EPMDocument RKT

5

Cell Based-formulas Due to the new EPM add-in client and the way expansions are now handled, there are several BPC 7.5 functions that are no longer supported:

EVEXP EVENE EVNXP EVSET EVLST EVPXR EVHOT (becomes “Quick links” functionality in the EPM add-in)


RKT

6

API, Custom Menus, evMNU and Books Templates API: EPM add-in contains a new public API with new functions. For this reason, BPC 7.5 macro names will not work anymore and will not be migrated automatically. Some manual adjustments will be required.

Custom menus: Custom menus functionality is no longer provided in BPC 10. Customers should move to BPF functionality or use the new Workspace concept from the Web interface.

evMNU: evMNU function is still supported, but will need to be updated manually with the new macro name from the new public API.

Books and distribution Book and distribution templates (definition) are automatically migrated and can be edited directly through Excel or through the new dedicated UI. Published books will need to be generated again.


RKT

7

EVDRE Reports Migration

The EVDRE migration tool exists for helping customers to migrate their BPC 7.5 EVDRE reports in EPM add-in reports. You can access the tool via the More button. Several migration options are available: Active Worksheet, Active Workbook, Planning an consolidation Server, and Local. Click OK.


RKT

8


Once the migration has been finalized, a pop-up window is displayed:

The generated report layout should reflect the same expansions in row and column axes, compared to the Memberset used in EVDRE expansion range. Additionally, a new formatting sheet has been automatically created, and filled-in with the formats defined in your initial EVDRE Format range. Finally, click the Refresh button to view the result.


RKT

9

EVDRE Reports Migration: Things to Know

Currently, both formatting and report layouts are migrated, as well as most of the EVDRE options. Sorting, ranking, suppressing, and inserting options are not yet migrated. In case of customized reports, some manual adjustments will be required. As for every migration process, the EVDRE migration tool doesn’t prevent the customer to check, modify, and validate the report after the migration. A migration log will be generated after each migration process. You can find it through the More button, and click Log. The EVDRE migration tool is documented in detail in the EPM add-in User Guide.


RKT

10

BPC 7.5 Migration Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Explain how to migrate BPC 7.5 reports built with former EV functions Explain how to migrate BPC 7.5 EVDRE reports


RKT

11






RKT

12


BPC 7.5 Migration

BPC 7.5 Migration Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain how to migrate BPC 7.5 reports built with former EV functions Explain how to migrate BPC 7.5 EVDRE reports


RKT

2

Topics 1. Cell-based formulas 2. API, custom menus, evMNU and book templates 3. EVDRE reports

Cell Based Formulas In EPM Add-in, you can access the list of all supported cell-based formulas via the “Insert function” button, and choose the new “EPMFunctions” category:


RKT

4

Cell Based Formulas BPC 7.5 reports may only be built with EV functions. Here’s the list of all former BPC 7.5 functions that have been developed again in BPC 10, and are also backward compatible: evAPD evAPP evASD evAST evBET evBNV evCGP evCGT evCOM evCVW evDES evDIM evDNV evGET

EPMModelCubeDesc EPMModelCubeID EPMEnvDatabaseDesc EPMEnvDatabaseID EPMComparison EPMBook EPMCommentPartialContext EPMCommentFullContext EPMSaveComment EPMContextMember EPMMemberDesc EPMDimensionType EPMDocumentList EPMRetrieveData


evGTS evHNV evLCK evMBR evMNU evPRO evPRP evRNG evRTI evSND evSVR evTIM evUSR OsCLD

EPMScaleData EPMURL EPMWorkStatus EPMSelectMember EPMExecuteAPI EPMMemberProperty EPMDimensionProperty EPMCellRanges EPMRefreshTime EPMSaveData EPMServer EPMMemberOffset EPMUser EPMDocument RKT

5

Cell Based Formulas Due to the new EPM add-in client and the way expansions are now handled, there are several BPC 7.5 functions that are no longer supported:

EVEXP EVENE EVNXP EVSET EVLST EVPXR EVHOT (becomes “Quick links” functionality in the EPM add-in)


RKT

6

API, Custom Menus, evMNU and Books Templates API: EPM add-in contains a new public API with new functions. For this reason, BPC 7.5 macro names will not work anymore and will not be migrated automatically. Some manual adjustments will be required.

Custom menus: Custom menus functionality is no longer provided in BPC 10. Customers should move to BPF functionality or use the new Workspace concept from the Web interface.

evMNU: evMNU function is still supported, but will need to be updated manually with the new macro name from the new public API.

Books and distribution Book and distribution templates (definition) are automatically migrated and can be edited directly through Excel or through the new dedicated UI. Published books will need to be generated again.


RKT

7


The EVDRE migration tool exists for helping customers to migrate their BPC 7.5 EVDRE reports in EPM add-in reports. You can access the tool via the More button. Several migration options are available: Active Worksheet, Active Workbook, Planning an consolidation Server, and Local. Click OK.


RKT

8


Once the migration has been finalized, a pop-up window is displayed:

The generated report layout should reflect the same expansions in row and column axes, compared to the Memberset used in EVDRE expansion range. Additionally, a new formatting sheet has been automatically created, and filled-in with the formats defined in your initial EVDRE Format range. Finally, click the Refresh button to view the result.


RKT

9

EVDRE Reports Migration: Things to Know

Currently, both formatting and report layouts are migrated, as well as most of the EVDRE options. Sorting, ranking, suppressing, and inserting options are not yet migrated. In case of customized reports, some manual adjustments will be required. As for every migration process, the EVDRE migration tool doesn’t prevent the customer to check, modify, and validate the report after the migration. A migration log will be generated after each migration process. You can find it through the More button, and click Log. The EVDRE migration tool is documented in detail in the EPM add-in User Guide.


RKT

10

BPC 7.5 Migration Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Explain how to migrate BPC 7.5 reports built with former EV functions Explain how to migrate BPC 7.5 EVDRE reports


RKT

11






RKT

12


Using Planning & Consolidation Features in the EPM add-in

Using Planning & Consolidation Features in the EPM Add-in Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain how to use Planning & Consolidation features in the EPM add-in


RKT

2

Using Planning & Consolidation Features in the EPM Add-in EPM connection types Building a report BPC new templates Data save and comments Work status and BPF Drill-throughs Publishing to BPC web

Journals Ownership hierarchies EPM connector BOE publishing Transition from BPC 7.5 to EPM add-in Quicklinks Collection, distribution, and offline mode

EPM Connection Types EPM applications can be reached via several connection types: SSAS – SQL Server Analysis Services BW – SAP Business Warehouse ODBO – OLD DB for OLAP XMLA – XML for Analysis WS – Web Services

SAP EPM add-in 10.0

SSAS, BW cubes

SAP Financial Consolidation 10.0 Designer cubes

SAP Profitability and Cost Management 10.0

ODBO

ODBO

SAP Strategy Management 10.0

ODBO

WS

ODBO

SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation, Version for NetWeaver 10.0

WS

SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation, Version for Microsoft 10.0

+ Support of non EPM SSAS and BW cubes (through ODBO technology)

SAP BOPC 10 for both Microsoft and NetWeaver versions could be queried from the EPM add-in using two different kinds of connections: Webservices ODBO provider (a particular ODBO provider for each NW and MS version).


RKT

4

EPM Connection Types There are 3 types of connections in EPM add-in: Local/ BOE: – These types are for ODBO connections, which can be built for FC SSAS cubes, FC BW cubes, SSAS standard cubes, BW standard cubes, PCM ODBO provider, SSM ODBO provider, BPC MS ODBO provider and BPC NW ODBO provider. – An ODBO connection doesn’t allow the input of data, and is only used for data retrieval. Data Manager features are also not reachable with an ODBO connection. However, the usage of custom members (to build some complex MDX calculated members) can only be performed with an ODBO connection.

Planning & Consolidation: – This type is for Webservice connections, on the top of BPC MS and BPC NW. – A webservice connection allows the input of data, and the use of the Data Manager ribbon, but doesn’t support the creation of custom members. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

RKT

5

Building a Report When speaking about report creation, the EPM add-in is very intuitive and powerful, even for non-experienced users.

As a first step, a detailed lesson on the following topics are available in the EPM Add-in Learning map:

Unit 2: Excel interface – Part 2 Unit 2: Building Reports – Part 2


RKT

6

BPC new Templates Fifteen new Excel workbook templates, created with the EPM add-in, have been provided in the new Shell environment: 10 of them are in the Reports/ templates folder and 5 of them are in the Input Schedules/templates folder, accessible from the Open button:


RKT

7

Data Save and Comments Planning and consolidation connection type offers the ability to send data and comments to the back-end.

A detailed lesson on this topic could be found in: Unit 9: Saving Data and Comments to BPC (MS) Unit 8: Saving Data and Comments to BPC (NW)


RKT

8

Work Status & BPF Planning and consolidation connection type offers the ability to change work status and retrieve them, as well as display BPF steps, which need to be performed.

A detailed lesson on this topic could be found in: Unit 9: Operation & Data Submission (MS) Unit 8: Operation & Data Submission (NW)


RKT

9

Drill-throughs The Drill-through feature remains unchanged compared to BPC 7.5 version. The biggest change is about how to access this feature in the new EPM addin. There are still two kinds of drill-throughs available for BPC MS (“drill-through to table” and “drill-through to url”). There is only “drill-through to url” available for BPC NW. Both types of drill-through are still defined in the administration console of BPC. From the EPM add-in, you can only run the pre-defined drill-throughs. When running those drill-throughs, the pre-defined parameters will be sent to the target, as well as the EPM context and the selected report cell context. Then, data will be retrieved in the target. For Drill-through to table (available for BPC MS only), the user can decide to open the table either in a new Excel sheet or in a web browser.


RKT

10

Publishing to BPC web You may have the ability to directly open the BPC Web part to access or post documents, depending on your assigned task profile.

A detailed lesson on this topic could be found in: Unit 9: Data Collection using Excel Workbooks (MS) Unit 8: Data Collection using Excel Workbooks (NW)


RKT

11

Journals The journal module can be accessed from the Journal button in the EPM addin interface. Basically, it will open the Journals section on the web portal:


RKT

12

Ownership Hierarchies The ownership hierarchy is available in a consolidation model. To use the ownership hierarchy, you simply need stacking together both “Groups” and “Entity” dimensions in row or column axis of a report, in any order, to apply the ownership hierarchy to these dimensions. A detailed lesson on this topic could be found in the EPM Add-in Learning Map: Unit 3: Consolidation


RKT

13

EPM Connector With the EPM Connector, you can easily create and embed some dashboards connected to a BPC data source.

A detailed lesson on this topic could be found in: Unit 9: Creating Crystal Dashboards with the EPM Connector (MS) Unit 8: Creating Crystal Dashboards with the EPM Connector (NW)


RKT

14

BOE Publishing The EPM add-in for Microsoft Office provides the ability to publish a workbook of reports to the BI launch pad, the web portal of SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise (BOE).

A detailed lesson on this topic could be found in the EPM add-in Learning Map: Unit 3: Sharing reports - Part 2


RKT

15

Transition From BPC 7.5 to EPM Add-in The EPM add-in has been built with a complete new API and new cell basedformulas. Therefore, several points should be taken into account in order to make previous BPC 7.5 reports and macros run into the new EPM add-in interface.

A detailed lesson on this topic could be found in: Unit 9: BPC 7.5 Migration (MS) Unit 8: BPC 7.5 Migration (NW)


RKT

16

Quicklinks Former BPC 7.5 EVHOT function is no longer supported. However, the EPM add-in offers the possibility to link some reports together with the new “Quicklinks” feature.

A detailed lesson on this topic could be found in the EPM Add-in Learning Map: Unit 2: Analyzing data – Part 2


RKT

17

Collection, Distribution, and Offline Mode The EPM add-in offers an enhanced user interface for creating books or distribution workbooks. At the end, this interface creates exactly the same book or distribution template as in BPC 7.5.

A detailed lesson on data collection is available in: Unit 9: Data collection using Excel Workbooks (MS) Unit 8: Data collection using Excel Workbooks (NW)

There is also a detailed topic on the “Offline” mode in the EPM add-in Learning map, which is equivalent to the Park&Go feature in BPC 7.5: Unit 3: Sharing Reports – Part 1


RKT

18

Using Planning & Consolidation Features in the EPM Add-in Lesson Summary You should now be able to: Explain how to use Planning & Consolidation features in the EPM add-in


RKT

19






RKT

20


Using Planning & Consolidation Features in the EPM Add-in

Using Planning & Consolidation Features in the EPM Add-in Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain how to use Planning & Consolidation features in the EPM add-in


RKT

2

Using Planning & Consolidation Features in the EPM Add-in

EPM connection types Building a report BPC new templates Data save and comments Work status and BPF Drill-throughs Publishing to BPC web

Journals Ownership hierarchies EPM connector BOE publishing Transition from BPC 7.5 to EPM add-in Quicklinks Collection, distribution and offline mode

EPM Connection Types

EPM applications can be reached via several connection types: SSAS – SQL Server Analysis Services BW – SAP Business Warehouse ODBO – OLD DB for OLAP XMLA – XML for Analysis WS – Web Services

SAP Financial Consolidation 10.0 Designer cubes

SSAS, BW cubes SAP Profitability and Cost Management 10.0

SAP EPM add-in 10.0

ODBO

ODBO

SAP Strategy Management 10.0

ODBO

WS

ODBO

SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation, Version for NetWeaver 10.0

WS SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation, Version for Microsoft 10.0

+ Support of non EPM SSAS and BW cubes (through ODBO technology) © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

RKT

4

EPM Connection Types

There are 3 types of connections in EPM add-in: Local/BOE: – These types are for ODBO connections, which can be built for FC SSAS cubes, FC BW cubes, SSAS standard cubes, BW standard cubes, PCM ODBO provider, SSM ODBO provider, BPC MS ODBO provider and BPC NW ODBO provider. – An ODBO connection does not allow the input of data, and is only used for data retrieve. Data Manager features are also not reachable with ODBO connection. But, the usage of custom members (to build some complex MDX calculated members) can be only performed with ODBO connection.

Planning & Consolidation: – This type is for Webservice connections, on the top of BPC MS and BPC NW. – A webservice connection allows the input of data, and the use of the Data Manager ribbon, but does not support the creation of custom members .


RKT

5

Building a Report When speaking about report creation, the EPM add-in is really intuitive and powerful, even for non-experienced users. As a first step, a detailed lesson on the following topics are available in the EPM Add-in Learning map: Unit 2: Excel interface – Part 2 Unit 2: Building Reports – Part 2


RKT

6

BPC New Templates 15 new Excel workbook templates, created with EPM add-in, have been provided in new Shell environment: 10 of them are in Reports/ templates folder and 5 of them are in Input Schedules/ templates folder, accessible from the Open button.


RKT

7

Data Save and Comments Planning and consolidation connection type offers the ability to send data and comments to the back-end. A detailed lesson on this topic could be found under: Unit 9: Saving Data and Comments to BPC (MS) Unit 8: Saving Data and Comments to BPC (NW)


RKT

8

Work Status & BPF Planning and consolidation connection type offers the ability to change work status and retrieve them, as well as displaying BPF steps, which need to be performed. A detailed lesson on this topic could be found under: Unit 9: Operation & Data Submission (MS) Unit 8: Operation & Data Submission (NW)


RKT

9

Drill-throughs Drill-through feature remains unchanged compared to BPC 7.5 version. The biggest change is about how to access this feature in the new EPM add-in. There are still two kinds of drill-throughs available for BPC MS (drill-through to table and drill-through to url). There is only drill-through to url available for BPC NW. Both types of drill-through are still defined in the administration console of BPC. From the EPM add-in, you can only run the pre-defined drill-throughs. When running those drill-throughs, the pre-defined parameters will be sent to the target, as well as the EPM context and the selected report cell context. Then, data will be retrieved in the target. For Drill-through to table (available for BPC MS only), the user can decide to open the table either in a new Excel sheet or in a web browser.


RKT

10

Publishing to BPC Web You may have the ability to directly open the BPC Web part to access or post documents, depending on assigned your task profile. A detailed lesson on this topic could be found under: Unit 9: Data Collection using Excel Workbooks (MS) Unit 8: Data Collection using Excel Workbooks (NW)


RKT

11

Journals The journal module can be accessed from the Journal button in the EPM add-in interface. Basically, it will open the Journals section on the web portal.


RKT

12

Ownership Hierarchies The ownership hierarchy is available in a consolidation model. To use the ownership hierarchy, you simply need stacking together both Groups and Entity dimensions in row or column axis of a report, in any order, to apply the ownership hierarchy to these dimensions. A detailed lesson on this topic could be found under EPM Add-in Learning Map: Unit 3: Consolidation


RKT

13

EPM Connector With the EPM Connector, you can easily create and embed some dashboards connected to a BPC data source. A detailed lesson on this topic could be found under: Unit 9: Creating Crystal Dashboards with the EPM Connector (MS) Unit 8: Creating Crystal Dashboards with the EPM Connector (NW)


RKT

14

BOE Publishing The EPM add-in for Microsoft Office provides the ability to publish a workbook of reports to the BI launch pad, the web portal of SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise (BOE). A detailed lesson on this topic could be found under EPM Add-in Learning Map: Unit 3: Sharing reports - Part 2


RKT

15

Transition From BPC 7.5 to EPM Add-in The EPM Add-in has been built with a complete new API and new cell-based formulas. Therefore, several points should be taken into account in order to make previous BPC 7.5 reports and macros run into the new EPM Add-in interface. A detailed lesson on this topic could be found under: Unit 9: BPC 7.5 Migration (MS) Unit 8: BPC 7.5 Migration (NW)


RKT

16

Quicklinks Former BPC 7.5 EVHOT function is not supported anymore. However, the EPM Add-in offers the possibility to link some reports together with the new Quicklinks feature. A detailed lesson on this topic could be found under EPM Add-in Learning Map: Unit 2: Analyzing data – Part 2


RKT

17

Collection, Distribution, and Offline Mode The EPM Add-in offers an enhanced user interface for creating books or distribution workbooks. At the end, this interface creates exactly the same book or distribution template than in BPC 7.5. A detailed lesson on data collection is available there: Unit 9: Data collection using Excel Workbooks (MS) Unit 8: Data collection using Excel Workbooks (NW)

There is also a detailed topic on the Offline mode on the EPM add-in Learning map, which is equivalent to Park&Go feature in BPC 7.5: Unit 3: Sharing Reports – Part 1


RKT

18

Using Planning & Consolidation Features in the EPM Add-in Lesson Summary You should now be able to: Explain how to use Planning & Consolidation features in the EPM add-in


RKT

19






RKT

20


Data Collection Using Excel Workbooks

Data Collection Using Excel Workbooks Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Upload a document Explain Email Collection Explain “variable time” in the book template (Email Distribution) Work with Cell-based formulas related to Documents views


RKT

2

Upload a Document

To upload a document you have the choice of two processes: A document can be uploaded to the Web Portal by Publishing a document via a portal distribution A document can be distributed via the Distribution Wizard on a specific folder (locally or on a network path). In that case, you should: – Create a template for your distribution – Use the Distribution Wizard to either send out the workbook immediately or schedule its distribution either thru email or posting it to a distribution folder.


RKT

3

Upload a Document on the Portal

Select the Open Planning and Consolidation Document View link – The Documents section on the web portal appears – Browse the workbook to be uploaded in the Add document window – Select the type and subtype where applicable – Click OK


RKT

4

Upload a Document via Distribution Wizard

Before launching a distribution, you must have defined a distribution template Then you can launch the Distribution Wizard from the Distribute link and select the appropriate distribution method


RKT

5


Select Switch to Offline Mode and save to folder Enter the path to the folder location (local or network path) Clicking the Next button creates the specific files on the specific folder


RKT

6

Email Collection

Before collecting data from an email mailbox, you should have performed a distribution on the same connection Then, launch the Collection Wizard: – Select the Outlook mailbox option – Select the Working Folder – Select emails with Workbooks


RKT

7

Variable Time in the Book Template

When creating or modifying a template using a Planning and Consolidation connection a variable time field is displayed. If you select a Time member in a section, it overrides the member selected in the Variable Time field for this section.


RKT

8

EPM Functions to Use for Documents

Once you have uploaded documents to the Web Portal you can call and work with these documents from a work book with any of the following EPM functions: EPMBook EPMDocument EPMDocumentList EPMUrl


RKT

9

Adding an EPM Function to a Workbook

You add the function from the EPM ribbon > Insert Function wizard

Select the function and click OK


RKT

10

EPMBook Function

After adding the function to the workbook, specify the required parameters


RKT

11

EPMDocument Function



RKT

12

EPMDocumentList Function



RKT

13

EPMUrl Function



RKT

14

Data Collection Using Excel Workbooks Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Upload a document Explain Email Collection Explain “variable time” in the book template (Email Distribution) Work with Cell-based formulas related to Documents views


RKT

15






RKT

16


Data Collection Using Excel Workbooks

Data Collection Using Excel Workbooks Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Upload a document Explain Email Collection Explain “variable time” in the book template (Email Distribution) Work with Cell-based formulas related to Documents views


RKT

2

Upload a Document

To upload a document you have the choice of two processes: A document can be uploaded to the Web Portal by Publishing a document via a portal distribution. A document can be distributed via the Distribution Wizard on a specific folder (locally or on a network path). In that case, you should: – Create a template for your distribution – Use the Distribution Wizard to either send out the workbook immediately or schedule its distribution either thru email or posting it to a distribution folder.


RKT

3

Upload a Document on the Portal

Select Open Planning and Consolidation Document View link – The Documents section on the web portal appears – Browse the workbook to be uploaded in the Add document window – Select the type and subtype where applicable – Click OK


RKT

4


Before launching a distribution, you must have defined a distribution template Then you can launch the Distribution Wizard from the Distribute link and select the appropriate distribution method


RKT

5


Select Switch to Offline Mode and save to folder Enter the path to the folder location (local or network path) Clicking the Next button will create the specific files on the specific folder.


RKT

6

Email Collection

Before collecting data from an email mailbox, you should have performed a distribution on the same connection Then, launch the Collection Wizard: – Select the Outlook mailbox option – Select the Working Folder – Select emails with Workbooks


RKT

7

Variable Time in the Book Template

When creating or modifying a template using a Planning and Consolidation connection a variable time field is displayed. If you select a Time member in a section, it overrides the member selected in the Variable Time field for this section.


RKT

8

EPM Functions to Use for Documents

Once you have uploaded documents to the Web Portal you can call and work with these documents from a work book with any of the following EPM functions: EPMBook EPMDocument EPMDocumentList EPMUrl


RKT

9

Adding an EPM Function to a Workbook

You add the function from the EPM ribbon > Insert Function wizard

Select the function and click OK


RKT

10

EPMBook Function



RKT

11

EPMDocument Function



RKT

12

EPMDocumentList Function



RKT

13

EPMUrl Function



RKT

14

Data Collection Using Excel Workbooks Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Upload a document Explain Email Collection Explain “variable time” in the book template (Email Distribution) Work with Cell-based formulas related to Documents views


RKT

15






RKT

16


Saving Data and Comments to BPC

Saving Data and Comments to BPC Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Input data Refresh/send data Input BPC data with EV functions Use the 3 planning functions (spread, trend, weight) Input and retrieve comments Input and retrieve comments with EV functions


RKT

2

Save Data and Comments to BPC 1. Input data Enable data input Data input and specific formatting Data input with functions

2. Input comments Enable comments input (BPC NW) Input and retrieve comments Comments input with functions

Enable Data Input Data input from the EPM add-in is only allowed on a BPC source system, and through a Webservice connection, called “Planning and Consolidation”.

By default, when opening the EPM add-in interface directly from the Web portal, every connection to BPC is using Webservice, in order to allow data input.


RKT

4

Enable Data Input (Cont.) By default, every new report is not flagged as being an input form. To enable data input, you should check the box called “Use as Input Form” in the report options or in the sheet options. Report options accessible from: Edit Report button New Report button


Sheet options accessible from:

RKT

5

Data Input Data input is performed by directly entering data in the cells of an input form, as long as each member defining the data region is a base level member. Once data input has been activated, the “Save Data” button is enabled in the “Data Input” ribbon. You then have the same kind of pop-up options to save data to the database as in BPC 7.5, but displayed differently: Save Worksheet Data Save Workbook Data Save and Refresh Worksheet Data Save and Refresh Workbook Data Change Work Status Validate Data (only on MS platform)


RKT

6

Data Input – Specific Formatting

Using the dynamic formatting sheet (available by enabling Apply Dynamic Formatting in the Sheet option), specific Member/Property Formatting can be defined to support data input. For example, you can highlight calculated/inputable members (based on the CALC property) or emphasize an updated cell.


RKT

7

Data Input With Planning Features

Once data input has been activated, the “Planning” button is enabled in the “Data Input” ribbon. The following Planning features can be used to help entering data in an input form: The Spread feature allows to allocate a specified value among selected destination cells – The value may be allocated either equally or weighted by an optional range of weighting factors

The Trend feature allows to increase/decrease a source value by a factor among selected destination cells The Weight feature allows to allocate a specified value by weighting factors among selected destination cells


RKT

8

Data Input Once your input form has been built, you can submit the records to the database by clicking the “Save Data” button:

A pop-up is displayed with the number of records to submit. Then, the confirmation screen appears, providing you the status of the sending process. If there are problems, an accurate error message will be displayed. You can choose to deactivate the confirmation screen. This action will uncheck the option called “Display warning when saving data or comment” in the User options. You can of course re-enable it afterwards.


RKT

9

Data Input With Functions Besides inputting data directly in the report layout itself, you can also use the following cell-based formula to send records from a static report. This new formula is the new name for BPC 7.5 EVSND function: EPMSaveData(cell;connection name;member1;member2;....; memberN) You can find this formula under the new category called EPMFunctions when clicking the Insert Function button. BPC 7.5 EVSND function is still recognized and supported. Nevertheless, the Excel wizard is displayed when building them is only available for the new EPM function names.


RKT

10

Enable Comments Input in BPC 10 NW By default, all BPC 10 NW models do not allow comments. Even if you have a dedicated task profile allowing comment management, you have to enable comments for the model through the BPC 10 NW web administration page: Click Models under Dimensions and Models node, and edit the model where comments input should be enabled. Check the Enable Comments checkbox and save.


RKT

11

Input and Retrieve Comments There are two ways of inputting and retrieving comments: Through the EPM Add-in UI Through EPM functions The Comment Management UI can be accessed from the Data Input ribbon. You can then choose to write your comments for the active context or for another custom context.

Using Active Context will write the comment on all ID’s of all dimensions belonging to the context.


RKT

12

Input and Retrieve Comments (Cont.) Using the “Custom Context” will allow one to choose where the comments should be saved, independently of the current context.

In this process, there is a choice to either include all dimensions (by choosing a particular ID for each), or to bypass one or several dimensions by selecting the ALL value. Note: this action will also allow the use of the new EPMCommentPartialContext cell-based formula, which works exactly the same as the previous EVCGP function.


RKT

13

Input and Retrieve Comments (Cont.) Sending the comment to the back-end will also display the summary window:

Remember, this summary screen could be deactivated from the User options Others tab Display Warning when Saving Data or Comments © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

RKT

14

Input and Retrieve Comments (Cont.) Select the “Find comments” link to retrieve comments associated to the current context or another custom one:

Clicking the “Find” button will open a BPC web client page showing the results.


RKT

15

Cell-Based Formulas Used for Comments In terms of inputting and retrieving comments, the following cell-based formulas can be used: EPMSaveComment – Equals the BPC 7.5 EVCOM function, which is still supported. – This function enables you to enter or modify a comment for a full set of members.

EPMCommentFullContext – Equals the BPC 7.5 EVCGT function, which is still supported. – This function retrieves all comments associated to a set of dimension members that is fully defined.

EPMCommentPartialContext – Equals the BPC 7.5 EVCGP function, which is still supported. – This function retrieves all comments associated to a set of dimension members that is partially defined. Any members not specified in the function are ALL taken into account.


RKT

16

Cell-Based Formulas Used for Comments (Cont.) Using cell-based formulas to input or retrieve comments, there is an option to display BPC comments as Excel cell comments: Currently, this option is only available for EPM functions linked to comments, but not for comments entered from the UI.


RKT

17

Saving Data and Comments to BPC Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Input data Refresh/send data Input BPC data with EV functions Use the 3 planning functions (spread, trend, weight) Input and retrieve comments Input and retrieve comments with EV functions


RKT

18






RKT

19


Saving Data and Comments to BPC

Saving Data and Comments to BPC Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Input data Refresh/send data Input BPC data with EV functions Use the 3 planning functions (spread, trend, weight) Input and retrieve comments Input and retrieve comments with EV functions


RKT

2

Save Data and Comments to BPC 1. Input data Enable data input Data input and specific formatting Data input with functions

2. Input comments Enable comments input (BPC NW) Input and retrieve comments Comments input with functions

Enable Data Input Data input from the EPM add-in is only allowed on a BPC source system, and through a Webservice connection, called “Planning and Consolidation”.

By default, when opening the EPM add-in interface directly from the Web portal, every connection to BPC is using Webservice, in order to allow data input.


RKT

4

Enable Data Input (Cont.) By default, every new report is not flagged as being an input form. To enable data input, you should check the box called “Use as Input Form” in the report options or in the sheet options. Report options accessible from: Edit Report button New Report button


Sheet options accessible from:

RKT

5

Data Input Data input is performed by directly entering data in the cells of an input form, as long as each member defining the data region is a base level member. Once data input has been activated, the “Save Data” button is enabled in the “Data Input” ribbon. You then have the same kind of pop-up options to save data to the database as in BPC 7.5, but displayed differently: Save Worksheet Data Save Workbook Data Save and Refresh Worksheet Data Save and Refresh Workbook Data Change Work Status Validate Data (only on MS platform)


RKT

6

Data Input – Specific Formatting

Using the dynamic formatting sheet (available by enabling Apply Dynamic Formatting in the Sheet option), specific Member/Property Formatting can be defined to support data input. For example, you can highlight calculated/inputable members (based on the CALC property) or emphasize an updated cell.


RKT

7

Data Input With Planning Features

Once data input has been activated, the “Planning” button is enabled in the “Data Input” ribbon. The following Planning features can be used to help entering data in an input form: The Spread feature allows to allocate a specified value among selected destination cells – The value may be allocated either equally or weighted by an optional range of weighting factors

The Trend feature allows to increase/decrease a source value by a factor among selected destination cells The Weight feature allows to allocate a specified value by weighting factors among selected destination cells


RKT

8

Data Input Once your input form has been built, you can submit the records to the database by clicking the “Save Data” button:

A pop-up is displayed with the number of records to submit. Then, the confirmation screen appears, providing you the status of the sending process. If there are problems, an accurate error message will be displayed. You can choose to deactivate the confirmation screen. This action will uncheck the option called “Display warning when saving data or comment” in the “User options”. You can of course re-enable it afterwards.


RKT

9

Data Input With Functions Besides the way of inputting data directly in the report layout itself, you can also use the following cell-based formula to send records from a static report. This new formula is the new name for BPC 7.5 EVSND function: EPMSaveData(cell;connection name;member1;member2;....; memberN) You can find this formula under the new category called EPMFunctions when clicking the Insert Function button. BPC 7.5 EVSND function is still recognized and supported. Nevertheless, the Excel wizard displayed when building them is only available for the new EPM function names.


RKT

10

Enable Comments Input in BPC 10 NW By default, all BPC 10 NW models do not allow comments. Even if you have a dedicated task profile allowing comment management, you have to enable comments for the model through the BPC 10 NW web administration page: Click Models under Dimensions and Models node, and edit the model where comments input should be enabled. Check the Enable Comments checkbox and save.


RKT

11

Input and Retrieve Comments There are two ways of inputting and retrieving comments: Through the EPM Add-in UI Through EPM functions The Comment Management UI can be accessed from the Data Input ribbon. You can then choose to write your comments for the active context or for another custom context.

Using Active Context will write the comment on all ID’s of all dimensions belonging to the context.


RKT

12

Input and Retrieve Comments (Cont.) Using the “Custom Context” will allow to choose where the comments should be saved, independently of the current context.

In this process, there is a choice to either include all dimensions (by choosing a particular ID for each), or to bypass one or several dimensions by selecting the ALL value. Note: this action will also allow the use of the new EPMCommentPartialContext cell-based formula, which works exactly the same as the previous EVCGP function.


RKT

13

Input and Retrieve Comments (Cont.) Sending the comment to the back-end will also display the summary window:

Remember, this summary screen could be deactivated from the User options Others tab Display Warning when Saving Data or Comments © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

RKT

14

Input and Retrieve Comments (Cont.) Select the “Find comments” link to retrieve comments associated to the current context or another custom one:

Clicking the “Find” button will open a BPC web client page showing the results.


RKT

15

Cell-based Formulas Used for Comments In terms of inputting and retrieving comments, the following cell-based formulas can be used: EPMSaveComment – Equals the BPC 7.5 EVCOM function, which is still supported. – This function enables you to enter or modify a comment for a full set of members.

EPMCommentFullContext – Equals the BPC 7.5 EVCGT function, which is still supported. – This function retrieve all comments associated to a set of dimension members that is fully defined.

EPMCommentPartialContext – Equals the BPC 7.5 EVCGP function, which is still supported. – This function retrieves all comments associated to a set of dimension members that is partially defined. Any members not specified in the function are ALL taken into account.


RKT

16

Cell-based Formulas Used for Comments (Cont.) Using cell-based formulas to input or retrieve comments, there is an option to display BPC comments as Excel cell comments: Currently, this option is only available for EPM functions linked to comments, but not for comments entered from the UI.


RKT

17

Saving Data and Comments to BPC Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Input data Refresh/send data Input BPC data with EV functions Use the 3 planning functions (spread, trend, weight) Input and retrieve comments Input and retrieve comments with EV functions


RKT

18






RKT

19


Operation & Data Submission

Operation & Data Submission Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Display Business Process Flows information Display lock and Work Status information Describe the EPMWorkStatus cell-based formula Describe validation of the submitted data (only for BPC MS)


RKT

2

Topics 1. Business Process Flow information in EPM Add-in 2. Work Status Display/Change Work Status information Display Work Status information with EPM function

3. Data Validation (Only on the MS platform)

Display Business Process Flow Information When fulfilling a Business Process Flow Activity taking place in EPM Add-in, a new tab called Activity appears in the Task Pane. The Activity tab is split in three different parts: The upper part provides contextual information related to the specific Business Process Flow The middle part provides the action name and description as well as the related/linked Actions to the Target Action The bottom part allows you to browse back to the Activity Workspace on the Web client


RKT

4

Display/Change Work Status Information To display or change the Work Status information of a data region, you should use the Change Work Status item of the Save Data button. This will trigger the below Work Status Wizard to pop up.

Data region is displayed in the upper part of the wizard. Descendants can be included in the Works Status change The lower part displays the current Work Status of the selected data region and allows it to be changed to another Work Status according to security


RKT

5

Display Work Status Information With EPM Function Besides displaying the Work Status with the Work Status Change wizard, you can also use the following cell-based formula to display Work Status information in a report. The following function is the equivalent of the BPC 7.5 EVLCK function: EPMWorkStatus(connection name;parameter;member1;…;memberN) The above parameter allows you to display either the Status, the username of the user that changed it or the date when the last change occurred. You can find this function under the new category called EPMFunctions when clicking the Insert Function button. BPC 7.5 EVLCK function can still be used and is still supported.


RKT

6

Data Validation (Only on the MS Platform)

After having entered and saved data, you can trigger data validation from the Save Data button. Data validation will check that no lock is preventing you to change the Work Status information. It will also check that the Validation account set in the Administration equals zero. If this is the case, a confirmation message is displayed. If not, you can choose to open a pre-defined Validation Report (addressed by the LOCKREPORT parameter in the Administration) that will display the incorrect data. After fixing this incorrect data, you can trigger Data Validation again.


RKT

7

Operation & Data Submission Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Display Business Process Flows information Display lock and Work Status information Describe the EPMWorkStatus cell-based formula Describe validation of the submitted data (only for BPC MS)


RKT

8






RKT

9


Operation & Data Submission

Operation & Data Submission Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Display Business Process Flows information Display lock and Work Status information Describe the EPMWorkStatus cell-based formula Describe validation of the submitted data (only for BPC MS)


RKT

2

Topics 1. Business Process Flow information in EPM Add-in 2. Work Status Display/Change Work Status information Display Work Status information with EPM function

3. Data Validation (Only on the MS platform)

Display Business Process Flow Information When fulfilling a Business Process Flow Activity taking place in EPM Add-in, a new tab called Activity appears in the Task Pane. The Activity tab is split in three different parts: The upper part provides contextual information related to the specific Business Process Flow The middle part provides the action name and description as well as the related/linked Actions to the Target Action The bottom part allows you to browse back to the Activity Workspace on the Web client


RKT

4

Display/Change Work Status Information To display or change the Work Status information of a data region, you should use the Change Work Status item of the Save Data button. This will trigger the below Work Status Wizard to pop up.

Data region is displayed in the upper part of the wizard. Descendants can be included in the Works Status change The lower part displays the current Work Status of the selected data region and allows it to be changed to another Work Status according to security


RKT

5

Display Work Status Information With EPM Function Besides displaying the Work Status with the Work Status Change wizard, you can also use the following cell-based formula to display Work Status information in a report. The following function is the equivalent of the BPC 7.5 EVLCK function: EPMWorkStatus(connection name;parameter;member1;…;memberN) The above parameter allows you to display either the Status, the username of the user that changed it or the date when the last change occurred. You can find this function under the new category called EPMFunctions when clicking the Insert Function button. BPC 7.5 EVLCK function can still be used and is still supported.


RKT

6

Data Validation (Only on the MS Platform)

After having entered and saved data, you can trigger data validation from the Save Data button. Data validation will check that no lock is preventing you to change the Work Status information. It will also check that the Validation account set in the Administration equals zero. If this is the case, a confirmation message is displayed. If not, you can choose to open a pre-defined Validation Report (addressed by the LOCKREPORT parameter in the Administration) that will display the incorrect data. After fixing this incorrect data, you can trigger Data Validation again.


RKT

7

Operation & Data Submission Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Display Business Process Flows information Display lock and Work Status information Describe the EPMWorkStatus cell-based formula Describe validation of the submitted data (only for BPC MS)


RKT

8






RKT

9


Architecture

Architecture Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain the architecture of SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0, version for SAP NetWeaver


RKT

2

Topics 1. Architecture of SAP BOPC 10 Architecture Key Points BOPC 10 NW Server Architecture BOPC 10 NW Client Architecture Cross Application Integration Technology Decision Reused Component List Software Components Authentication Mode

Architecture BOPC NW – Key Points Benefits

Better integration with BW/NW – Transport o More granular TLOGO o BW Transport framework/UI – Configuration – IMG – ETL – DataSource/InfoPackage – ODBO/XMLA – Measure Formula – BEx Query + BW Hierarchy Aggregation

Integration with SBC/EPM Applications – CLM – E&N – BUI – FIM

Performance Improvement – Parallelization - Parallel Processing Tool – Query Engine


RKT

4

SAP BOPC NW in the Context of POA


RKT

5

SAB BOPC 10 NW Server Architecture


RKT

6

SAB BOPC 10 NW Client Architecture

Note: Flex is an open source framework for developing web applications that make it easier for people to view and interpret data. Flash Player (Adobe® Flash® Player) is a cross-platform browser-based application runtime that provides viewing of applications, content, and videos across screens and browsers. © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

RKT

7

Cross Application Integration Benefits

Better integration with following products – ERP – FC – FIM – IC – PCM – SSM – GRC – SAP Solution Manager – BEx Query Analyzer – SBC CLM


RKT

8

Technology Decision

Architecture Area

Technologies to be Used

Clients

MS Office Excel, Internet Browser

Presentation Layer / User Interface Business Logic Layer

Flex, BUI, Polestar, WinForms (.NET 3.5)

Analytics Engine

SAP BW

Integration Middleware

REST, SOAP

Data Persistency

ABAP database,

Development Environment

ABAP Workbench, Flex Builder, Visual Studio 2008


ABAP

RKT

9

Reused Components


RKT

10

Software Components


RKT

11

Authentication Mode

Basic Authentication (credentials) Form based authentication Windows authentication X.509 client certificates Cookie based authentication Custom HTTP header based authentication


RKT

12

Architecture Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Explain the architecture of SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0, version for SAP NetWeaver


RKT

13






RKT

14


Architecture

Architecture Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain the architecture of SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0, version for Microsoft


RKT

2

Topics 1. Architecture Supported Platforms Redesign architecture – Application Servers Global Cache Implementation

2. Performances & Processes Process Dimensions Work Status Settings Send/Retrieve data Data Manager (Batch Import)

Architecture

Platforms supported by SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0, version for Microsoft


RKT

4

Platforms

Servers – Windows 2008 & R2 series (64 bits only supported) o Standard, Enterprise, Data Center o IIS 7.0/7.5 o .NET 3.5 Framework – SQL Server 2008 including R2 – Enterprise Edition only – Support Globalization/Multiple Language OS Support

Client – Windows XP (32 bits) – Windows Vista/Windows 7 (32 & 64 bits) – Microsoft Office 2007 (32 bits) – Microsoft Office 2010 (32 bits and 64 bits – TBD) – Microsoft Office 2003 (Planned) – IE7/IE8

No longer support for SQl Server 2005 No longer needed for Reporting Service Server © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

RKT

5

Redesign Architecture SAP BOPC 7.X, Microsoft Version - Architecture

.NET 3.5/2.0 and VB components 32 bits processes Multiple processes running into application server Use COM+ services impersonation Configurable with COM+ objects (pool size, impersonation)


RKT

6

Redesign Architecture SAP BOPC 10.0, Microsoft Version - Architecture .NET 3.5 components only Pure 64 bits processes Single Process /No COM+ services .NET impersonation Configurable with web.config (Max Concurrent Sessions)


RKT

7

Global Cache Comparison Meta data retrieval SAP BOPC 7.x and SAP BOPC 10.0


RKT

8

Global Cache Main Points Global cache configuration XML File for configuration BOPC support manual configuration for this file – Path %PC_MS%\Websrvr\CacheManagement\Cache.config


RKT

9

Global Cache Cache Usage & Apply Cache all meta data and master data

Global Cache applied for Major Components Sending/Retrieving Data Data Manager Logic Log on

Plan to improve gradually (Post EPM 10.0) Caching extra data (Team, FileMap, SQL connection string and others...) Applying Global Cache to the remaining common components Others


RKT

10

Topics 1. Architecture Supported Platforms Redesign architecture – Application Servers Global Cache Implementation

2. Performances & Processes Process Dimensions Work Status Settings Send/Retrieve data Data Manager (Batch Import)

Performances & Process Process Dimension

Issues in SAP BOPC 7.x – Do not support large dimensions (bigger than 1 million members) – Performance not enough to support enterprise customers

Resolution – Convert to 64 bits process – Apply SQL Server 2008 new function (Merge) to the performance bottle neck step o Reduce number of “Update” queries – Apply parallel cube process

Preliminary test comparison between process dimension from BOPC 7.x and BOPC 10.0 – Tested 1 million member dimensions with 3 hierarchies – Process completed in 20 minutes in 10.0 – Process completed in 1 hour and 48 minutes in 7.x


RKT

12

Performances & Process Work Status Settings

Issues in SAP BOPC 7.x – Takes over 40 minutes to setup the work status with ‘Include children’ option – Takes long time to check the work status in sending or bulk import data

Resolution – Re-design work status tables & minimize the number of work status records


RKT

13


SAP BOPC 7.x design – Work status table has all combinations of owner dimension member itself & children members

Example – Owner dimension

– Work Status table


RKT

14


SAP BOPC 10.0 design – Work status table only has one record with ‘Include children’ flag example – Owner dimension

– Work Status table

– In case of changing status code as ‘3’ the “NA” member without ‘Include children’ option


RKT

15


Performance SAP BOPC 10.0 Work status – Case: Owner dimension has 64K members, and set work status to top member of owner dimension (with ‘include children’ option) Owner dimension

Performance benefits will be bigger – If the complexity of work ,status will be bigger – More dimension members into owner dimension – Set work status to a higher member level


RKT

16


Performance in EPM 10 (Checking work status in sending data) – Simulate 25 million records into Work Status table


RKT

17

Performances & Process Send Retrieve Data

Issues in SAP BOPC 7.x – In BPC reports (EVDRE, EvGET, EvGTS, and so on) which contains multiple hierarchy dimensions, it takes a long time to refresh data. A lot of existing customers are running these types of reports. – Need a general review of all Send/Retrieve steps to optimize all sending/retrieving

Resolution – Remove com+ usage – Use Global cacheApply parallel cube process – Optimize the design of Smart Query Engine & MDX query manipulation steps o For cell based report case, SQE generates multiple MDX queries for each hierarchy members instead of a single query


RKT

18


Resolution – Change Delta Calculation o BPC 7.5 – Individual sending base o BPC 10 – Send Governor base


RKT

19


Performances – Single user retrieving data

– Single user sending data

– Concurrent users sending/retrieving data


RKT

20


Performances – Retrieving data under the multiple hierarchy condition o 9 hierarchies combination in report, 1980 cells retrieving data

– Performance benefit will be better if hierarchy combination in report is more complex and number of cells is bigger.


RKT

21

Performances & Process Data Manager

Issues in SAP BOPC 7.x – Performance & Scalability are not enough to support the enterprise customer (Only support about 2.3million records at one time)

Resolution – Use Bulk Insert – Convert to 64 bit process – Apply SQL 2008 DTSX library, Remove SQL 2000 DTS library – Use Global cache – Get rid of unnecessary file I/O – Convert synchronous data audit to asynchronously


RKT

22

Performances & Process Data Manager

Performance in BPC 10 (Import data) – No logic execution, with work status checking


RKT

23

Architecture Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Explain the architecture of SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0, version for Microsoft


RKT

24






RKT

25


Changes to the Server Environment

Changes to the Server Environment Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain the changes to the server environment


RKT

2

Agenda 1. Platform Requirements and Support ABAP Application Server ABAP Web Application Server

2. Connectivity and Web Services RESTful Web Service SOAP Web Service

ABAP Application Server

SAP NetWeaver 7.3 – Application Server ABAP — PI_BASIS 7.3 – Application Server ABAP — SAP ABA 7.3 – Application Server ABAP — SAP BASIS 7.3 – Application Server ABAP — SAP BW 7.3 – Kernel (64-bit) and Unicode only

An operating system supported by SAP NetWeaver A database supported by SAP NetWeaver

Note: Both SAP NetWeaver 7.0 and SAP NetWeaver 7.2 are not supported.


RKT

4

ABAP Web Application Server

The new Web-based interface of SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0, version for SAP NetWeaver is powered by SAP ABAP Web Application Server ( SAP Web AS). There are the following installation options for the SAP Web AS: SAP Web Application Server ABAP System. (yellow box on the left.) SAP Web Application Server Java System. (green box on the right.)

Note: Removal of both Microsoft .NET and Web Application server (IIS).


RKT

5

Agenda 1. Platform Requirements and Support ABAP Application Server ABAP Web Application Server

2. Connectivity and Web Services RESTful Web Service SOAP Web Service

Connectivity and Web Services RESTful Web Service

REST (Representational State Transfer) Web Service enables communication between SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation Clients and SAP NetWeaver BW (Application Server). Also known as RESTful Web Service relies on a stateless, Client / Server, cacheable communications protocol and in virtually all cases, the HTTP communication protocol is used. All services will be exposed as RESTful Web services for internal communication between BPC 10 NW clients and server.


RKT

7

Connectivity and Web Services SOAP Web Service

Simple Object Access Protocol (SOAP), is a protocol specification for exchanging structured information in the implementation of Web Services in computer networks. SOAP Web services will be used to communicate with external applications such as EPM Applications (that is, FIM). When SAP BusinessObjects Financial Information Management (FIM) is used to load data into Planning and Consolidation from external data sources (flat files, tables, 3rd party applications, or other EPM applications), this data is often transformed and aggregated.


RKT

8

Changes to the Server Environment Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Explain the changes to the server environment


RKT

9






RKT

10


Changes to the Server Environment

Changes to the Server Environment Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain the changes to the server environment


RKT

2

Topics 1. Platform supported Operating Systems Databases Supported .NET Framework

2. Architecture design Single process .NET Impersonation File configuration for max concurrent users Global Cache

Platform Supported Operating Systems

The follow Operating systems are supported by SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0 Windows 2008 (Standard, Enterprise or Data Center) 64 bits Windows 2008 R2 (Standard, Enterprise or Data Center) 64 bits


RKT

4

Platform Supported Database Supported

The follow databases are supported SQL Server 2008 Enterprise Edition SQL Server 2008 R2 Enterprise Edition


RKT

5

Platform Supported .NET Framework

The entire development was done using .NET 3.5


RKT

6

Topics 1. Platform Supported Operating Systems Databases Supported .NET Framework

2. Architecture Design Single process .NET Impersonation File configuration for max concurrent users Global Cache

Architecture Design Single Process

SAP BPC 10 Application server has one single process instead of multiple processes dllhost.exe from SAP BPC 7.x corresponding for each application pool of COM+ components


RKT

8

Architecture Design .NET Impersonation

All the services from application server are started with installation users: BPC_SSYADMIN BPC_ADMIN BPC_USER Having the same rights like SAP BPC 7.x. Any request to SQL Server or SSAS server is done using one user mentioned.


RKT

9

Architecture Design File Configuration – Max Concurrent Users

SAP BPC 10 provides a configuration file to provide the information regarding the number of Max Concurrent Sessions The file used is web.config (from Websrvr folder)


RKT

10

Architecture Design Global Cache

The following key points about Global Cache: XML configuration file - Path %PC_MS%\Websrvr\CacheManagement\Cache.config Cache all meta data and master data which improve the following operations: – Send Data/Retrieve Data – Data Manager – Logic – Log on


RKT

11

Changes to the Server Environment Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Explain the changes to the server environment


RKT

12






RKT

13


Troubleshooting and Debug Tools

Troubleshooting and Debug Tools Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Analyze Trace and Log Files Explain Useful Transaction codes Check different transaction codes for logs and Exceptions Trace file for Debugging logic Check Data Manager log files Check Solution Manager Diagnostics Check Workload monitor Use Appsight Black Box Service Generate and Analyze Trace Files using E2E Trace Explain Troubleshooting Transports Explain Fiddler logs


RKT

2

Troubleshooting PC 10 NW Overview

While working with the product there is a possibility of getting an error. An error can occur due to number of reasons, so in order to find the root cause of an error it is important to check the different logs and traces. With the help of the logs and traces, an issue can be narrowed down easily. At the backend NetWeaver system, both Application and System related logs can be generated. All the exceptions, dumps, warnings will be logged in the NetWeaver system. You need to know where and what to check, for example: – All the Application related logs will be logged in SLG1 transaction code – ST22 is where all the dumps will be logged likewise – SM21 is the transaction code to analyze the system logs

This lesson provides an overview of the available logs and traces in the NetWeaver system.


RKT

3

Troubleshooting Useful Transaction Codes

NetWeaver offers tracing capabilities as well as debugging capabilities. Tracing capabilities within a NetWeaver system will help to troubleshoot the BPC issues. ST22: Check this transaction code to see if any ABAP dumps have occurred. It may be caused due to programming bugs or may be due to system issues, so check the details of the errors to see the root cause. SM21: Check this transaction code to see any system connection issues and errors. ST05 and ST01: These transaction codes are set to enable to RFC trace. SLG1: Check this transaction code to see if there are any application related error messages. SLG2: This transaction code is used for maintenance of the application logs. UJFS: This transaction code is used to access the Planning and Consolidation File Server .


RKT

4

Troubleshooting SLG1

All logs related to runtime exceptions are recorded in SLG1. When an exception occurs, the detailed information is written in the log item and is saved in the database. You can check the Business User Interface logs in SLG1. In the SLG1 log, the object is identified as UJ and the sub-object is identified as UJK for logic script, UJJ for journals, UJD for Data manager, and so on.


RKT

5

Troubleshooting UJFS

UJFS is called as the File Server. Logic Script logs and Data Manager logs are stored in UJFS. Logic Script logs are recorded in a file called debuglogic.log and stored at the following location: Root\Webfolders\Environment\Model\ Privatepublication\Username\Date The Data Manager logs are stored at Root\Webfolders\Environment\Model\ Privatepublication\username\tempfiles. The name of the log file contains the name of the package, a timestamp, and the extension.log. The log files need to be deleted at regular intervals since they take up considerable amount of space.


RKT

6

Troubleshooting ST22

Check this transaction code to see if any ABAP dumps have occurred. It may be caused due to programming bugs or may be due to system issues, so check the details of the errors to see the root cause.


RKT

7

Troubleshooting SM21

All the system connections and related logs can be checked in SM21 transaction code.


RKT

8


RFC Trace in ABAP can be set in ST05 transaction code.


RKT

9


Other system traces can be generated in ST01 transaction code: Authorization check (for ABAP authorization objects) Kernel functions DB Access (SQL Trace) Table Buffer Trace RFC Calls Lock Operations


RKT

10

Troubleshooting Workload Monitors

ST03N: is the transaction code which can be used to observe the workload records at the application server level.


RKT

11

Troubleshooting Appsight Black Box Service

Download the Appsight Black Box install files from the Service Marketplace. You can check the SAP Note:1356729 for downloading and installation instructions. Install the Black Box service in the standalone mode. You need to create a folder called Identity in the C:\Drive and copy the Startservice.bat and Stopservice.bat files. Start the Startservice.bat file in order to start the logging. Once you start the application, the Identity folder contains an .ASL file, which is the log that will write all the information from the application. To maintain the logs on the system, stop and start the service at the end of each day, copy the file to another folder, and have the application create a new one.


RKT

12

Troubleshooting E2E Trace

You can generate trace files on client and server components for troubleshooting purposes using E2E Trace. Trace files collect information about client and server interactions presenting trace information about the entire request and response of a business process step. Trace files can be uploaded to the server for analysis in SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics.

Prerequisites: Ensure the latest Planning and Consolidation clients with the E2E Trace plug-in are installed on your client machine. Ensure Introscope Workstation has been downloaded to the PC. Ensure the DotNet agent of the Planning and Consolidation server is online.


RKT

13


Generating and analyzing trace files using E2E Trace involves the following tasks: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Enable tracing in the ABAP back-end system Perform a trace in the Administration module Perform a trace in the Microsoft Excel module Upload the trace file to SAP Solution Manager Diagnostic Evaluate the trace file in SAP Solution Manager


RKT

14


Enable Tracing in the ABAP Back-end System 1. Enter the Root cause Analysis work center of SAP Solution Manager 2. Choose End-to-End Analysis 3. Select the query that contains all systems involved within the E2E trace and select the system ID of the Planning and Consolidation ABAP stack 4. Choose Trace Analysis, which opens a new window with the E2E Trace Analysis application 5. Select the Trace Enabling tab 6. Select the system ID of the Planning and Consolidation ABAP stack 7. Select Enable, a green icon displays besides the system ID


RKT

15

Troubleshooting Solution Manager

Evaluation of Traces in SAP Solution Manager 1. In SAP Solution Manager, access the Root Cause Analysis work center 2. Choose End-to-End Analysis 3. Select the query that contains all systems involved within the E2E Trace and select all systems 4. Choose Trace Analysis to open a new window with the e2E Trace Analysis application 5. Select the trace from the list 6. If you want the SMD to collect corresponding server side trace data, choose Select systems for Trace collection dynamically 7. Select the first step of the recorded E2E Transaction Trace and choose Display 8. Select the Summary tab and Message table tab


RKT

16

Troubleshooting Solution Manager

9. Expand the tray Server Analysis and choose the Request tree tab. 10. Choose Expand all to see incoming http calls, outgoing DOTNET Connector calls and incoming RFC calls and then do one of the following: o To view Introscope Transaction Trace data, select a line with incoming http calls, then choose Display Introscope Transaction Trace. o To view ABAP Trace data, select a line with incoming RFC calls, then choose Display aggregated ABAP Trace. o To view ABAP SQL Trace data, select a line with incoming RFC calls, then choose Display ABAP SQL Trace Summary


RKT

17

Troubleshooting Transports

Transports allow you to move an environment across a landscape. When objects are deleted either in source or target system, the two major object types exhibit different behavior patterns during the import of a transport into the target system. When an environment is deleted, you can make sure that all data has been removed. Use program UJT_CHECK_TABLE_ENTRIES to check how many records exist in the UJ* database tables for a particular environment. Never change the data model (environment, model, dimensions, or properties) in the target systems. If you change objects in a target system, the transports that originate from development will no longer import correctly. Other components, such as reports, input schedules, or data manager packages (not data model related) can be changed in any instance. Do not change the structure or definition of Planning and Consolidation related data model objects in BW that is InfoArea, Infocube and Multiprovider, InfoObjects. If you change it then transport will fail. Change in the technical name of the of objects between landscapes will not effect the transports.


RKT

18

Troubleshooting Fiddler Logs

The communication between Web Admin Client and Server takes place through RESTful Web Service. Communication takes place between the EPM Applications through SOAP Web Services. Fiddler is a HTTP Debugging proxy tool which inspects all the HTTP traffic and logs the traffic between your computer and the internet. This is useful to debug the Wed Admin issues and so on.


RKT

19

Troubleshooting and Debug Tools Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Analyze Trace and Log Files Explain Useful Transaction codes Check different transaction codes for logs and Exceptions Trace file for Debugging logic Check Data Manager log files Check Solution Manager Diagnostics Check Workload monitor Use Appsight Black Box Service Generate and Analyze Trace Files using E2E Trace Explain Troubleshooting Transports Explain Fiddler logs


RKT

20






RKT

21


Supported Server Configurations

Supported Server Configurations Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Describe the supported server configurations


RKT

2

Topics 1. Architecture 2. Supported Platforms

Architecture Changes

.NET 3.5 Components Only Pure 64 bits processes Single Process no multiple processes (COM+ processes) .NET impersonation No need for Reporting Services Configuration file for scalability Web server and application server cannot be separate Implementation of Global Cache


RKT

4

Architecture Benefits Benefits of new architecture Better stability and performances using new .NET3.5 framework Capacity to use all resources of application server because of capability to use pure 64 bit processes No need of reporting services required; less maintenance and all the reports from web are using the same technology .NET impersonation is used for security. In this way standard BPC users don’t have any direct access to SQL Server database or SSAS database. Technical configuration of system is done into configuration file web.config. Web server and application server cannot be split anymore because the system exposes just web services starting with this release. Global Cache implementation will help for better performances of the system. For initial release the following functionalities will be implemented: – Send/Retrieve data – DM packages – Script Logic – Log on


RKT

5

Architecture Diagram


RKT

6

Topics 1. Architecture 2. Supported platforms

Supported Platforms The follow Operating Systems are supported Windows 2008 & R2 series (64 bits only supported) Standard, enterprise and Data Center IIS 7.0/7.5 .NET 3.5 Framework SQL Server 2008 including R2 – Enterprise Edition


RKT

8

Supported Server Configurations Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Describe the supported server configurations


RKT

9






RKT

10

Architecture Diagram


RKT

11

Topics 1. Architecture 2. Supported platforms

Supported Platforms The follow Operating Systems are supported Windows 2008 & R2 series (64 bits only supported) Standard, enterprise and Data Center IIS 7.0/7.5 .NET 3.5 Framework SQL Server 2008 including R2 – Enterprise Edition


RKT

13

Supported Server Configurations Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Describe the supported server configurations


RKT

14






RKT

15


Support Tools

Support Tools Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Describe the Support / Debug tools


RKT

2

Topics 1. Support Tools and Troubleshooting 2. Logging and Tracing


Support Tools and Troubleshooting SAP Solution Manager • SAP Solution Manager helps identify root causes of encountered issues, as well

as analyze and prepare for troubleshooting. SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics can be setup after SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation application server. •

Procedure and steps to configure SAP Solution Manager are in the “Installation Guide SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0, version for the Microsoft platform, Topic: Connecting to Solution Manager Diagnostics”. •


RKT

5

Support Tools and Troubleshooting Appsight Blackbox service •

This service tracks and records application activities in order to pinpoint root causes.

Identifies code errors, displays defect description, and helps proceed directly to solving. •

Application events, code execution flows and User activities are being captured for case analysis and troubleshooting. •


RKT

6

Support Tools and Troubleshooting Management Console

• For debugging and troubleshooting purposes, Management Console logging feature can be activated to display system status and error messages.

• System performance is being monitored to analyze potential bottleneck. • Administrators can check real-time system use online by End-Users (who’s online functionality) view current and historical logs, run server diagnostic, move current logs to history, and delete logs.


RKT

7

Support Tools and Troubleshooting View Environment Statistics The "View Environment Statistics" option provides information about the status of Environment, Model, and Dimensions. It also helps to check Models type of storage, Optimization and Dimensions process states. This option is available under "Planning and Consolidation Administration" console (Environment_Name > Environment Tasks > View Environment Statistics ).


RKT

8


Logging and Tracing Generating Log and Trace files are necessary for troubleshooting purposes. Log and Trace files are available under the Log Viewer of SAP Solution Manager diagnostics. Enabling and configuring logging and tracing involves setting a trace level, trace User, and log level. We strongly recommend to deactivate logging and tracing after completing issues root cause analysis and troubleshooting as this may impact application and system performance. The settings for the logging and tracing-related environment parameters are stored in a file named Logging.cfg within the file server directory Webfolders\AdminTemplates\. For example: \Data\Webfolders\AdminTemplates\Logging.cfg. You can activate tracing within Additional Tasks in the Environment Tasks action pane of the Administration Client for an individual user by choosing Manage Logging, then indicating the type of log and trace, and the user.


RKT

10

Support Tools Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Describe the Support / Debug tools


RKT

11






RKT

12


New Installation Process

New Installation Process Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain the main steps involved in installing SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0, version for SAP NetWeaver


RKT

2

Topics 1. Installation Overview 2. Server Installation 3. Client Installation

Installation Overview Introduction

Installation Overview: Changes from 7.x Prerequisites Process Overview Client Tier


RKT

4

Business Example

You are planning a new Planning and Consolidation installation. Understanding system topology, software units and installation process are key aspects of a successful installation


RKT

5

Changes From 7.x Benefits

The server is now running entirely on the SAP NetWeaver platform : No more .NET server The BPC server can now run on any platform supported by NetWeaver 7.3 This brings flexibility and simplifies the topology


RKT

6

Server Installation Overview Prerequisites

Before performing an installation of Planning and Consolidation 10, version for SAP NetWeaver, ensure that the following prerequisites have been met: SAP NetWeaver 7.3 is installed Application Server ABAP The server is using 64-bit and Unicode kernel The server can use any Operating System and Database that is supported by SAP NetWeaver 7.3 (Please refer to the Product Availability Matrix ) SP2 is mandatory for NetWeaver 7.30


RKT

7

Process Overview

The installation involves the following steps: 1. Provisioning the server, including the NetWeaver installation with BW configured 2. Installing the Planning and Consolidation add-ins 3. Applying notes and service packs as needed 4. Performing post-installation configurations


RKT

8

Client Tier

The client is now common with several other EPM 10 applications The administration is now web-based


RKT

9


Installation Introduction

Installation Steps: Installing the add-ins Applying updates (notes, support packs) Post-installation configuration steps


RKT

11

Installing the Add-ins Using Transaction Code SAINT


RKT

12

Applying Updates Using Transaction-Codes SNOTES and SPAM

There are no updates at this time


RKT

13

Post-Installation Configuration

The post-installation configuration involves the following steps: 1. Making the Namespace and software Components changeable 2. Creating Service user 3. Creating RFC destination 4. Configuring IMG with RFC Destination 5. Installing the Environment Shell 6. Configuring the Flex Client 7. Setting up Virus Scan and e-mail 8. Configure the Print Service Proxy


RKT

14

Making the Namespaces and Software Components Changeable Namespaces – /CPMB/ – /1CPMB/ – /B28/ – Customer Name Range – General SAP Name range

Software Components – CPMBPC – HOME – LOCAL


RKT

15

Creating the Service User Using Transaction Codes PFCG and SU01

Copy SAP-delivered role SAP_BPC_SERVICE to customer namespace Create Dialog user BPC_SERVICE Copy above role to this user Change user type to Communication Data


RKT

16

Creating RFC Destination Using Transaction Code SM59

Create an RFC destination pointing to the same client Use user BPC_SERVICE


RKT

17

Configuring IMG With RFC Destination Using Transaction Code SPRO


RKT

18

Installing the Environment Shell Using Transaction Code SE38

Use program UJS_ACTIVATE_CONTENT The user performing this should have SAP_BW_CONTENT_ADMIN rights First Run: Install the Environment Shell Second Run: Load the data


RKT

19

Configuring the Flex Client Using Transaction Codes SICF and SMICM

Ensure two SBC ICF services are activated(Tcode SICF) – default_host/sap/poa/fcp – default_host/sap/poa/sbc

Configure HTTPS for ICF(Tcode SMICM, SICF) Configure FCP Server(command /o/poa/sfcpconfig) Update the Persistence Service


RKT

20

Setting up E-mail and Virus Scan Using Transaction Code SCOT

E-Mail should be set as a job Minimum period is 1 minute Virus Scan on message attachments is enabled by setting the VSCAN parameter on the preference table to TRUE


RKT

21


Client Installation Introduction

Planning and Consolidation 10 now uses the EPM 10 Add-in to Microsoft Office, that is common to several other EPM application. The installation of the add-in has been covered in a specific Learning Map and will not be covered in this document The following slides illustrate connecting the add-in to a Planning and Consolidation 10, version for SAP NetWeaver server


RKT

23

Connecting the Add-in to a Server

Open Microsoft Excel, select the EPM tab and click Log On:


RKT

24


The Connection dialog box appears. Click the Selection button:

Then click the Create button


RKT

25


The “Create Connection” window appears. Select Planning and Consolidation, enter the server URL in the following format: http://:/sap/bpc ,select Version for SAP Netweaver, and click the Connect button


RKT

26


After authentication the Environment list will be populated, and upon selection of an environment to which the user has rights, the Model list will also be populated. Give the connection a name and click OK to save it.


RKT

27


The new connection will now appear in the Connection Manager


RKT

28

New Installation Process Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Explain the main steps involved in installing SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0, version for SAP NetWeaver


RKT

29






RKT

30


New Installation Process

New Installation Process Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain the main steps involved in installing SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0, version for Microsoft


RKT

2


Installation Overview Introduction

Installation Overview: New architecture benefits Platform requirements Prerequisites Process Overview Client tier


RKT

4

Business Example

You are planning a new Planning and Consolidation installation. Understanding system topology, software units, and the installation process are key aspects of a successful installation


RKT

5

New Architecture Benefits Benefits of new architecture Better stability and performances using new .NET3.5 framework Capacity to use all resources of application server because of capability to use pure 64 bit processes No need of reporting services required; less maintenance and all the reports from web are using the same technology .NET impersonation is used for security. In this way, standard BPC users don’t have any direct access to the SQL Server database or SSAS database. Technical configuration of system is done into configuration file web.config. Global Cache implementation will help for better system performance. For the initial release the following functionalities will be implemented: – Send/Retrieve data – DM packages – Script Logic – Log on


RKT

6

Server Installation Overview Platform Requirements

Windows Server 2008 & Windows Server R2 series (64 bit only)

Standard/Enterprise/DataCenter IIS 7.0/7.5 .NET 3.5 framework SQL Server 2008 & SQL Server 2008 R2 Enterprise edition only Support Globalization/Multiple language server OS


RKT

7

Server Installation Overview Prerequisites

Before performing an installation of Planning and Consolidation 10, version for Microsoft, ensure that the following prerequisites have been met: MSXML 4.0 SP2 or later ADOMD .NET 9.0 Crystal Reports 2008 Runtime SP3 SAP User Management Client 10.0 (if BOE authentication is used) Anti-Cross Site Scripting Library 3.1 – The component must be downloaded before installing the server

Anti-Cross Site Scripting Library 3.1 Microsoft Visual C++ 2005 Runtime Libraries SP1 Microsoft Access Database Engine 2010 64bit ….


RKT

8

Process Overview

The server installation involves the following steps: 1. Determine the server configuration 2. Install all prerequisites requested 3. From application server, install the Planning and Consolidation server 4. Perform post-installation configurations


RKT

9

Client Tier

The client is now common with several other EPM 10 applications The Administration client looks similar with the one existing in SBOP PC7.5


RKT

10


Server Installation Introduction

Server Installation Steps: Check the prerequisites Install the application server If the platform contains multiple application servers in NLB, you need to perform the installation of each application server. Perform Post-installation configuration steps


RKT

12

Installation Setup Process


RKT

13

Installation Setup Process (Cont)


RKT

14



RKT

15



RKT

16



RKT

17



RKT

18



RKT

19



RKT

20



RKT

21

Prerequisite Checks


RKT

22

Installation Setup Process


RKT

23



RKT

24

Post-Installation Configuration

The post-installation configuration involves the following steps: 1. Connect your SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation system to Solution Manager Diagnostic to allow support staff and identity 2. Enable and configure the Management Console 3. Configure .NET Application Server


RKT

25

Post-installation Enable the Management Console

The Management Console can be enabled following these steps: Change SQL Server authentication mode to “SQL Server and Windows Authentication mode” Create a SQL user having db owner role for AppServer database. Enter the SQL user information into BPC_ManagementDSN system DSN in DataSource (ODBC) Change from “Active log format” to “ODBC logging” into IIS web site of Planning and Consolidation: – DSN is BPC_ManagementDSN – Table is BPCLog – SQL username and password you created

Restart IIS


RKT

26

Post-installation Configure .NET Application Server

You can modify the machine.config file in order to ensure the right balance between the number of working threads and deadlock occurrences. \WINDOWS\Microsoft.NET\Framework\v2.0.50727\Config\machine.config


RKT

27


EPM Add-in for Microsoft Office Installation

Planning and Consolidation 10 now uses the EPM 10 Add-in to Microsoft Office, that is common to several other EPM application. The installation of the add-in has been covered in a specific Learning Map and will not be covered in this document


RKT

29

Administration Client Installation

Planning and Consolidation Administration client need to be separately installed.


RKT

30

Administration Client Prerequisites

Microsoft Internet Explorer 7.0,8.0 or Mozilla 3 Microsoft Office 2007 or 2010 .NET Framework 2.0 or higher Pentium IV (1GHz CPU) 512 RAM 100Mb free hard disk space into My documents folder 20Mb free hard disk space for the Administration installation files


RKT

31

Administration Client Process Overview

Open the browser and point to Planning and Consolidation web: – http:///sap/bpc/web

Select Download Center. Select Planning and Consolidation Administration and start the installation.


RKT

32

New Installation Process Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Explain the main steps involved in installing SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0, version for Microsoft


RKT

33






RKT

34


Upgrade Considerations

Upgrade Considerations Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain the considerations for upgrading


RKT

2

Topics 1. Overview Methods Definitions

2. Technical Considerations 3. Application Considerations

Upgrade Overview

Existing Planning and Consolidation 7.5 for SAP NetWeaver systems can be upgraded to version 10 Only upgrades from version 7.5 are supported It is important to understand the implications of such upgrade There are various approaches to an upgrade


RKT

4

Methods

An upgrade can be done using various approaches Direct upgrade on an existing server Upgrade on a copy of the existing system New Installation and data import


RKT

5

Definitions

Some very important keywords that have changed with version 10: Model : This was called “Application” in previous versions Environment: Know as “Appset” in previous versions. Consists of one or several Models


RKT

6



Technical Considerations

There are three upgrade scenarios Direct upgrade on the existing system Upgrade on a copy of the existing system Installation of a new system and import of existing data


RKT

8

Technical Considerations Direct Upgrade on the Existing System

The upgrade is performed directly on the existing system The existing server is upgraded to NetWeaver 7.3 and Planning and Consolidation is upgraded from 7.5 to 10 The Migration Program is then executed to migrate 7.5 data into 10 format This is the simplest approach No need to setup additional hardware The database and operating systems have to be supported by NetWeaver 7.3

It is a disruptive scenario The existing system will not be available to users during the upgrade

It involves some risk It makes changes to an existing, unique environment

It is NOT an advisable scenario


RKT

9

Technical Considerations Upgrade on a Copy of the Existing System

The upgrade is performed on a copy of the existing system This is scenario has the advantage of combining simplicity and safety It is performed on a server that is not in production No interruption for the users

The database and operating systems can be changed during the system copy The Upgrade is then performed like in the previous scenario This scenario is advisable on systems that are dedicated to Planning and Consolidation (for example where BW is not used outside of Planning and Consolidation)


RKT

10

Technical Considerations Installation of a new System and Import of Data

The upgrade is treated as a new installation This is the least disruptive scenario All that is needed from the existing system is a backup of the appsets

This is especially advisable when the existing environment is shared with other SAP applications (BW, etc) It allows the upgrade of Planning and Consolidation without interfering with the requirements of other applications

After the new system is installed, the data from the 7.5 system is imported using UJBR , and the environment is then migrated from 7.5 to 10 format using the Migration Program


RKT

11



Application Considerations

The environments are migrated from version 7.5 to version 10 using the Migration program All data is migrated All setting from Administration are migrated. There are some changes in the wording; some settings are renamed The users must be created in NetWeaver and mapped to the version 7.5 users in a spreadsheet Security is migrated but there are a few changes Journals are migrated Business Rules are migrated Validations are migrated (named Controls in Version 10), with a few changes Xcelsius dashboard are NOT migrated. Manual migration is required Data Manager elements are migrated, but the logs are not Live Reports are not migrated Content Library elements are migrated with some limitations


RKT

13

Application Considerations (Continued)

Business Process Flows are migrated Excel Reports and Templates can be migrated, with some limitations Custom Menus are not migrated Custom solutions that use the 7.5 APIs will not work with version 10


RKT

14

Upgrade Considerations Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Explain the considerations for upgrading


RKT

15






RKT

16


Upgrade Considerations

Upgrade Considerations Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain the software upgrade process Explain the Application Set migration process


RKT

2

Topics 1. Software Upgrade 2. Migrate Application Sets

Upgrade to SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0, Microsoft Version Direct upgrade from previous versions is not possible! Only Windows 2008 and Windows 2008 R2 are supported Only 64 bit platforms are supported. Only SQL2008 and SQL 2008 R2 Enterprise Edition are supported Most part of BPC components are 64bit now


RKT

4

Topics 1. Software upgrade 2. Migrate Application Sets

Migration Prerequisites

Moving appset backups to the new platform Migrate appsets from BPC 5.x to BPC 7.x, in case of migration from BPC 5.x Backup your existing appsets on your BPC 7.x platforms – Use BPC Server Manager to backup your BPC 7.x appsets

Copy appset backup folder to the new BPC 10.0 environment

Restore BPC 7.x appsets Restore appset backups to the BPC 10.0 environment – Use BPC Server Manager to restore environments


RKT

6

Process Overview

Migration process should follow the steps: Restore appset backups to the BPC 10.0 environment –

Use BPC Server Manager to restore environments

Migrate the environment using SAP Server Manager menu Perform the manual migration steps


RKT

7

Upgrade Considerations Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Explain the software upgrade process Explain the Application Set migration process


RKT

8






RKT

9


Upgrade Steps

Upgrade Steps Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain how to run the automatic migration part Explain the manual migration steps


RKT

2

Topics 1. Software Upgrade 2. Content Migration

Technical Steps Upgrade on a Copy of the Existing System

The upgrade is performed on a copy of the existing system The upgrade consist of upgrading NetWeaver 7.01 to 7.3, and the Planning and Consolidation ABAP component from 7.5 to 10, using the SAINT program. The post-installation configuration described in the Installation slides should then be performed. Once the system has been tested and validated with the default Environment Shell, the migration of the 7.5 Appsets can proceed


RKT

4

Technical Steps Installation of a new System and Import of Data

The upgrade is treated as a new installation Planning and Consolidation 10 should be installed (please refer to the Installation slides) Once the system has been tested and validated with the default Environment Shell, the import and migration of the 7.5 Appsets can proceed


RKT

5

Topics 1. Software Upgrade 2. Content Migration

Content Migration

If the “new Installation” scenario was chosen The appsets on the version 7.5 system must be backed up using UJBR, and then restored on the new system also with UJBR The following steps are independent of what scenario was initially chosen


RKT

7

Content Migration The Migration Program

The program name is UJT_MIGRATE_75_TO_10 It is called from Transaction Code SE38


RKT

8


The transactional data as well as the comments are migrated automatically to version 10 Models The Administration settings and configurations are all migrated The user-defined order of members is not retained Some settings are in the Web client, others are now accessed through the SAP GUI

Parameters can also be migrated automatically


RKT

9


User management and Security Planning and consolidation 7.5 was using either Active Directory or CMS accounts. Version 10 instead uses NetWeaver accounts. As part of a migration, the user accounts must be recreated in NetWeaver, and any reference to the user accounts in the Environment must be updated to reflect the new security model. Once the new accounts have been created in SU01, a mapping file (Excel spreadsheet) with two columns should be created., as follows

This spreadsheet should be saved as a Tab-delimited file


RKT

10


User management and Security (continued) References to the userIDs in the OWNER or REVIEWER properties of dimensions will be properly migrated. References to userIDs in custom-defined properties will NOT be migrated The File Service structure will be updated accordingly, domain folders will be removed Teams are migrated Task Access profiles are migrated but will have new, more descriptive names Member access profiles are migrated and are called Data Access profiles


RKT

11


Journals can be automatically migrated Business Rules can be automatically migrated Validations are now called Controls and can be automatically migrated


RKT

12


Xcelsius Dashboard The dashboards are NOT migrated The following manual steps are required for migration: Open the old .xlf file in Dashboard Designer Remove the old EPM connector Recreate the new connection and set its parameters appropriately


RKT

13


Data Manager Most Data Manager elements are migrated The log files are not migrated


RKT

14


Web Client Live Reports are NOT migrated, and would need to be recreated The Content Library can be automatically migrated However custom web pages are not migrated


RKT

15


Business Process Flows BPFs can be automatically migrated Archived instances are not migrated Deprecated actions or actions linking to non-existing content are not migrated


RKT

16


Excel Reports and Templates The Excel reports and templates are NOT migrated by the Migration Program Existing 7.5 EVDRE reports and schedules can be converted in the EPM add-in to a native version 10 format . However complex reports might require some manual modifications, especially in the following cases: Multiple EVDRE reports in a complex arrangement or sharing some KeyRanges Formulas to calculate parameters Use of cell reference indirections to determine EVDRE parameters. Use of VBA to call the internal object model of the 7.5 Excel client. EVDRE inserted in another EVDRE.

After conversion, the log function will contain information about the results.


RKT

17


Custom Menus Custom Menus are NOT migrated. That functionality is replaced by the Workspaces and BPF Activity Workspaces


RKT

18

Upgrade Steps Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Explain how to run the automatic migration part Explain the manual migration steps


RKT

19






RKT

20


Upgrade Steps

Upgrade Steps Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain how to run the automatic migration part Explain the manual migration steps


RKT

2

Topics 1. Software Upgrade 2. Content migration

Technical Steps Installation of a new System

The upgrade is treated as a new installation Planning and Consolidation 10 should be installed into a new environment (please refer to the Installation presentation). Once the system has been tested and validated , the migration of the 7.5 Appsets can proceed.


RKT

4

Topics 1. Software upgrade 2. Content migration

Content Migration Administration Content Administration content automatically migrated: Settings and configuration – Settings defined in 7.5 Admin Console – Settings defined in Web Admin (appset and application parameters)

Dimensions Business rules Logic

Administration content which needs manual migration: Task profiles need to be manually checked because some task profiles have been replaced, some others have been removed. The replaced or removed tasks can be checked into the generated log file.


RKT

6

Content Migration Application Content Features automatically migrated: Data Manager – – – –

Old transformation & conversion files supported without modifications. Dynamic scripts are supported Package authorizations are supported Only SSIS 2008 packages are migrated

Content Library – Documents & URLs


RKT

7

Content Migration Application Content Features which need manually migration: EVDRE reports – Use “Evdre Migration tool” for standard use of EVDRE. In case of customized report, manual adjustments will be required.

Business Process Flow – partially migrated – There are added and removed BPF tasks.

Published books – Books definition in Excel is fully supported – Books have to be published again – only PDF format supported


RKT

8

Content Migration Application Content Features not migrated: Live reports Content library – custom web pages Custom menus – Supported in the previous version only for backward compatibility with 4.2. The goforward functionality in 10 is Workspaces and BPF.

Data Manager – SQL 2005 SSIS packages will not run on SQL2008

Work status Insight API – not supported


RKT

9

Content Migration Data All data is automatically migrated: Transactional data Journals Comments


RKT

10

Process Overview

Content migration process should follow these steps: Restore appset backups to the BPC 10.0 environment –

Use BPC Server Manager to restore environments

Migrate the environment using SAP Server Manager menu Perform the manual migration steps


RKT

11

Migration Restore Environments


RKT

12



RKT

13



RKT

14



RKT

15



RKT

16

Migration Migrate Environments


RKT

17



RKT

18



RKT

19



RKT

20

Upgrade Steps Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Explain how to run the automatic migration part Explain the manual migration steps


RKT

21






RKT

22


Transport & CLM (Content Lifecycle Management)

Transport & CLM (Content Lifecycle Management) Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Understand the new improved granular transport feature Describe how to set up and run transports from the SAPGUI Understand the new feature Content Life Cycle Management (CLM)


RKT

2

Topics 1. Transport 2. CLM (Content Life Cycle Management)

Transport Introduction

Transport Introduction: The purpose of transport is to move the contents of environments across a landscape at granular level. With Business Planning and Consolidation 10, version for SAP NetWeaver granular object transport behavior is introduced. Full integration with CTS (Change and Transport System) is available. Normal and Delete mode of transport are supported. Standard NW transport transactions and debugging can be used.


RKT

4

New Improved Transports Benefits

Benefits of this feature include: Better Performance during transport Flexible transport process due to granular object transport behavior Good benefit to backend system administrators as transport process is fully integrated into standard NW CTS framework Better debugging options Tight dependency checks during the transport process (explained in a separate section)


RKT

5

Transports Prerequisites

Before performing transports, ensure that the following prerequisites have been met: Configuration of the SAP NetWeaver Transport Framework by creating transport domains, routes and other aspects of a transport. Configure the system to import client dependent objects. – Create user ALEREMOTE (BW background user) – Create a RFC destination to allow the import method to be executed in the correct client.


RKT

6

Transport Modes

Normal Mode: For modifying and creating objects Environment objects that support Normal Mode: Environment Model Work Status DM Data Files Journal Template Data Access Profile Environment Configuration


Dimension Task Profile Report Files Teams Library DM Package Link Book Template

BPF Template Dimension Member DM Package Report Templates DM Files Drill Through Controls Script Logic Files Business Rules DM Package Group Model Configuration Hierarchy of Dimension

RKT

7

Transport Modes

Deletion Mode: For deleting objects Environment objects that support Deletion Mode: Model Dimension Data Manager Package Data Manager Package Group Data Manager Package Link


RKT

8

Transport Dependency Check

Dependency check of each object: There are some dependencies that exist among the objects of Environment and during transports there are three types of dependency checks: During transport creation process During Import process During Data Checker process


RKT

9

Transport Steps Normal Mode How to Create Transport Normal Mode Logon to Source System via SAP GUI and enter transaction code RSA1 Select Transport Connection on left column


RKT

10

Transport Steps Normal Mode In the left column, choose SAP Transport > Object Types In the middle column, choose More Types > Environment and double-click Select Objects


RKT

11

Transport Steps Normal Mode In the dialog box, select the environment to be transported and click the Transfer Selections button.


RKT

12

Transport Steps Normal Mode In the right column, the objects in the environment are listed. Select the objects to be transported by selecting or deselecting the corresponding object. Click the Transport Objects button.


RKT

13

Transport Steps Normal Mode Transport object for the selected objects have been created. Generate a customizing request to include the transport objects and release the customizing task for transporting.


RKT

14

Transport Steps Deletion Mode All the steps are the same with Normal Mode transport except this step. In the left column, choose SAP Transport > Object Types, in the middle column, choose More Types > BPC Deletion and double-click > Select Objects


RKT

15

Transport Steps Debugging Transport Issues Transport logs help to debug issues during Transports Log on to Source System via SAP GUI and enter transaction code SLG1 In the Object field, enter UJ and in the Subobject field, enter UJT Click Execute to get the log


RKT

16

Topics 1. Transport 2. CLM (Content Life Cycle Management)

Content Life Cycle Management Introduction

CLM (Content Life Cycle Management) aims to: Deliver a reusable software component for the Customers by the Ecosystem Establish a common channel for delivering the application contents Analyze the contents from different vendors in a manageable way


RKT

18

Content Life Cycle Management Benefits

Main benefits of CLM are: Enables Best Practice and Application delivering through content Enables scaling, fast and more flexible go to market Reduces the implementation effort for customers Provides expertise knowledge of the partner ecosystem to the customers Reduces the costs and provides speed deployment opportunities to customers


RKT

19

Content Life Cycle Management Terminology

Content Groups: A consistent collection of content records that are defined at a specific point in time

Packages: A collection of content groups, combined with metadata and attachments


RKT

20

Content Creation Modes

SAP Content: SAP creates content by industry

Partner/Vendor Content: Vendors/Partners create content by industry

SAP

Customers

Vendors/ Partners

Customers

Customers Customer Content: Customers create content for themselves


RKT

21

Content Life Cycle Management (CLM) Prerequisites

Before using CLM, ensure that the following prerequisites have been met: BPC and CLM Roles Assignment CLM RFC Destination CLM System Configuration


RKT

22

Content Life Cycle Management (CLM) Process Flow


RKT

23

Content Life Cycle Management (CLM) Process Steps

How to work with CLM 1. Launch CLM via SAP GUI and enter transaction code NWBC 2. After logon, choose Manage Content Groups to start working with CLM 3. More details on how to use CLM are documented in the help portal. Check the link below.


RKT

24

Transport & CLM (Content Lifecycle Management) Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Understand the new improved granular transport feature Describe how to set up and run transports from the SAPGUI Understand the new feature Content Life Cycle Management (CLM)


RKT

25






RKT

26


Setting Up Authentication & SSO

Setting up Authentication & SSO Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain SSO with CMS or NW Explain NW ABAP Authentication


RKT

2

SSO (Single Sign-On)

Single Sign-On Single sign-on (SSO) is mechanism whereby a single action of user authentication and authorization can permit a user to access all computers and systems where he has access permission, without the need to enter multiple passwords. Single signon reduces human error, a major component of systems failure and is therefore highly desirable but difficult to implement. (www.Opengroup.org) In our case it will allow you to access, for example, from the start web page directly the Excel client and vice versa.


RKT

3

Business Example

The user is already connected with the EPM 10 Web interface and now wants to access the Excel EPM Add-In. He needs just to click on the related link without providing his credentials again.


RKT

4

SSO Benefits

The multiplicity of clients, back-ends, communication protocols and technology stacks leads to an overall complex situation.


RKT

5

SSO EPM 10.0 Security Principles (1/3)

EPM 10.0 is made of the following products: SAP BO EPM solutions 10.0, add-in for Microsoft Office (The EPM add-in) SAP BO Financial Consolidation 10.0 (FC) SAP BO Financial Information Management 10.0 (F.I.M) SAP BO Intercompany 10.0 (IC) SAP BPC 10.0, version for the Microsoft platform (PC_MS) SAP BPC 10.0, version for SAP NetWeaver (PC_NW) SAP BO Profitability and Cost Management 10.0 (PCM) SAP BO Strategy Management 10.0 (SSM)

Some of these products can be used in stand alone configuration, while others are add-ons, or require integration with SAP platforms. When more than 1 product is used, a common security directory is needed. A central security repository is needed if many products are used together.


RKT

6


Some products (FC without Cube Designer, IC, PC_MS, PCM, SSM) have their own integrated security mechanism, which is activated when they are used alone: These integrated security mechanisms are provided for clients who are migrating from a previous version, or want to install the minimal landscape for only 1 product. These integrated mechanisms are deprecated, and it is highly recommended to use the common security mechanism. Some products (EPM-Add-in, FC with Cube Designer, FIM, PC_NW) do not provide integrated mechanisms because they are not intended to be used alone. SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0, version for SAP NetWeaver is a NetWeaver application, so it relies on NetWeaver security. All other products can be set to BusinessObjects Enterprise authentication. User authentication is delegated to a BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 4.0 platform, or to a BusinessObjects Information Platform Services 4.0 platform. The BusinessObjects platform can delegate authentication to other directories: LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) or Active Directory SAP NetWeaver


RKT

7


Advantage for EPM 10.0 products: The BusinessObjects platform is the central user repository. Users are the same for all EPM 10.0 applications, and also for BI (Business Intelligence) components provided with the BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 4.0 platform. If security is delegated to a different directory (AD, LDAP, NetWeaver), the configuration is done only once. It is possible to implement Single Sign-On mechanism between applications.

This BusinessObjects platform is unique: Even if each EPM Product is provided with an SAP BusinessObjects Information Platform Services 4.0 setup, it has to be installed only once and shared by all EPM Products. When SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation for NetWeaver is used, then the BusinessObjects platform has to be set to delegate security to the NetWeaver platform.


RKT

8

SSO Planning and Consolidation for NW as a Stand-Alone Product

The central user repository is NetWeaver.

The EPM add-in

PC_NW

NetWeaver BW


RKT

9

SSO All EPM 10.0 Products Together

Central user repository is NetWeaver, accessed through BOE for Windows products. The EPM add-in

IC

F.I.M

FC

PC_MS PCM

BOE/IPS


SSM

PC_NW

NetWeaver BW

RKT

10

SSO Prerequisites

SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0, version for SAP NetWeaver relies on the NetWeaver users: Users are created in NetWeaver. Users rights are managed in SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation.

For all EPM 10.0 applications, including SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0, version for SAP NetWeaver: First, create the user in the NetWeaver platform. Then import the user in the BusinessObjects platform (which is set to use the NetWeaver authentication mode). Then create users in other EPM 10.0 applications, as described previously. It is now possible to use the same login for all EPM applications.


RKT

11

Process Overview SSO – How it Works 1/3 The communication between the BPC client and server is conversational. Yet, we do not want to pay the price of a full blown user authentication on each call. The standard solution is to set a security context up on the first call which enables fast authentication of the subsequent requests. For the standard web application and the REST web services, we choose to have a standard cookie based authentication (automatically handled by the browser or the middleware).


RKT

12

Process Overview SSO – How it Works 2/3

Single Sign-On can be implemented between EPM 10.0 applications. SSO (Single Sign-On) is for Web applications only. Once a session is opened in an EPM 10.0 web application, or on the BusinessObjects Enterprise BI (Business Intelligence) launch pad web site, you don’t have to re-enter your credentials for login to other EPM 10.0 applications. This Single Sign-On is based on a session cookie, delivered by the BusinessObjects platform. Once delivered, the cookie can be reused to enter another EPM 10.0 product. EPM 10.0 web sites must all use the same DNS (Domain Name System) URL name in order for the cookie to be valid, including the BusinessObjects enterprise web sites and web services.

Example: http://SRV1/Finance and http://SRV1/Intercompany SSO will work, as both products use the DNS name SRV1 URL. http://SRV1/Finance and http://SRV2/Intercompany will not work, as cookie emitted from the SRV1 DNS URL is not valid on SRV2 DNS name.


RKT

13


How to ensure that all EPM 10.0 web applications use the same DNS (Domain Name System) URLs? All web applications can be deployed on the same server: OK for small configuration, with small amount of users OK for not too many EPM 10.0 applications, 2 or 3 maximum, in addition to the BOE (Business Objects Enterprise) web applications No redundancy, because there is only 1 server for all web applications.

Access EPM 10.0 web applications through a Reverse Proxy: Allow to put in place as many servers as needed. Allow redundancy, with help of load balancing devices. Allow to give final users a virtual URL, that can then redirect to real servers. Implies to have a Reverse Proxy.


RKT

14

Process Overview Office Client Workflow Launch thick Client

SSO parameters?

Prompt for User’s credentials

Set HTTP header

Set Authorization header POST Session Resource

Basic Windows (negociate)

YES

User connected

Automatically handled. Middleware sets Authorization header

Authentication mode? HTTP

YES

Response status = 200 OK

Valid Session Cookie? NO Response status = 401 Unauthorized Set proper WWW-Authenticate Challenge


Unknown user

Authenticated

Create Security Context and set Session Token in Cookie

Authenticate request

RKT

15

Process Overview Flex Client Workflow


RKT

16

Process Overview SSO and Client to Client Communication It’s possible to navigate from one BPC client to the other with single sign-on. In addition, we are able to pass BPF actions between clients. For the Office clients, we launch a new client to handle a BPF action, however, we are able to detect a running Flex client and re-use it.


RKT

17

Process Overview Launching the Office Client From Flex Client

BPC Server

Flex client

HTML proxy page

GetReentranceInfo

ExternalInterface.call() «create»

Signed Office Launcher object

Launch(ConnectionInfo, Action) «create»

Office Application

Launch(ConnectionInfo, Action)

POST Session resource


RKT

18

Process Overview Launching the Flex Client From Office Client


RKT

19

SSO Modes

•

From NW Web to BPC NW Excel FIM

•

From BPC NW Excel to BPC NW Web FIM

•

To BPC NW from EPM Connector BOE FIM


RKT

20

Topic Summary: SSO

SSO will allow us to have one single point of access for all the parts of the Business Object Planning and Consolidation.


RKT

21

Setting up Authentication & SSO Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Explain SSO with CMS or NW Explain NW ABAP Authentication


RKT

22






RKT

23


Setting-Up Authentication & SSO

Setting up Authentication & SSO Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain SSO authentication


RKT

2

SSO (Single Sign-On)

Single Sign-On Single sign-on (SSO) is mechanism whereby a single action of user authentication and authorization can permit a user to access all computers and systems where he has access permission, without the need to enter multiple passwords. Single signon reduces human error, a major component of systems failure and is therefore highly desirable but difficult to implement. (www.Opengroup.org) In our case it will allow you to access, for example, from the start web page directly the Excel client and vice versa.


RKT

3

Business Example

The user is already connected with the EPM 10 Web interface and now wants to access the Excel EPM Add-In. He needs to click the related link without providing his credentials again.


RKT

4

SSO Benefits

The multiplicity of clients, back-end, communication protocols and technology stacks leads to an overall complex situation.


RKT

5


EPM 10.0 is made of the following products: SAP BO EPM solutions 10.0, add-in for Microsoft Office (The EPM add-in) SAP BO Financial Consolidation 10.0 (FC) SAP BO Financial Information Management 10.0 (F.I.M) SAP BO Intercompany 10.0 (IC) SAP BPC 10.0, version for the Microsoft platform (PC_MS) SAP BPC 10.0, version for SAP NetWeaver (PC_NW) SAP BO Profitability and Cost Management 10.0 (PCM) SAP BO Strategy Management 10.0 (SSM)

Some of these products can be used in stand alone configuration, while others are add-ons, or require integration with SAP platforms. When more than 1 product is used, a common security directory is needed. A central security repository is needed if many products are used together.


RKT

6


Some products (FC without Cube Designer, IC, PC_MS, PCM, SSM) have their own integrated security mechanism, which is activated when they are used alone: These integrated security mechanisms are provided for clients who are migrating from a previous version, or want to install the minimal landscape for only 1 product. These integrated mechanisms are deprecated, and it is highly recommended to use the common security mechanism. Some products (EPM-Add-in, FC with Cube Designer, FIM, PC_NW) do not provide integrated mechanisms because they are not intended to be used alone. All other products can be set to BusinessObjects Enterprise authentication. User authentication is delegated to a BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 4.0 platform, or to a BusinessObjects Information Platform Services 4.0 platform. The BusinessObjects platform can delegate authentication to other directories: LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) or Active Directory SAP NetWeaver


RKT

7


Advantage for EPM 10.0 products: The BusinessObjects platform is the central user repository. Users are the same for all EPM 10.0 applications, and also for BI (Business Intelligence) components provided with the BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 4.0 platform. If security is delegated to a different directory (AD, LDAP, NetWeaver), the configuration is done only once. It is possible to implement Single Sign-On mechanism between applications.

This BusinessObjects platform is unique: Even if each EPM Product is provided with an SAP BusinessObjects Information Platform Services 4.0 setup, it has to be installed only once and shared by all EPM Products. When SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation for NetWeaver is used, then the BusinessObjects platform has to be set to delegate security to the NetWeaver platform.


RKT

8

SSO EPM 10.0 Products for Windows Only The central user repository is BOE. The EPM add-in

IC

F.I.M.

FC

PC_MS

BOE/IPS


PCM

SSM

- LDAP - AD …

RKT

9

SSO All EPM 10.0 Products Together

Central user repository is NetWeaver, accessed through BOE for Windows products. TheEPM EPM The add-in add-in

IC

F.I.M

FC

PC_MS PCM

BOE/IPS


SSM

PC_NW

NetWeaver BW

RKT

10

SSO Prerequisites

EPM 10.0 application for Windows require that users are created internally: A BOE (Business Objects Enterprise) platform is installed: it will be the same for all EPM Applications. Users are created in the EPM 10.0 application, and then associated to an external login, or alias, which is a BOE user. At connection time, authentication is done with the external login. Users rights are managed in each EPM 10.0 application. For EPM 10.0 Windows applications: First, create the user in the BO platform (For example: Scott) Then for each EPM 10.0 application used: – Create the user in the application. – Associate the user with the BOE (Business Objects Enterprise) user Scott created at the first step. – Define users rights in the EPM 10.0 application.

It is now possible to use the same login Scott for all EPM applications.

User creation can be simplified: every EPM 10.0 application provides tools to automatically import users from the BO platform.


RKT

11

Process Overview SSO – How it Works 1/3 The communication between the BPC client and server is conversational. Yet, we do not want to pay the price of a full blown user authentication on each call. The standard solution is to set a security context up on the first call which enables fast authentication of the subsequent requests. For the standard web application and the REST web services, we choose to have a standard cookie based authentication (automatically handled by the browser or the middleware).


RKT

12


Single Sign-On can be implemented between EPM 10.0 applications. SSO (Single Sign-On) is for Web applications only. Once a session is opened in an EPM 10.0 web application, or on the BusinessObjects Enterprise BI (Business Intelligence) launch pad web site, you don’t have to re-enter your credentials for login to other EPM 10.0 applications. This Single Sign-On is based on a session cookie, delivered by the BusinessObjects platform. Once delivered, the cookie can be reused to enter another EPM 10.0 product. EPM 10.0 web sites must all use the same DNS (Domain Name System) URL name in order for the cookie to be valid, including the BusinessObjects enterprise web sites and web services.

Example: http://SRV1/Finance and http://SRV1/Intercompany SSO will work, as both products use the DNS name SRV1 URL. http://SRV1/Finance and http://SRV2/Intercompany will not work, as cookie emitted from the SRV1 DNS URL is not valid on SRV2 DNS name.


RKT

13


How to ensure that all EPM 10.0 web applications use the same DNS (Domain Name System) URLs? All web applications can be deployed on the same server: OK for small configuration, with small amount of users OK for not too many EPM 10.0 applications, 2 or 3 maximum, in addition to the BOE (Business Objects Enterprise) web applications No redundancy, because there is only 1 server for all web applications.

Access EPM 10.0 web applications through a Reverse Proxy: Allow to put in place as many servers as needed. Allow redundancy, with help of load balancing devices. Allow to give final users a virtual URL, that can then redirect to real servers. Implies to have a Reverse Proxy.


RKT

14

Process Overview Office Client Workflow Launch thick Client

SSO parameters?

Prompt for User’s credentials

Set HTTP header

Set Authorization header POST Session Resource

Basic Windows (negociate)

YES

User connected

Automatically handled. Middleware sets Authorization header

Authentication mode? HTTP

YES

Response status = 200 OK

Valid Session Cookie? NO Response status = 401 Unauthorized Set proper WWW-Authenticate Challenge


Unknown user

Authenticated

Create Security Context and set Session Token in Cookie

Authenticate request

RKT

15

Process Overview Flex Client Workflow


RKT

16

Process Overview SSO and Client to Client Communication It’s possible to navigate from one BPC client to the other with single sign-on. In addition, we are able to pass BPF actions between clients. For the Office clients, we launch a new client to handle a BPF action, however, we are able to detect a running Flex client and re-use it.


RKT

17

Process Overview Launching the Office Client From Flex Client

BPC Server

Flex client

HTML proxy page

GetReentranceInfo

ExternalInterface.call() «create»

Signed Office Launcher object

Launch(ConnectionInfo, Action) «create»

Office Application

Launch(ConnectionInfo, Action)

POST Session resource


RKT

18

Process Overview Launching the Flex Client From Office Client


RKT

19

Topic Summary: SSO

SSO will allow us to have one single point of access for all the parts of the Business Object Planning and Consolidation.


RKT

20

Setting up Authentication & SSO Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Explain SSO authentication


RKT

21






RKT

22


Granular Task Security

Granular Task Security Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain Security Changes/Improvements Explain granular task security


RKT

2

Security Changes/Improvements

•

NW Users/Authentication

•

New Delivered Roles

•

Improved Service User

•

Task security: NW Profile/Role

•

Data Access Security

•

SSO


RKT

3


RKT

4

Granular Security Benefits

Benefits of this feature include: More integration to NW Minimize unnecessary authorizations to delivered BPC roles More possibilities of maintaining good complex security models Easy to maintain security strategy for Data Manager and Web client compared to BPC 7.5 NW Possibility to customize display only profiles with the new tasks


RKT

5

BPC Delivered Granular Roles

•

Normal User Roles: •

/POA/BUI_FLEX_CLIENT

•

/POA/BUI_UM_USER

•Service

•

•

User Role:

SAP_BPC_SERVICE

CLM User Roles: •

POA/CLM_BPC_USER

•

SAP_BPC_BTCH_JOB

•

SAP_BPC_CLM_EXPORT

•

SAP_BPC_CLM_IMPORT


RKT

6

BPC Delivered Granular Roles

•

Table/View Maintenance User Role: • SAP_BPC_TABU_DIS

•Integration User

Roles:

•

SAP_BPC_BICS_REPORTER (BI access)

•

SAP_BPC_MDX_REPORTER (ODBO access)

•

SAP_BPC_WS_USER (FIM/SSM access)


RKT

7

BPC Service User

•

Minimize unnecessary authorization to BPC user

•

BPC user only needs BPC related authorization

•

BPC user can do NOTHING on NW server by default

•

Service User handles almost all NW/BW API access

•

All Data Manager packages will be started with the BPC user


RKT

8

Task Security


RKT

9

Task Security There are 3 system-generated task profiles (System Admin, Primary Admin, Secondary Admin) These default task profiles cannot be changed but can be copied.


RKT

10

New Task Profiles

• Administration: •

New Manage Document Types task

•

Security task has a new group

•

Other tasks have been improved

• Data Manager: •

Most new tasks replacing old tasks

• Consolidation: •

All New tasks

• Web: • New edit crystal dashboards task

• Transports: • New Manage Transport task © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

RKT

11

Data Access Profile (7.X Mode)


RKT

12

Data Access Profile (Matrix Mode)


RKT

13

SSO (Single Sign On)

•

From BPC NW Web to • BPC NW Excel • FIM

• •

From BPC NW Excel to • BPC NW Web • FIM

• •To

BPC NW from

• EPM Connector • BOE • FIM © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

RKT

14

Granular Task Security Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Explain Security Changes/Improvements Explain granular task security


RKT

15






RKT

16


CTS+ (Enhanced Change and Transport System)

CTS+ (Enhanced Change and Transport System) Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain CTS+ (Enhanced Change and Transport System)


RKT

2

CTS+ Introduction

CTS+ (Enhanced Change and Transport System):


RKT

3

CTS+ Purpose

CTS+ (Enhanced Change and Transport System) Purpose:


RKT

4

CTS+ Activities

CTS+ (Enhanced Change and Transport System) Activities:


RKT

5

CTS+ Prerequisites

Before using CTS+, ensure that the following prerequisites have been met: Install the required prerequisite applications Setup the Environment Variable Settings Configure the CTS+ Settings


RKT

6

CTS+ Transport Types/Objects Object

Type

Note

CTS (Change and TransportFile System): Reports File Input Schedules DM conversion files File DM transformation files File

Update/sync

DM packages

File

Update/sync

Script logic files

File

Include all library files

Update/sync

Dimensions

DB

MBR table & processing

Sync

Table driven logics

DB

Security profile

DB

User is not transported

update

Web Contents

DB

Live report, Workspace, folder

update


Update/sync Update/sync Update/sync

sync

RKT

7

CTS+ Export Process Flow

CTS + (Enhanced Change and Transport System) Export Process Flow: DB objects are extracted as xml file

User chooses objects to be transported


Compress as one single zip file

Transported to CTS+

RKT

8

CTS+ Export Process Flow (Admin Console Step 1)


RKT

9

CTS+ Export Process Flow (Admin Console Steps 2 & 3)


RKT

10



RKT

11

CTS+ Export Process Flow (Admin Console Steps 5 & 6)


RKT

12



RKT

13



RKT

14



RKT

15



RKT

16

CTS+ Import Process Flow CTS+ (Enhanced Change and Transport System) Import Process Flow:

Trigger import from TMS system

Copy file to target server Post import process (dimension process, copy files)


RKT

17

CTS+ (Enhanced Change and Transport System) Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Explain CTS+ (Enhanced Change and Transport System)


RKT

18






RKT

19


FIM Integration Set-up

FIM Integration Set-up Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain FIM Integration Set-up


RKT

2

Topics 1. Pre-requisites CMS authentication Configure link between BPC 10 and CMS

2. Configuration Add users to BPC Configure Link to FIM 10 from BPC 10

CMS Authentication

Central Management System •

The CMS is used to manage user authentication.

•You

must declare users in the Central Management System.

• This

will provide Single Sign On for users between BPC 10 and SAP FIM 10.

• You

can install CMS with either BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 4.0 or as a stand alone mini platform, SAP BusinessObjects Information Platform Services 4.0.


RKT

4

Configure Link Between BPC 10 NW and CMS

Configuring CMS authentication in SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10 You must configure the system to delegate its authentication to the SAP NetWeaver system. •

•

ZSAP_BPC_WS_USER allows users to use the BPC Web Services.


RKT

5

BPC Configuration Adding users You can add users to BPC using the Administration Console. In the Navigation pane Select Security > Users, then click Add New Users from the Action Pane. •


RKT

6

BPC Configuration Adding Users • The

Add New Users wizard dialog box opens as shown.


RKT

7

BPC Configuration

Configuring the Link to FIM From SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10 •

Launch SPRO transaction.

•

On the Display IMG page double click Set Environment Parameters.


RKT

8

BPC Configuration

Enter the environment for which to set the parameters and the required information in the Environment Parameters page.


RKT

9

BPC Configuration

Update Environment Parameters After you have entered the appropriate parameters to configure the external link to FIM click Update. In the Administration console or the Web client the link will be displayed.


RKT

10

FIM Integration Set-up Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Explain FIM Integration Set-up


RKT

11






RKT

12


FIM Integration Set-up

FIM Integration Set-up Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain FIM Integration Set-up


RKT

2

Topics 1. Pre-requisites CMS authentication Configure link between BPC 10 and CMS

2. Configuration Add users to BPC Configure Link to FIM 10 from BPC 10

CMS Authentication

Central Management System •

The CMS is used to manage user authentication

•You

must declare users in Central Management System

• This

will provide Single Sign On for users between BPC 10 and SAP FIM 10

• You

can install CMS with either BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 4.0 or as a stand alone mini platform, SAP BusinessObjects Information Platform Services 4.0


RKT

4

Configure Link Between BPC 10 MS and CMS

Configuring CMS authentication in SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10 You configure the link between BPC and CMS in the BPC Server Manager Console •


RKT

5

Configure Link Between BPC 10 and CMS

In the Configure CMS Dialog box, enter the required information and click Update


RKT

6

BPC Configuration

Adding users You can add users to BPC using the Administration Console. In the Navigation pane Select Security > Users, then click “Add New Users” from the Action Pane •


RKT

7

BPC Configuration

Adding Users • The

“Add New Users” wizard dialog box opens as shown.


RKT

8

BPC Configuration

Configuring the Link to FIM From SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10 Enter parameters to configure the SAP Financial Information Management in the Administration Console. •

•

From the Administration Console select Set Environment Parameters


RKT

9

BPC Configuration

Enter the required information in the “Set Environment Parameters” displayed in the center pane of the Administration Console.


RKT

10

BPC Configuration

Update Environment Parameters After you have entered the appropriate parameters to configure the external link to FIM click Update. In the Administration console or the Web client the link will be displayed.


RKT

11

FIM Integration Set-up Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Explain FIM Integration Set-up


RKT

12






RKT

13


Creating Crystal Dashboards with the EPM Connector

Creating Crystal Dashboards With the EPM Connector Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Describe how to create Crystal Dashboards with the EPM Connector


RKT

2

Creating Crystal Dashboards With the EPM Connector Introduction

How to use the Crystal Dashboards with SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation, SAP NetWeaver version Design a dashboard and export it to Flash format in SAP BusinessObjects Dashboard Design Insert a Flash object into a report Publish a Flash Object to the Web Display the content of .txt file in the SAP BusinessObjects Dashboard Design


RKT

3

Business Example

Your organization wants to embed EPM data in a Corporate Intranet Site or within an Annual report to Shareholders. You want advanced and rich visualization coupled with the reliability of being tied directly to the EPM data at source. You must therefore link Xcelsius models to your EPM data.


RKT

4

Creating Crystal Dashboards With the EPM Connector Benefits

Benefits of using Crystal Dashboards reports with SPBO BPC: One screen information - Benefits of having all the critical information in just one screen rather than flipping through multiple pages Information at a Glance - Present a wide number of different metrics in a single consolidated view Real Time Information Tracking Here are few types of dashboards, their purpose, and benefits: – Benefits of Finance dashboard: Monitor Revenue, Profit, Loss, and Expenses – Benefits of HR dashboard: Monitor Employee activity, Headcount growth, Expenses and so on – Benefits of IT dashboard : Monitor system activity, this may include database monitoring, server monitoring, memory metrics and so on – Benefits of Inventory Dashboard : Monitor Inventory levels, warehouse and item information, orders and so on


RKT

5

Creating Crystal Dashboards With the EPM Connector Prerequisites

Before using Xcelsius models with EPM data, ensure that the following prerequisites have been met. To build Xcelsius models based on EPM data: Xcelsius 2010 (Dashboard Designer) is installed The EPM 10.0 Connector Add-on has been added to your Xcelsius install An EPM add-in report has been embedded into an MS Excel file

To run Xcelsius based flash files on EPM data: Adobe Flash Player installed on client PCs Cross Domain files established on the server side


RKT

6

Download Xcelsius Xcelsius® 2008 SP3 or Xcelsius® 2010

Available on Service Marketplace


RKT

7

EPM Connector

EPM connector Used to create and configure a connection to more EPM sources, including SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation, SAP NetWeaver version Is a component of the EPM add-in It is installed as an add-in to SAP BusinessObjects Dashboard Design – To install the add-on in Xcelsius®, choose File > Manage Add-Ons


RKT

8

Process Overview Steps to Perform

To link an Xcelsius model to EPM data, the following summary steps must be performed: 1. Open Xcelsius and open or create your Excel file with an embedded EPM add-in report 2. Generate a Report Definition within the Excel sheet 3. Establish a Data Connection using the EPM Connector 4. Build an Xcelsius visualization 5. Generate a SWF file 6. Optionally, embed the SWF file into Excel with or without an embedded EPM add-in report 7. Optionally, embed the SWF file into Word or PowerPoint 8. Optionally, run the SWF in standalone mode


RKT

9

Process Overview Open Xcelsius and Open Your Excel File

Start Xcelsius Either – Select Data>Import – Select your Excel file with data already embedded by the EPM add-in – Click OK

Or – Use the EPM Tab inside the excel file that Xcelsius provides on starting Xcelsius and embed the EPM report directly


RKT

10

Process Overview Generate a Report Definition Within the Excel Sheet

For Dynamic EPM data in the Xcelsius model, choose any free cell in the excel sheet where the Report data exists and enter =GetReportDefinition(). If required, click Refresh to Log On and Connect. This will update the Report Definition cell with report details. GetReportDefinition function is supported only in top of ODBO type connection*


RKT

11

Process Overview Use EPM Connector to Define a Data Connection in Xcelsius

In the Xcelsius Menu bar, setup a new EPM Connector data connection via Data>Connections… and then Add>EPM Connector_10 Enter a name for this Xcelsius connection Select Application (For example, Planning and Consolidation, SAP for NetWeaver version) Select Operation (EPM Report) Select Report Definition (This is the cell in the Excel file now populated with the EPM report Definition)


RKT

12

Process Overview Build an Xcelsius Visualization

Select an Xcelsius control such as a table or chart Map the source data for the control to the result set data from the EPM Connector Data Connection Add a Connection Refresh button to the visualization as required


RKT

13

Process Overview Generate a SWF File

In Xcelsius Design mode, select File>Export>Flash (SWF)… Name the Flash file, select a location for Export and click OK


RKT

14

Process Overview Embedded a SWF File Into Excel

Open an Excel file with an EPM add-in report already embedded In the EPM ribbon, select More>Flash Objects Click Add, to add a new Flash Object into your Excel sheet Any changes to the Report will also automatically update the Flash Object* After updating the EPM Context Panel or the Page Header of the Report, the SWF will update


RKT

15

Process Overview Embedded a SWF File Into Word or Powerpoint

Open a Word Document or a PowerPoint presentation with an EPM add-in report already embedded In the EPM ribbon, select Flash Objects Click Add, to add a new Flash Object into your Document or Presentation Any changes to the Report will also automatically update the Flash Object* After updating the EPM Context Panel or the Page Header of the Report, the SWF will update


RKT

16

EPM Connector Operations

You can perform the following operations and combine them. Retrieve data, using a report created with the EPM add-in Retrieve the list of databases/environments/InfoAreas for a specific data source Retrieve the list of cubes/models/InfoProviders for a specific database/environment/InfoArea Retrieve the list of dimensions for a specific cube/model/InfoProvider Retrieve members/characteristic values for a specific dimension

The following operation types are only available for SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation: Input and save data Retrieve the list of context members Retrieve text contained in a text file from the Documents view Retrieve property values for dimension members


RKT

17

EPM Connector Features Common to the Operation

Common features: When a drop-down list contains a long list of items, you can enter the beginning of the item you want to select, then press Enter. The list is filtered and displays only the items beginning with the characters you have just entered. All the drop-down lists identified by a hand icon enables you to select or automatically retrieve items: – Bind - Enables you to select a cell in the sheet – Retrieve - Automatically retrieves a list of items available for selection, depending on other filled in areas

In the Output section, you select two refresh options: – Refresh on Load to automatically refresh the data before refreshing all the Dashboard Design components – to set an automatic refresh frequency.


RKT

18

Creating Crystal Dashboards With the EPM Connector Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Describe how to create Crystal Dashboards with the EPM Connector


RKT

19






RKT

20


Creating Crystal Dashboards with the EPM Connector

Creating Crystal Dashboards With the EPM Connector Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Describe how to create Crystal Dashboards with the EPM Connector


RKT

2

Creating Crystal Dashboards With the EPM Connector Introduction

How to use the Crystal Dashboards with SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation, Microsoft version: Design a dashboard and export it to Flash format in SAP BusinessObjects Dashboard Design Insert a Flash object into a report Publish a Flash Object to the Web Display the content of .txt file in the SAP BusinessObjects Dashboard Design


RKT

3

Business Example

Your organization wants to embed EPM data in a Corporate Intranet Site or within an Annual report to Shareholders. You want advanced and rich visualization coupled with the reliability of being tied directly to the EPM data at source. You must therefore link Xcelsius models to your EPM data.


RKT

4

Creating Crystal Dashboards With the EPM Connector Benefits

Benefits of using Crystal Dashboards reports with SPBO BPC: One screen information - benefits of having all the critical information in just one screen rather than flipping through multiple pages. Information at a Glance - Present a wide number of different metrics in a single consolidated view. Real Time Information Tracking Here are few types of dashboards their purpose and benefits: – Benefits of Finance Dashboard: Monitor Revenue, Profit, Loss and Expenses – Benefits of HR Dashboard: Monitor Employee activity, Headcount growth, Expenses and so on – Benefits of IT dashboard : Monitor system activity, this may include database monitoring, server monitoring, memory metrics and so on – Benefits of Inventory Dashboard : Monitor Inventory levels, warehouse and item information, orders and so on


RKT

5

Creating Crystal Dashboards With the EPM Connector Prerequisites

Before using Xcelsius models with EPM data, ensure that the following prerequisites have been met. To build Xcelsius models based on EPM data: Xcelsius 2010 (Dashboard Designer) is installed The EPM 10.0 Connector Add-on has been added to your Xcelsius install An EPM add-in report has been embedded into an MS Excel file

To run Xcelsius based flash files on EPM data: Adobe Flash Player installed on client PCs Cross Domain files established on the server side


RKT

6

Download Xcelsius Xcelsius® 2008 SP3 or Xcelsius® 2010

Available on Service Marketplace


RKT

7

EPM Connector

EPM connector Used to create and configure a connection to more EPM sources, including SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation, Microsoft version Is a component of the EPM add-in. It is installed as an add-in to SAP BusinessObjects Dashboard Design. – To install the add-on in Xcelsius®, choose File > Manage Add-Ons


RKT

8

Process Overview Steps to Perform

To link an Xcelsius model to EPM data, the following summary steps must be performed: 1. Open Xcelsius and open or create your Excel file with an embedded EPM add-in report 2. Generate a Report Definition within the Excel sheet 3. Establish a Data Connection using the EPM Connector 4. Build an Xcelsius visualization 5. Generate a SWF file 6. Optionally, embed the SWF file into Excel with or without an embedded EPM add-in report 7. Optionally, embed the SWF file into Word or PowerPoint 8. Optionally, run the SWF in standalone mode


RKT

9

Process Overview Open Xcelsius and Open Your Excel File

Start Xcelsius Either – Select Data>Import. – Select your Excel file with data already embedded by the EPM add-in. – Click OK.

Or – Use the EPM Tab inside the excel file that Xcelsius provides on starting Xcelsius and embed the EPM report directly


RKT

10

Process Overview Generate a Report Definition Within the Excel Sheet

For Dynamic EPM data in the Xcelsius model, choose any free cell in the excel sheet where the Report data exists and enter =GetReportDefinition() If required, click Refresh to Log On and Connect. This will update the Report Definition cell with report details GetReportDefinition function is supported only in top of ODBO type connection*


RKT

11

Process Overview Use EPM Connector to Define a Data Connection in Xcelsius

In the Xcelsius Menu bar, setup a new EPM Connector data connection via Data>Connections… and then Add>EPM Connector_10 Enter a name for this Xcelsius connection Select Application (For example, Planning and Consolidation, Microsoft version) Select Operation (EPM Report) Select Report Definition (This is the cell in the Excel file now populated with the EPM report Definition)


RKT

12

Process Overview Build an Xcelsius Visualization

Select an Xcelsius control such as a table or chart Map the source data for the control to the result set data from the EPM Connector Data Connection Add a Connection Refresh button to the visualization as required


RKT

13

Process Overview Generate a SWF File

In Xcelsius Design mode, select File>Export>Flash (SWF)… Name the Flash file, select a location for Export and click OK.


RKT

14

Process Overview Embedded a SWF File Into Excel Open an Excel file with an EPM add-in report already embedded In the EPM ribbon, select More>Flash Objects Click Add, to add a new Flash Object into your Excel sheet Any changes to the Report will also automatically update the Flash Object* After updating the EPM Context Panel or the Page Header of the Report, the SWF will update


RKT

15

Process Overview Embedded a SWF File Into Word or Powerpoint

Open a Word Document or a PowerPoint presentation with an EPM add-in report already embedded In the EPM ribbon, select Flash Objects Click Add, to add a new Flash Object into your Document or Presentation Any changes to the Report will also automatically update the Flash Object* After updating the EPM Context Panel or the Page Header of the Report, the SWF will update


RKT

16

EPM Connector Operations

You can perform the following operations and combine them. Retrieve data, using a report created with the EPM add-in Retrieve the list of databases/environments/InfoAreas for a specific data source Retrieve the list of cubes/models/InfoProviders for a specific database/environment/InfoArea Retrieve the list of dimensions for a specific cube/model/InfoProvider. Retrieve members/characteristic values for a specific dimension

The following operation types are only available for SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation: Input and save data Retrieve the list of context members Retrieve text contained in a text file from the Documents view Retrieve property values for dimension members


RKT

17

EPM Connector Features Common to the Operation

Common features: When a drop-down list contains a long list of items, you can enter the beginning of the item you want to select, then press Enter. The list is filtered and displays only the items beginning with the characters you have just entered. All the drop-down lists identified by a hand icon enables you to select or automatically retrieve items: – Bind - Enables you to select a cell in the sheet – Retrieve - Automatically retrieves a list of items available for selection, depending on other filled in areas

In the Output section, you select two refresh options: – Refresh on Load to automatically refresh the data before refreshing all the Dashboard Design components – Refresh Every [number] Second to set an automatic refresh frequency


RKT

18

Creating Crystal Dashboards With the EPM Connector Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Describe how to create Crystal Dashboards with the EPM Connector


RKT

19






RKT

20


Crystal Dashboard Functions

Crystal Dashboard Functions Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain Crystal Dashboard functions with BPC data Display the content of a .txt file stored in content library Input data in BPC from dashboards


RKT

2

Topics 1. Data Input in BPC from Xcelsius 2. Display the Content of a .txt File in the Xcelsius Dashboard

Crystal Dashboard Functions Benefits

Benefits of this feature include: Extended Analyzer is obsolete Report Definition with the EPM Add in More Operations are available with the EPM Connector


RKT

4

Data Input in BPC From Xcelsius Report Definition

Log On to the Source System

Create your Report


RKT

5


Insert the Function: =GetReportDefinition()


RKT

6

Data Input in BPC From Xcelsius EPM Connector

Customize an EPM Connection


RKT

7

Topics 1. Data Input in BPC From Xcelsius Dashboards 2. Display the Content of a .txt File in the Xcelsius Dashboard

.txt Parameter

Upload Document


RKT

9

EPM Connection with operation Type Retrieve Text from Library


RKT

10


RKT

11

Crystal Dashboard Functions Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Explain Crystal Dashboard functions with BPC data: Display the content of a .txt file stored in content library Input data in BPC from dashboards


RKT

12






RKT

13


Crystal Dashboard Functions

Crystal Dashboard Functions Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain Crystal Dashboard functions with BPC data Display the content of a .txt file stored in content library Input data in BPC from dashboards


RKT

2

Topics 1. Data input in BPC from Xcelsius Dashboards 2. Display the Content of a .txt File in the Xcelsius Dashboard 3. Display BPFs Status with EPM Connector

Crystal Dashboard Functions Benefits

Benefits of this feature include: Extended Analyzer is obsolete Report Definition with the EPM Add in More Operations are available with the EPM Connector


RKT

4


Log On to the Source System

Create your Report


RKT

5


Insert the Function: =GetReportDefinition()


RKT

6

Data Input in BPC From Xcelsius EPM Connector

Customize an EPM Connection


RKT

7


.txt Parameter

Upload Document


RKT

9

EPM Connection with operation Type Retrieve Text from Library


RKT

10


RKT

11



RKT

13

Crystal Dashboard Functions Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Explain Crystal Dashboard functions with BPC data: Display the content of a .txt file stored in content library Input data in BPC from dashboards


RKT

14






RKT

15


MS Word & PowerPoint Integration

MS Word & PowerPoint Integration Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain the MS Word Integration with BPC 10.0 Explain the MS PPT Integration with BPC 10.0


RKT

2

Business Example

Organizations that require Month or Year-end reviews in a Microsoft Word or PowerPoint format can now directly link EPM data to their reviews without having to go into Microsoft Excel or rely on screenshots. This greatly simplifies the process for creating and maintaining highly engaging and relevant presentations based on a consistent set of Report data.


RKT

3

Retrieving EPM Data With Word/PowerPoint Benefits

Benefits of this feature include: Easy inclusion of the EPM Data in an organization's existing Review format Supporting all standard Microsoft formatting options Permitting the data embedded in Word/PowerPoint documents to be updated dynamically


RKT

4

Process Overview

Summary steps to execute: 1. Establish a connection from the Word/PowerPoint document to an EPM Source. 2. Create a new Report or copy and paste an existing Report to embed a table in the Document/Presentation. Alternatively, you may insert a Single Value. 3. Format the table or Single Value.


RKT

5

Establish a Connection From the Word Document to an EPM Source Open Microsoft Word. On the EPM Tab, click Log On. On the EPM Logon Popup, for Connection click <...>. On the “EPM - Connection Manager” pop-up, select an existing connection and click OK or click Add...(Connection). Enter username and password and click Logon.


RKT

6

Establish a Connection From the PowerPoint Presentation to an EPM Source Open Microsoft PowerPoint. On the EPM Tab, click Log On. On the EPM Logon Popup, for Connection click <...>. On the “EPM - Connection Manager” pop-up, select an existing connection and click OK or click Add...(Connection). Enter username and password and click Logon.


RKT

7

Create a new Report to Embed a Table in the Document/Presentation In the EPM Ribbon, click New Report. Move Dimensions and Measures to Row Axis, Column Axis and Page Axis Dimensions as required. You may also use the Report Editor Popup or use the Pane on the right hand side to edit Reports. Click OK.


RKT

8

Copy and Paste a Report From MS Excel or Other Document/Presentation to Embed a Table Select your report in MS Excel and use Report Actions>Copy Report to copy a Report from the MS Excel worksheet. Open Word or PowerPoint and on the EPM tab select Report Actions>Paste Report.

MS Excel

MS PowerPoint


RKT

9

Embed a Single Data Value

On the EPM Tab of Word/PowerPoint, select Insert Data. On the “EPM – Member selector” pop-up be sure to make selections for every relevant dimension and measure. Only single selections for each dimension and measure are possible. Default values from the EPM Context Panel will be used for any other Dimensions and Measures not specifically selected in the EPM-Member selector pop-up.


RKT

10

Format the Result Data in Word and PowerPoint

Select the table inserted by the Report. In Microsoft Word or PowerPoint select the Design Tab and select a Table Style. Other basic Design and font formatting options in Word or PowerPoint can be applied to the Result table. You may also use the standard Charting in Word and PowerPoint on this tabular report output.


RKT

11

EPM Office Client Features not Supported in Word/PowerPoint The following features are not supported when inserting an EPM Add-in report into Word/PowerPoint: Standard Excel features. For example, excel formulas are not recognized in Word/PowerPoint Excel EA Formatting Template is not supported in Word/PowerPoint. In Word/PowerPoint, Page Headers are not shown in the Report; they are just used as filters. Data input is only possible in Excel (for Data Sources based on BPC Web Services). You can insert single values only in Word/PowerPoint. You cannot access Data Manager from Word/PowerPoint


RKT

12

MS Word & PowerPoint Integration Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Insert an entire report Insert an individual amount Format and publish a document List the differences with the Excel interface


RKT

13






RKT

14


MS Word & PowerPoint Integration

MS Word & PowerPoint Integration Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain the MS Word Integration with BPC 10.0 Explain the MS PPT Integration with BPC 10.0


RKT

2

Business Example

Organizations that require Month or Year-end reviews in a Microsoft Word or PowerPoint format can now directly link EPM data to their reviews without having to go into Microsoft Excel or rely on screenshots. This greatly simplifies the process for creating and maintaining highly engaging and relevant presentations based on a consistent set of Report data.


RKT

3

Retrieving EPM Data With Word/PowerPoint Benefits

Benefits of this feature include: Easy inclusion of the EPM Data in an organization's existing Review format Supporting all standard Microsoft formatting options Permitting the data embedded in Word/PowerPoint documents to be updated dynamically


RKT

4

Process Overview

Summary steps to execute: 1. Establish a connection from the Word/PowerPoint document to an EPM Source. 2. Create a new Report or copy and paste an existing Report to embed a table in the Document/Presentation. Alternatively, you may insert a Single Value. 3. Format the table or Single Value.


RKT

5

Establish a Connection From the Word Document to an EPM Source Open Microsoft Word. On the EPM Tab, click Log On. On the EPM Logon Popup, for Connection click <...>. On the “EPM - Connection Manager” pop-up, select an existing connection and click OK or click Add...(Connection). Enter username and password and click Logon.


RKT

6

Establish a Connection From the PowerPoint Presentation to an EPM Source Open Microsoft PowerPoint. On the EPM Tab, click Log On. On the EPM Logon Popup, for Connection click <...>. On the “EPM - Connection Manager” pop-up, select an existing connection and click OK or click Add...(Connection). Enter username and password and click Logon.


RKT

7

Create a new Report to Embed a Table in the Document/Presentation In the EPM Ribbon, click New Report. Move Dimensions and Measures to Row Axis, Column Axis and Page Axis Dimensions as required. You may also use the Report Editor Popup or use the Pane on the right hand side to edit Reports. Click OK.


RKT

8

Copy and Paste a Report From MS Excel or Other Document/Presentation to Embed a Table Select your report in MS Excel and use Report Actions>Copy Report to copy a Report from the MS Excel worksheet. Open Word or PowerPoint and on the EPM tab select Report Actions>Paste Report.

MS Excel

MS PowerPoint


RKT

9

Embed a Single Data Value

On the EPM Tab of Word/PowerPoint, select Insert Data. On the “EPM – Member selector” pop-up be sure to make selections for every relevant dimension and measure. Only single selections for each dimension and measure are possible. Default values from the EPM Context Panel will be used for any other Dimensions and Measures not specifically selected in the EPM-Member selector pop-up.


RKT

10

Format the Result Data in Word and PowerPoint

Select the table inserted by the Report. In Microsoft Word or PowerPoint select the Design Tab and select a Table Style. Other basic Design and font formatting options in Word or PowerPoint can be applied to the Result table. You may also use the standard Charting in Word and PowerPoint on this tabular report output.


RKT

11

EPM Office Client Features not Supported in Word/PowerPoint The following features are not supported when inserting an EPM Add-in report into Word/PowerPoint: Standard Excel features. For example, excel formulas are not recognized in Word/PowerPoint Excel EA Formatting Template is not supported in Word/PowerPoint. In Word/PowerPoint, Page Headers are not shown in the Report; they are just used as filters. Data input is only possible in Excel (for Data Sources based on BPC Web Services). You can insert single values only in Word/PowerPoint. You cannot access Data Manager from Word/PowerPoint


RKT

12

MS Word & PowerPoint Integration Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Insert an entire report Insert an individual amount Format and publish a document List the differences with the Excel interface


RKT

13






RKT

14


New UI for Performing BPFs in MS

New UI for Performing BPFs in MS Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Select a process instance Perform the steps


RKT

2

Topics 1. Select a Process 2. Perform the steps

Select a Process The Process (Business process flow) guides users through a prepackaged set of tasks. The defined Process (Business Process Flow) contains the steps that must be completed sequentially. Business Process Flows setup, configured under Planning and Consolidation Administration console are made available within Processes on the Web Interface.

Select Process


Select Process Context

Click “Open Process”

RKT

4

Select a Process (Cont) 1 - Select Process To access defined and assigned Business Process Flows.

2 - Select Process Context This presents the data region where this Process should be performed.

3 - Click “Open Process” To start performing assigned Tasks.


RKT

5

Topics 1. Select a Process 2. Perform the steps

Perform Steps This “Open Process” button will show the set of steps predefined under another tab. Each Step includes Task and instructions to proceed.

Note: List of Steps can be refreshed, expanded, collapsed. Resetting the Process is also possible from this window.


RKT

7

Perform Steps Running Process Instances on the Web On the web part, a new tab is opened for each process instance launched by a SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation user. It is then possible to open multiple Process instances of the same Process, or even multiple Processes.

Steps can be completed and approved after performing required actions. If review actions are defined for a step, they will be displayed in the BPF Actions panel, on the right side.


RKT

8

New UI for Performing BPFs in MS Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Select a process instance Perform the steps


RKT

9






RKT

10


Data Manager UI in the EPM add-in for Excel

Data Manager UI in the EPM Add-in for Excel Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Describe the Data Manager UI in the EPM add-in for Excel


RKT

2

Business Example

In every Budgeting and Forecasting cycle, as well as Consolidation, there is a need to work with data (import, move, delete, and so on), and also a need of automating some processes (running currency conversion, and so on). This presentation will go over the new Data Manager UI (User Interface), which works exactly the same as in previous BPC versions, however the tab is different.


RKT

3

Data Manager UI

The ability to access the Data Manager User Interface is only possible with a Webservice connection, using the standard Planning and Consolidation connection type:

If you connect to a BPC environment using the ODBO provider (for MS or NW), the Data Manager ribbon will be grayed out:


RKT

4

Data Manager UI

The access to the new Data Manager UI is performed from a dedicated Data Manager tab, next to the EPM one (only used for report layout):

Using a “Webservice” connection type, the connection to the Data Manager is the same than the one used in the EPM tab. In that case, the Data Manager tab inherits the connection from the EPM one. Notice that you can also connect to a BPC model on whatever side. Using an ODBO connection type on the EPM tab, you’ll have to logon to a Webservice connection on the Data Manager tab, in order to work with data manager features. In that case, there is no inheritance from the EPM tab.


RKT

5

Data Manager UI

Two ribbons are available in the Data Manager tab: Connection: place where you define the Webservice connection to reach in order to work with Data Manager features. Data Manager Group: place where you can perform all BPC 7.5 data manager tasks: – Run package or package links – View package, package links ,and schedule status – Upload data – Download data – Data preview – Organize package or package links list – Create and manage Transformation files – Create and manage Conversion files – The More button will allow you to either Clear the prompt values or change the dedicated connection for Data Manager.


RKT

6

Data Manager UI

With the exception of the new Data Manager tab, there is no big change, in terms of Data Manager functionalities, compared to the BPC 7.5 version. However be aware of the following: Package links are still only available for BPC NW, and not for BPC MS. Opposite to the reporting part, when working with the Data Manager, you can only connect to one connection (back-end) at the same time. Of course, multiple connections could be setup in the Active Connection drop-down list, but before accessing any Data Manager tasks, you should choose which one will be used for Data Manager tasks. This example shows two connections on which to report, one for Consolidation model, and another one for Ownership model. Using the Data Manager will force the user to choose the correct one before working on any Data Manager features.


RKT

7

Data Manager UI in the EPM Add-in for Excel Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Describe the Data Manager UI in the EPM add-in for Excel


RKT

8






RKT

9


AVA Scorecard

AVA Scorecard Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain the AVA Scorecard


RKT

2

Scorecards Scorecards are visualizations of data on the user web interface. You have the ability to place a scorecard or dashboard on the BPC landing page.


RKT

3

Scorecards Scorecard or dashboards A quick look of status Show status of predefined KPI Link to each visualization type First user interface to access every AVA function – including administrative function


RKT

4

AVA Scorecard Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Explain the AVA Scorecard


RKT

5






RKT

6


AVA Visualizations

AVA Visualizations Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain AVA Visualizations


RKT

2

Automated Variance Analysis

Variance Analysis Root Cause Contribution

Performance Analysis Status Indicator Child Performance


RKT

3

Variance Analysis

Root Cause Analysis This type of analysis identifies a variance based on the comparison of time periods or categories. Contribution Analysis This type of analysis identifies the top two contributors to a variance for two dimensions.


RKT

4

Performance Analysis

Status Indicator Analysis This analysis compares two data values against the user defined performance index of a KPI, then determines the variance. Child Performance Analysis This analysis type highlights over or under performance against the user-defined performance index, at a level below the chosen value.


RKT

5

AVA Visualizations Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Explain AVA Visualizations


RKT

6






RKT

7


AVA Configuration

AVA Configuration Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain general AVA Configuration & KPI settings


RKT

2

Configuring Automated Variance Analysis

Global Defaults Performance Index Values Default Time or Category comparison Default Traversal Dimension Default Component Dimension Non-traversed Dimensions

Key performance Indicators Dimensional Constraints Optional Performance Index Comparison Configuration Association with Model Set User or Team Group similar KPI


RKT

3

Configuring Global Defaults

Performance indexes Defaults at Environment level Applies to Dashboard, Status indicator and Child performance Applies to ad-hoc analysis


RKT

4


Default comparison Set default comparison type – Time or Category Set Traversal and Component dimensions for Child performance and Component analysis Define for each model Applies to ad-hoc analysis


RKT

5


Traversal dimensions Define Not Traversed dimension – excluded from query to reduce size of dataset Be aware of your dimension design because a default member will be used in selected dimensions


RKT

6

Key Performance Indicators (KPIs)

Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) are predefined dimension members that represent specific intersections or a dynamic intersection of a model dataset. This allows you to predefine important data to be analyzed as part of your business best practices in a consistent manner. KPI definitions are constrained to a single model. There can be one or more KPI definitions per model, but KPI definitions cannot be shared across models. The KPI Admin Workspace displays the name of the environment and model. The environment defaults to the current environment. KPIs can be used in place of the defaults defined by the global configuration, including performance index thresholds and text settings. Any explicit KPI definition overrides the global default.


RKT

7

KPI Configuration

Create your own predefined KPI For each model Assign KPIs to users or teams Set Custom comparison type and performance indexes different from global settings Predefine constraints with flexibility to apply contexts with lock/unlock Group related KPIs


RKT

8

AVA Configuration Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Explain general AVA Configuration & KPI settings


RKT

9






RKT

10

SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0, Version for Microsoft Using AVA Instead of Insight

Using AVA Instead of Insight Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain migration considerations


2

Dashboards

A quick look at status Show status of predefined KPI Link to each visualization type UI allows access every AVA function – including administration


3

Variance Analysis

Variance Analysis Look up top contributors to a variance Show the desired amount of top contributors to KPI (Limited to 1000


4

Status Indicator

Quick look at status Same as dashboard Context change can apply in status indicator as well as ad-hoc analysis


5

Child Performance

Find hidden under/over performers Show underperformed child members if a parent member over performs Show over-performed child members if a parent member underperforms


6

Component Analysis

Overview of the percentage of child members’ contribution No variance information


7

Using AVA Instead of Insight Lesson Summary

You should now be able to: Explain Migration considerations


8






9

TZPC10_EN_Col96_FV_Show.pdf

Recommend Documents